^no*n tltB j£.iM^usA4f ^Ue. R.e4*. ^^ed&Uch Cdwa^xli, 3iea*t afj St. Pauti. QcUU^. CHAPTER I I N another place I will deal with the attitude of the public toward Psychical Research, and the many barriers to sur¬ mount in the very best endeavor to obtain a vantage ground. I ask, in all sincerity and in a spirit of humility, the reader to approach with an open mind what is offered in this book, as being at least worthy of earnest consideration, by the ablest and most fairminded thinkers, who can engage them¬ selves to enter upon such consideration without bias, preju¬ dice, or distrust of misrepresentation. I do not hesitate to say that almost universally there is strong objection raised by the individualized public against being asked to admit that they have witnessed occult phenomena; or that they can believe in the possibility of its existence; and apparently are in great fear of being classified as unorthodox. In the case of most of the more important phenomena to which I allude, there are many living witnesses to confirm what is recorded herein, as having well demonstrated existence. I have yet to add to the foregoing, that the earliest record, which with the preceding declaration ofi my attitude, as herewith follows, was constructed and entered as a record, in the year 1894 . The record of occur¬ rences and phenomena was made in each instance, immediately after each seance, from notes taken during the seance; and is the plain unvarnished narrative of an earnest truth seeker, who attended the seances, individual and collective, with an open mind, determined at all hazards to make a truthful record. I am free to state that from the hour of my birth, and through the subsequent years of life spent upon this mundane sphere, I have been blessed with good mental and physical health, with two or three brief exceptions; and since my early boyhood days have lived a life of self-dependence; have had a reasonably successful career; have endeavored to make the best use of my opportunities; and unaided, financially at 1 2 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND least, obtained for myself an education as a professional man; and I believe a fair status as a citizen. This much I state, not to any extent in an egotistical spirit, but with a view to support the claim that I have at least a fair share of common sense, intelligence, and discernment; and am not more liable to be deceived than the average intel¬ ligent man. I have never professed, nor laid claim in a re¬ ligious sense, to being very devout or holy; but have always entertained a respectful, though not unquestioning attitude toward the orthodoxies of the church in which I was reared (Presbyterian). I have never recognized any inclination to materialism; but on the contrary have always cherished the conviction, almost as an intuition, that the few short years of physical existence on this terrestrial sphere, varied with its trials, and temptations, joys and sorrows, successes and fail¬ ures, growth and decay, were but an incident, in the continued existence of the individual creation called man; and that an All-powerful, All-seeing, everywhere present. All-wise Intelli¬ gence, and Infinite Power and Governor of the universe — of which this earth is but an infinitesimal speck, in a boundless expanse of worlds, of planetary systems, and of space — had a system of development with a purpose, by which mankind was to attain to higher intelligence, nobler conditions of being, and purer realms of existence. The earnest orthodoxical exposi¬ tions of heaven and hell; and the familiar pulpit references to man as a body, soul, and spirit, destined either for eternal happiness or eternal misery, with deviations at the starting' point in earth life not discernible by human judges while in¬ teresting, fell far short of being to me at least, perfectly lucid and satisfactory. “Constant and persistent assertion naturally has a tendency to create conviction; and conviction crystallized becomes belief. Belief is not necessarily knowledge, though many assume that it is. How can we reconcile the many religious beliefs, though we may be prepared to admit the sincerity of the many believers ? Not only is there diversity of belief, but equal diversity in the intensity of belief; and does not intensity of belief develop DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 3 bigotry, and bigotry result in illiberality, misrepresentation, and even persecution? The man who ventures an opinion at variance with popular belief is placed in the category of antagonists of truth, though he may be much nearer the truth than those who uncharitably judge him. Christ, according to testamentary evi¬ dence, was persecuted by the priesthood and people because he taught that which was different from their cherished orthodoxies and beliefs.” * Who is more to be pitied than the reverend minister or priest (whose designation means entitled to reverence, which latter means fear mingled with respect and affection) who is so egotistical in his belief, and at the same time uncharitable, that he presumes to pass condemnation upon his fellow man who differs from that belief; and withal so Pharisaical, as he thanks God he is not the dupe his neighbor is? And what must be said of those who blindly adopt a belief, the result of circumstantial surroundings, or hereditary family belief, or by an assertion oft repeated, yet deny others the attainment of a satisfactory knowl¬ edge, from careful and continued study and investigation? “Most men by education are misled; They so believe because they are so bred. The priest continues what the nurse began, And so the child imposes on the man.” Have we not been taught from childhood up that he who preaches and teaches from the orthodox pulpit is a minister or ambassador from God, or, as some say, “called of God” to teach and preach the truth, and we must not question it? Orthodoxy asks us to have faith and believe. It demands acceptance of the statements by faith and belief, and promises salvation; or doubt, and it promises damnation. In business, men exercise what is known as “common sense.” Why should not man exercise common sense in other matters, such as belief? Why shut their eyes to self-evident truth? Will W it be denied that mankind of today knows, or ought to know more of the Infinite Spirit or Universal Spirit God, the fount of creation ♦The above portion included in quotation marks has had previous pub¬ licity but was nevertheless strictly a portion of the original writing, connected with my psychic records. 4 DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and of all spirit power, and of His laws, and their operation, than was known in bygone centuries? If they do not, is it not a sad reflection, not only upon man’s development and intelligence, but also upon the teachers and priests who claim to be “chosen of God’’ to enlighten His people? Humanity appears at all times to be hungry for information and knowledge; and naturally selfish as to its being advantageous to the individual self. It is because of inquiring, examining, and analyzing minds that fresh knowl¬ edge is being gained from century to century, from year to year, and from day to day; as appertains to all things mundane in character, as well as to the invisible forces, physical and spiritual; and who will deny that mankind is the gainer thereby ? In things material and physical, investigation seems to antedate discovery; and discovery antedates utilization. This order seems to meet with general approbation or commendation. Is not the spiritual part of man paramount in interest to the physical ? And if so are not all men warranted in seeking further Spiritual Knowledge? Did not Job (in Chapter XIV, Verse XIV) ask, “If a man die shall he live again?” It is a question which has doubtless sug¬ gested itself to the mind of nearly every individual member of the human race. It would appear not inconsistent that to pursue the study of life one must not stop with the death of the physical part of man, but follow after the spirit. The beginning and the ending of physical life, whether animal or vegetable, is but a change of elements in arrangement or in composition. The body returns to dust or its elements, while the spirit returns to the kingdom of spirit, from which it originally came. Eternal natural law rules the universe. I am in accord with the declaration that we have no right to question or deny the existence of anything, or any condition, if we cannot disprove it. Actuated by this conviction, and feeling deeply interested in some features of psychical investigation, I have during the past few years become an investigator of the critical kind known as a psychical researcher; and lately found myself in contact with some new occult force, as mysterious as it was interesting. Of psychic or occult phenomena, though I have but recent knowledge, and as that knowledge is so new, so sur- CK' — m-o d-.^AJui^' Cr ii^4>^JUA4^ o# ■H.vo-^ttb ^\^auO i^«e^ V<^ 0 'T‘^''l^,*A>%<..‘S^^ /t444>s C' •xi^'HloaO'^<^£ c ^ — 0-0 Ca-h^^\Xt^iL "Kc^ iic CO -C-O-C^ <2o->^ 9 uA'f^ AjCjCk^ O-^AOi- yX^a^AHoJ- /b ^ "Vn^Atj o-tf *H.£tH^ i-t<, ^^-C- j^dj' AamJJL "^VtX^ <1^!. oLsLrCtS *fl“^-<§t(uUill^ Symbolical of “DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 5 prising, so convincing, and yet so entirely confirmatory of the intuitions and convictions of my boyhood life, I ask the reader to withhold judgment until I have narrated in detail the precau¬ tions taken, conditions found, and environments existing together with a description and analysis of a few of the phenomena; and until he or she adopts an hypothesis which can withstand all criticism, as accounting satisfactorily for the production of the phenomena now most generally classified as psychic or occult in character. CHAPTER II A ll things have their beginnings, even the great city of Washington, D. C. As the Capital of the United States of America it has long been a centre of interest; and that interest has chiefly been owing to its official character. How¬ ever, it fell to my lot to visit that city for the first time in the year 1894 and in the early part of the month of September of that year. On that occasion I was brought into contact with Dr. B. L. W. Theodor Hansmann, who had at one time been not only a medical adviser to the late President Abraham Lincoln, but like¬ wise a personal friend; and was popularly known to the citizens of high degree in that great city; and enjoyed not only a reputa¬ tion in his professional capacity, but an individual popularity that anyone might well envy. The penalty which attached to an avowal of his convictions, and of his belief in the continuity of life, spirit return and spirit communion, cost him the loss of these social as well as professional standings, nevertheless a happier or more contented man I have never met. One whose very presence seemed aglow with all the finer qualities of manhood; and in his expressions and sentiments of the right cast, he evolved many in ordinary conversations. Such for instance as “The friends I once did love, I will love them forever;” and again “I love my friends and never hated my enemies.” This noble-hearted man sent me a communication as late as January, 1912; and then was hale at his advanced age of 91 years. On the occasion of our first meeting, he engaged me in conversation regarding matters of present and future existence, which to me was the most vital question of all questions; and which I have since appreciated as being equally the most important question, for the consideration of every man, no matter what his status in life may be, nor where his lot be cast, nor howsoever important, or humble his individual existence may be in the community. He seemed enthusiastic upon the matter, and gave my wife and myself a very cordial invitation to be present at a psychical seance, which was to be held at a 6 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 7 neighbor’s residence the following evening, with the presence of the medium Mrs. Mary A. Keeler, — wife of Dr. Wm. M. Keeler, — who had for some time been ill, but had recovered; and the seance in question would be the first held after the lapse of many weeks, and would be well attended. Without hesitation, so favor¬ able an opportunity presenting, I required no persuasion in accept¬ ing the invitation. As I was not as yet a full-fledged psychical researcher, I tvas not prepared for critical investigation, but rather made myself an individual of receptive disposition; and was quite content to allow myself to be an “initiate neophyte.’’ wherein my duties and privileges were limited simply to observa¬ tion of what might present in an occult seance, and ready to comply with the proffered conditions which were suggested by the white- headed old doctor, who was especially desirous that I should have every opportunity to see and realize, outside and inside of the Cabinet, everything that could be observable, or realized by the ordinary senses. I was introduced to this lady who was designated as a materializing medium. I held a short conversation with her, found her barely convalescent from severe illness; and according to her own statement not yet in normal condition. I was im¬ pressed with the fairness of the medium in granting me the privilege of entering the Cabinet (which was constructed in one corner of a small room adjoining a much larger room), not only before and after the seance, but during the same; and as circum¬ stances developed during the seance, an opportunity seemed to have been especially provided for me to occupy a position which I so very much desired to have, and which I did not even have to ask for. Owing to a weakened state physically, the medium sat for some considerable time before manifestations were pro¬ duced, when a strong voice, which was claimed to be a spirit voice, called out “Reservoir,’’ but with no name mentioned; and consequently some time was lost by appealing to one and another in the room to know what was meant by “Reservoir,” when the explanation was vouchsafed by my being pointed out, at the most extreme point of the circle formation, as being no less than the desirable “Reservoir;” and I was invited to visit the medium where she sat that a supply of animal magnetism or psychic power 8 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND from myself, might be contributed to the now entranced woman, which the reader will understand is not my claim, but the claim made why my presence near medium was required. I had not long to wait, for I stood at her side as she sat with her back to the corner, when I distinctly saw the formations rising before us and passing toward the curtains which opened immediately in front of her. I then resumed my own seat and became witness to a variety of forms as they entered the larger room, from the smaller one, which was designated “the Cabinetand heard the voices of what appeared to be men, women and children, as they advanced into the room and up to individual sitters in the circle. As the room was rather dimly lighted, and as the circle was a large one, and I at the greatest distance from the medium, and as I could not distinguish their features plainly, nor identify their individuality, from where I viewed them, to me it was not con¬ clusively convincing of anything, but it, however, determined my future course should a similar opportunity present itself. I had not long to wait, for returning home and learning that the late Efifie Moss, an alleged celebrated materializing medium, was to visit the City of London, Ontario, I sought to seeure another opportunity of investigating the phenomena of so-called materialization, and of endeavoring faithfully to prove the truth or falsehood of the claim that there is at this day, as well as in Bible history times, possibility of spirit communion by return of spirits to earth clothed in spiritual or transient and visible bodies. CHAPTER III I HAD twice before met Mr. MacRoberts, the Chairman of the London School Board (now deceased). Through him I obtained the privilege of attending four seances, held during a week in December, 1894, three of which were in his own home, and the fourth and last one in a room of an entirely empty new house. The medium and all the parties met at the series of seances were, with the single exception of Mr. Mac¬ Roberts, entire strangers to me. Never to my knowledge had I met any of them before the visit in question. One of the four seances was designated a typewriting seance, of which but few records were made by me. Before my interview with the medium, I determined upon a course of utter silence, as to all knowledge regarding myself, relatives or friends, so as to afford no suggestion or clue for an apt medium to work upon. I sought and obtained during my first afternoon a lengthy interview with Mrs. Moss, the self- designated “materializing medium,” or “materialization medium.” Her physical form was very portly, and abnormally abundant was her adipose tissue, and her movements slow, while her manner was meek and retiring, and her demeanor modest. I was favorably impressed as I scanned her features, noted her action, gauged her mentality, gave critical observation to every move¬ ment, mannerism and expression, lent attentive ear to each and every utterance that fell from her lips; and had no reason to doubt the sincerity of the woman. On the other hand I was in quest of knowledge and asked a great many questions, to which she unreservedly gave answer. For the courtesy thus extended me, and the information given me, I desire to make grateful acknowledgment (though she has passed the so-called portals of death since this record was made). I further desire to here place on record, that contrary to my expectations in my interviews with this medium, I was not questioned by her at all. She claimed that when the circle formed with positive and negative forces 9 10 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND equalized, and harmony prevailed, and the vibrations were right as induced by instrumental music, or singing, she would become entranced or controlled, and unconscious of what was transpiring in either the cabinet or circle; and that usually the trance con¬ dition prevailed throughout the entire seance. She granted me a similar privilege to that granted me by medium Keeler in Washington, namely, that of entrance into the cabinet during the seance. This privilege I utilized on two separate occasions, to one of which I make a detailed reference later on; and on both occasions the medium preserved her trance state, and sat unmoved on her wooden chair. Investigating the Cabinet and Seance Room On the evening of the day of the foregoing interview, I attended a seance which was held in the back parlor of the MacRoberts residence. Owing to misrepresentation made in a portion of the public press, and on account of deliberate personal misrepresenta¬ tion of facts, by illiberal, unfair, and prejudiced opponents of the spiritual philosophy, I was determined to free myself as much as possible from all bias, and approach my work of investigation with an open mind. I took the precaution to note details, and am therefore able to give herewith a faithful and conscien¬ tious report thereof, as becomes the character of an impartial searcher after truth. The front and back parlors were sep¬ arated, partially by sliding partition doors; and partially by heavy curtains hanging from a pole. In the front parlor, next to the street, lights were burning and rays were cast into the back parlor to the south, until they were excluded by the drawing together of these curtains. A dozen men and women and three little girls were seated around the room in a semicircle form or horseshoe-shaped arrangement of chairs, facing towards the cabinet formed in the bay window on the east side of the south parlor. I asked for and was granted, the favor of having the second seat from the cabinet on the south side of the circle. From being so close to the opening of the curtains of the cabinet, I had during the seance every advantage and saw these mani¬ festations front view, side view and back view, from close quarters DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 11 — so close that I was able to discern color of the hair, and of the eyes, see the texture of the garments worn, or draperies cast about the forms. The bay window recess from the eastern wall of the south parlor, had an opening 9 feet in length, on a line with the wall, and a width or depth of about 30 inches at the centre, with the base of the window 15 to 18 inches from the floor. The view from the window was open lawn, beyond which was a low fence, and beyond the fence a passage-way and an adjoining residence. On the inner aspect of the window was stretched a thick texture dark in color, to cover the glass some distance up and thus exclude light from without. The window was securely fastened to the sill. The floor was like the rest of the room, covered with carpet tacked down and continuous with that covering the room. On the northern side of this cabinet recess (or bay window space) was placed an ordinary chair and a footstool. To the front of the recess and at the height of 7 or 8 feet was a pole suspending heavy curtains, which met about the middle thereof.. A single light was burning on the west side of the room opposite the cabinet recess, which light was gently dimmed by a Chinese or Japanese parasol, or sunshade of light red color, placed before it. This light was during the seance regulated by a cord passing from it to the cabinet recess, which as there alleged, was managed by a Cabinet spirit worker, and at times increased or decreased as desired, by or for the different manifestations, so it was claimed. When all was in readiness these curtains were examined, then drawn over the pole, while all present had the opportunity to scrutinize this temporized cabinet, which, as the reader will conclude from the foregoing, I did in detail, during the time prior to the hour named for the seance. I have already stated, that the seances were held in the back parlor of a private residence; and having described the cabinet which the medium occupied on the east side of this room, will now describe the arrangement of the sitters for the seance. The chairs for the sitters were placed in horseshoe form, so that the toe of the shoe would come under the light and a little east of the wall on the western side; while the open end of the horseshoe 12 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND exactly corresponded to the open cabinet on both the north and south end of the latter. The cabinet was closed by the two curtains hanging from the pole in such a way that they were even with the eastern wall of the back parlor or temporized seance room, and met at the centre of the pole. While these hanging curtains formed the western boundary of the Cabinet, they also formed the closure of the open end of the horseshoe circle. The chairs of the end sitters were placed so that if the curtains were lifted the side of the cabinet would be continuous with the sides of the horseshoe circle, with no space to get past the end chairs, except between them, where the curtains hung, a space of not more than 6 feet. Before the seance was held, as I have already intimated, I had made a most careful and minute examination of every square foot of surface, not only of the entire carpet and walls of the back parlor, including the ceiling, as well as all woodwork, but included also the improvised cabinet in the bay window space; and saw that strong nails (which I hammered in) held down heavy-sashed windows, and that every one of the large panes of glass was secured in position by seasoned and hardened putty, while I took part in covering the glass with heavy dark opaque material, to exclude light from outside them, and create a dark background. After being minutely careful in my examina¬ tion, there appeared to me absolutely no possible trap door or aperture, or other means of access, to the cabinet for a very small child, much less an adult or young person, from', any point east of the hanging curtains forming the west border or front of the cabinet neither through window, walls, floor, or ceiling; and as I had permission to enter the cabinet when I desired, I had opportunity to satisfy myself, during, as well as before and after the seance, that no aperture had been created. The only evidential access to the cabinet was between the terminal chairs of the horseshoe circle and by separating the two curtains. All through the seance the lamp continued burning on the western wall of the room, so at all times there was light enough for any of the sitters to pick out from their seat any man or woman in the circle; and if acquainted could distinguish one friend from another. With this condition of subdued rays of light, it would DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 13 seem absolutely impossible, for a man, woman or child accomplice to pass from the room to the cabinet, without being seen by all in the circle, and distinctly seen by those seated near the cabinet, a position which I occupied, and I give it as evidence of my senses, and will be prepared to make declaration that to the best of my knowledge and belief, after a minute and most careful investigation, that neither trap doors nor any other opening existed through which entry could be made by accomplices, in fact the cabinet could not possibly hold at once one-half of the forms, whatever they were, that came out of the cabinet, even if they were packed like herrings. Then there were many forms which materialized to all appearances in the circle, which neither entered nor departed from the cabinet, so far as the sitters were able to judge. All the chairs in the horseshoe circle were side by side and touching, and occupied by sitters, so that no person could ordinarily pass between any two sitters in the circle, and the doors leading into the front and back parlors were locked. No person was standing and no person was permitted to enter the room after the seance opened, and had one entered, sitters in the circle would have known it; but if a person had entered the door, he or she would still have been on the outside of the horse¬ shoe circle, and I feel I have made it clear that no one could enter the cabinet except from the inside of the horseshoe circle of sitters; nor could anyone get on the inside of that circle, by pass¬ ing between sitters, as they sat close side by side; and if they could have come over the heads of sitters, or under the chairs without their being seen and noticed by sitters, would it not have been as phenomenal as the cases I shall narrate? The conductor or manager of the seance was rather above the average size of man, and was acting very much in the capacity of a church usher, with this difference, that he summoned individual sitters to rise and meet the forms that expressed a desire to meet them, and to make announcements of the names of spirit forms, and names of sitters wanted. CHAPTER IV I NEXT come to the record of some of the more interesting phenomena witnessed in the Moss seances, which I was privileged to attend, and shall number them consecutively, for convenience sake in subsequent examination or analysis of them. Someone has said that “those who deny the existence of occult phenomena are simply ignorant, for they have been scien¬ tifically proven repeatedly to have occurred.” One has only to read the writings of Sir William Crookes of England, as well as other scientific men to be convinced of the truth of the fore¬ going statement. The selection and maintenance of an hypothesis to account for the phenomena will give rise to a greater difference of opinions. With those who attended these seances with me as investigators, as well as in my own case, no question existed after the first seance, as to the presentation of phenomena, however much we might be at sea in accounting for them. Though I have passed the meridian of my physical life, I am free to confess, that I have not yet attained intuitive or any other kind of knowledge, warranting my denial of the possibility of occult phenomena. In fact I am not prepared to deny the possibility of anything that I cannot disprove. The reader, while perusing the narration of the facts herein recorded, will have his or her own theory or hypothesis to account for the phenomena in individual cases. Whatever hypothesis may be adopted, it would seem that it must be one which, while im¬ pervious to the shafts of criticism, will account for the existence of some natural law, not fully comprehended, though possibly conjectured. The phenomena continue to present here and there, and intelligent inquiring minds will continue to desire to solve the problem, which will account for them, and lay bare the truth. After all who wished to do so had examined the window, ceiling, floor, walls, and curtains constituting the improvised cabinet without contents, except one plain wooden chair for the 14 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 15 medium, they assumed a position in the horseshoe circle, as already explained in detail. The medium, who was dressed in a plain dark dress, without anything superfluous on the outside, next raised from a seat in the circle, adjoining the cabinet space, where she had been constantly under the close scrutiny of every sitter from the first opportunity she gave them, until she stepped inside the cabinet which I have described in detail, and took her seat on the plain wooden chair, at the north end of the cabinet space. All being seated, the conductor pulled down the curtains, and took his seat in the circle. Those present then joined in singing familiar hymns, and shortly after the manifestations began. It is not my purpose to refer to all the manifestations, but to such only as made a marked impression on my mind. A few apparently human forms appeared, one at a time at the opening of the curtains, and were presently recognized by one or another of the sitters, as purporting to be that of near relatives or friends; and would engage in conversation in some instances in a whisper, in others audible to all present. Some of these advanced either alone, or by the hand of some one from the circle, out in the room and up to individual sitters, myself among the number. (1) In one instance what appeared to be a brisk young girl, who came out of the cabinet, called one of the little girl sitters from the circle, and standing adjacent to where I sat, asked me to examine the little girl’s hair and face, which I did. The former (the girl from the cabinet) then asked me to take her own hand in mine, which I likewise did, after which she placed my hand upon her head and asked me to examine the hair, which I found to be long, black, coarse in fibre and the quantity abundant. This apparition, materialized form, or actual human girl, whichever she was, claimed to be the spirit of an Indian girl. She next permitted me to feel her feet, which were encased in a pair of moccasins; and while I was observing her stature, features, eyes and mouth, she chatted pleasantly; and gave all present an evidence of her agility, by running and jumping upon the floor, finishing by asking me if I thought the big medium could make herself up like a little Indian girl, with small hands 16 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and feet like those I felt. I had to admit my disbelief in the possibility of the large and heavy medium diminishing her size and weight in that manner, or to such a degree. This form disappeared by way of the cabinet. (2) Another manifestation or apparition was that of a little girl dressed in white, at the opening of the curtains, who wanted to know if the sitters thought she was the medium, when almost immediately the medium appeared at her side, having the same appearance she had when first entering the cabinet, and the two stood side by side before the curtains, the medium being appar¬ ently in a trance state. This little girl in white retired into the cabinet, as did the medium also. We were informed that the medium claimed that this was Lily, one of her band of spirits that helped to build up the so-called materialized forms. This same little cabinet spirit Lily, pretty as a Christmas doll, said to me in the presence and hearing of all the sitters in that seance: “Dr. King, when Mrs. Moss passes over to spirit side of life, then I’ll come and join your band.” Chapter XXXIII, December 24, 1912, contains the record of the fulfillment of the promise, after eighteen years’ time. (3) Another manifestation of peculiar interest was the appear¬ ance of a form which was recognized by sitters as a perfect duplication in physique and manner of speech, of a well-known citizen, who had passed out of the body after having been for some time an editor of a farmers’ paper published in the same city of London, Ontario. I was invited to approach the cabinet, but I did not recognize the form or features, for I had never seen or known the said editor in the physical life; and conse¬ quently would not recognize this materialized representation of him; but he claimed brotherhood and designated my status in the brotherhood. I had not made myself known fraternally to any one present, nor had I any insignia or symbols, or anything about me to indicate that I was a fraternity man or brother. In response to his invitation I entered with him into the cabinet, and to my astonishment he did certainly prove himself a brother. I may add that while this testing and proving was in process in DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 17 the cabinet with curtains closed, I could see the medium seated on the chair, her eyes closed, and apparently in a deep trance state, as was her usual condition during a seance. The form, which proved itself to be a brother, was surrounded by a certain degree of illumination, which made the cabinet as well as the form of the medium, distinctly visible to me. Coming to the outside of the cabinet again with me, this form’s grip was strong, substantial, and real, yet seemed to melt away while still I held it, and after first taking three irregular steps from the cabinet, gradually dissolved from view as white or grayish smoke or vapor, entering the carpet at that point. (4) Another manifestation alleged to be that of a minister, having a portly and easily recognized form, was claimed by several of those who knew him in the physical form, to be a preacher who formerly preached in South London Methodist church. The form appeared in the black clothing, as was the custom of the minister in the physical form, and addressed those present in a manner familiar to those who had listened to his pulpit utterances; but added that had he known what he now knew he would have been enabled to teach and preach with a much clearer knowledge of the truth. I was privileged to take the ghost’s hand and look well into his countenance, and witness - the movement of his lips and of his eyes, and hear the breath movements of his speech. He disappeared by way of the cabinet from which he came. (5) Another of the many manifestations at this seance was that of an alleged actress, suitably clad in garments of a creamy white color, who claimed to have passed out of the physical form in Brooklyn one hour after completing her part in an act or play at the theatre. Her stature was taller than that of the medium and much more spare. Her voice was strong and sweet. She addressed those present for several minutes, exhorting them to a proper life and good deeds for humanity. After concluding her address she favored the company by singing in a magnificent manner a song which would have required great natural capability, and much culture for so fine a rendition, on the part of a human 18 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND singer. Had the window been open, the singing could have been heard easily a block away. I was also permitted to approach this manifestation, and shake hands with it, and saw its features most distinctly. This form disappeared into the cabinet from which it had made its first appearance. (6) During one portion of the seance, when all was quiet, the room hitherto dimly lit suddenly became darker. Almost im¬ mediately after, within the circle of the sitters, and about one yard from my chair, I noticed a light upon the carpet, phosphor¬ escent in appearance, about the size of a 25-cent piece or English shilling, which soon became more extensive, and apparently rose as a vapor from which evolved curling flame like white and purple light, until suddenly it took on tangible form, and developed what all the sitters agreed upon, as being beyond doubt a beautiful young woman, clad in draperies of creamy white, bearing sup¬ ported or. suspended above her head a purple ball of light, which, however, seemed physically separate from any connection with the head; and which illumined the entire room, and simultaneously the air was impregnated with odor of a most delicate and agree¬ able perfume, resembling nothing I had ever before inhaled. All over the draperies and coverings of this apparition were small star-spangles as if they were most brilliant electric star lights. This manifestation differed in appearance from the others preced¬ ing, inasmuch as they had a substantial, every-day, solid, life-like physical body and raiment, such as we are accustomed to look upon in our every-day experience; while this female materializa¬ tion, perfect in physical form, seemed attired in vestures and draperies most unusual, but in themselves beautiful and well- adapted in their application, giving an angelic cast to the entire figure. She took my hand as if for salutation, held it firmly as if for support, for perhaps half a minute, and apparently until fully materialized, and explained that she had the power to appropriate material from the medium, and from my own and other sitters’ composition, to form a body to occupy; and by aid of other spirits likewise formed the vestures, and draperies worn, of thought creation from particles of matter in textures in the DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 19 room, and also from the air. The hand appeared natural to the sight, and the touch or grip revealed feeling, solidity, and motion. Her stay was brief, and her departure was as if she had dissolved into mist or white smoke, and was drawn downwards and ab¬ sorbed into the carpet. This particular form, materialization, or apparition neither entered- nor approached the cabinet. Some of the more experienced sitters explained that this form was that of an advanced spirit, and one long since passed to spirit life; but none there were who claimed to have ever seen her before; nor did she give any indication at this sitting as to her human personality or her angelic home. (This was Egyptia, my alleged guardian spirit, as I subsequently learned from her.) I may here remark that I shook hands and conversed with the majority of the forms appearing at this s&nce, listened to the messages conveyed to individual friends in the room, or to the more general exhortations and advice regarding the real objects and purposes of life. All this to me was passing strange, and unaccountable on ordinary or natural lines of investigation, as I shall attempt to show in discussing the various hypotheses. Being acquainted with the existence of the phenomena of hypnotism, which I had for several years been able to induce and utilize for physiological, therapeutical, and psychical purposes, I naturally sought to satisfy myself that this was not sufficient to account for all the phenomena heard and witnessed by all alike. The more personally interesting manifestations to which I could apply critical tests as being more conclusive, and more evidential in character to me at least, I will allude to in detail. PHENOMENA EVIDENTIAL IN CHARACTER TO ME (7) The event in this seance and in a subsequent one, of the deepest personal interest to me, as affording not only more support, but in my judgment the strongest evidential support of the spiritual hypothesis, as contrasted with any other hypo¬ thesis that I have considered or that can be offered, I shall now describe. I have said this case engaged my deepest interest; but I may add that the most conclusively convincing tests possible were presented to my judgment, as I shall presently show. Among 20 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND the forms to appear at the parting of the curtains of the im¬ provised cabinet, was that of an apparently old lady, above medium height, build and weight, slightly bent forward, whose hair was silvery white, whose face was directed towards myself, to whom she seemed to beckon, but in no single particular resembling the medium. Several remarked to me, “You are wanted. Doctor,” and I arose and advanced close to the form, my face being within a few inches of the face presented, which appeared illuminated so clearly and distinctly that I could see individual hairs hanging across the temple. I beheld the form and features, the perfect physical resemblance, and physiognomy of my own mother, who passed out of the physical life, as the result of an accident in my own and her own home, some nine years previously. So natural, so human and life-like was the apparition that it formed a perfect duplicate of my mother — as perfect a view as her mirrored reflection in life, while it possessed tangibility, solidity, weight, moved the eyes as if looking into mine, grasped my hand as really as ever it was grasped, and used the mouth to speak and I heard her breathe. I stood a few moments to test myself, as to whether I was awake or dreaming, or in a hypnotized state. Up to this point, though I had recognized what I have stated, I had said nothing. I then spoke aloud in the hearing of all present and said “Who is this?” The form then stepped forward from the cabinet and in a similar characteristic and affectionate manner to that of my mother when in my home said, so that all present could hear what she said, “My dear boy, do you recognize me?” I replied by asking “Is this the one I am thinking of?” The apparition before me said: “Yes, I am still alive, and am pleased to see you here, and I bring you proof of my existence.” The form patted me on my cheek, kissed me, and said, “Your Pa is here with me. He only recently .came to me out of the body, and was extremely weak.” The form then explained that he, the father, was not yet able to gather the forces necessary to manifest himself, but would do so at another seance if I would remain. All this was heard by the others present, as all assented when asked if they heard distinctly. I at this point explained to the sitters in this seance, that my mother passed out of the physical DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 21 between eight and nine years previously, while my father had only passed out about two months anterior to this occasion; and as I was a stranger to them all, as well as to the medium, with the single exception of the gentleman in whose house we were meet¬ ing— that of Mr. MacRoberts (and I had only twice before met him, many miles from my home) — and therefore all were ignorant of the dates of death of my mother and father, and of any other data concerning them. The materialized manifestation claiming to be that of my mother, also spoke to me in a whisper, and the utterances were those peculiarly characteristic of my mother, and such as no other human being could imitate or know and use them. She took my hand, stepped out into the circle, and was seen and heard by all therein, and spoken with by several. As one or two among the many evidential tests of personal physical identity, or duplication thereof, I give the following. My mother had for many years carried the evidence of rheu¬ matic arthritis in the lower two rows of the! joints of her fingers on both hands, they being, as she used to term them, “hickory-nut joints,” and her habit was, when not specially using her hands, or when she had company or went out, — to wear thin silk gloves or mitts over them, a size or two larger than would otherwise be necessary, on account of large joints, to prevent their being notice¬ able by others. My mother was also accustomed to wear about the shoulders a light comforter or shawl of old-fashioned pattern and size, to prevent chills from the draughts, she claimed. On this occasion, exact duplications of the old-fashioned silk gloves and shawl were worn by this manifestation, apparently as real as I had ever seen them, and further, and even yet more con¬ clusively convincing, myself and others looked for the hickory-nut jointed fingers, and sure enough the evidence was convincing, tested by sight and touch of more than one-half of the sitters present. Corroborative inspection likewise demonstrated the existence in the eye of a brown spot on the white of the globe of the left eye; and a cluster or cord of silvery hair hanging over the left temple to the left ear, from the upper part of the forehead of the demonstrating apparition, which stood before us and talked with us. Both of these latter features were distinctly noticeable, 22 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and had in my mother’s life-time been examined and commented upon, by those who knew her, and to myself they were in this instance a perfect duplication or reflection in the animated appari¬ tion which I am now describing. Space forbids my speaking in further detail. As the manifesta¬ tion was about to go it gave me a parting kiss, and said “Good¬ bye” in a precisely similar manner to that which my mother always adopted, when we parted with each other during her physical existence. CHAPTER V T he next succeeding seance of this series was held a few evenings later, in the same room as the first seance; and under an arrangement similar to the former one. There were twenty-seven persons of both sexes and varied ages present, including spiritualists, skeptics, and investigators irreg¬ ular and regular, so that the company was not as harmonious, or the conditions as favorable as might have been desired, nor so conducive to good results, though to me they were not only as interesting but quite as instructive. I occupied the same advantageous position I previously occupied, with the fullest possible advantages for seeing and hearing, which fact I fully appreciated, owing to the unsatisfactory situation I had, in the remotest portion of the circle, at the seance held under the mediumship of Mrs. Keeler in the city of Washington, D. C. (my initiatory seance), when I neither saw nor heard anything dis¬ tinctly, nor anything evidentially convincing, to a person skeptical of these phenomena, as I confess I was at that time, it being the first materializing seance I ever attended. I mention this here, on account of the expressions I heard during Mrs. Moss’ seance on this occasion, on the part of some in the remote portion of the circle, owing to their inability to see clearly; while others could in the nearer situation see distinctly. The room, as on the former occasion, was in different degrees of darkness with differ¬ ent manifestations. The one partially shaded lamp was kept burning. The darkness was not sufficient to prevent me from counting the people in the circle, and distinguishing the ladies from the gentlemen, the men with whiskers or beards from those who had neither, except just prior to the appearance of an appari¬ tion alleged to be an advanced spirit, when the light of the lamp was very much diminished. This form of apparition usually made its appearance by rising from the carpet or floor, within the area of the circle; and at a distance of two or three paces from the front of the cabinet, and increased by its own presence the amount 23 24 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of light in the room. At this and the succeeding seance many of the same and other similar apparitions, etherializations or materialized manifestations were present that had presented on a former occasion, while other new ones announced themselves. While not desirous of registering all the phenomena, as there is to the casual observer a difference only in forms (with many of them), I desire to make truthful record of those, which appeared to me as an investigator, to merit my own recognition, as evidential in character, and as presenting to me at least, a genuineness of existence alike surprising and convincing, (8) As will be remembered, I received an intimation at the former seance, that my father would probably be able to manifest himself to me, and consequently I had remained; and was prepared for this particular event, and cogitated in my own mind as to what tests I could apply to prove the personal identity. I had not long to wait before I saw this manifestation, in a sitting posture; or as if trying to rise from a low seat on the floor, and beckoning me. As I neared the manifestation, its hands were slowly lifted, backs upwards, as my father was wont to do, when any one sought to assist him to rise, for some time previous to his physical death. His hands were plump and fat; and when the fingers were extended there were depressions or dimples opposite the knuckles of the fingers, and his hands felt soft to the touch. His weakness was primarily due, to the results of a severe injury received nearly a year and a half before his death, which combined with heart disease at the advanced age of four score years, ended his physical existence about two months prior to the date of this seance. The apparition presenting at this particular time, after its formation assumed, what to my physical senses was a solid physical materialized form, as patent to the senses of touch, sight and hearing as any human terrestrial man I ever saw and heard speak. It extended the two hands, and I clasped them. They had the similar appearance and soft touch, with all the tremulous movement that I was familiar with in the physical form of rny father. Not that alone, but the quickened l^reathing so character¬ istic of my father’s condition, the last few weeks of his sojourn DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 25 on earth, was present in the case of this apparition, and could be distinctly heard. As if by touch of me this form gained strength, by magnetism or other unseen force from me (as was claimed by some), it gradually rose to a man’s natural height; and its countenance brightened up as distinctly as I saw the delineation of my mother’s form and features. The paralleling of forms, features and conditions of this material phantom (if I may use the expression), and of my father, were to say the least both astounding and perplexing. I then in the presence and hearing of all the sitters asked “Who is it?” And the response came promptly, as well as loud and distinct, “I am your father, Stephen King.” I turned to those present and said, “Friends, did you hear what he said?” and several replied “Yes, he said he was your father, Stephen King.” This occult development then patted me on my cheek, and spoke to me. I took the following note at the time, “I still live and am able to bring to you proof of my continued existence. I found your mother awaiting me on my awakening into spirit life, and there are many of our relatives and friends there, who have gone over before us. We have learned that God in his goodness has not condemned us to destruction, but has afforded us the opportunity of working out our own salvation. I want to say to you before I go, that we are always near you, and try to use our influence with you.” This form also gave me vocally and audibly this message, “Tell Robbie that Grandpa still lives.” (Robbie was my father’s favor¬ ite grandson). The talking was concluded by some information of a personal nature for myself, and a “Good-bye,” and this materialized life-like physical form resembling my father in form, features and mannerisms, began dissolving from my view into the carpet before the eyes of all; who likewise with myself heard the voice, and those who were near the very language spoken, as above recorded. I would ask the reader what hypothesis best accounts for the facts related in the preceding record? Can fraud substitute a duplicate dead or alive, of the reader’s father, in every feature, whether physical, mental or moral, natural or artificial, with endowments, knowledge, habits and desires that would command your recognition, and acceptance 26 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND by your senses, your life’s knowledge of him, and the exercise of your reason ? I leave you to accept the substitute, or to prefer the original. I am forced to adopt the evidence, as proving the original. At the foregoing seance circumstances occurred which have been ventilated in the press and in court, namely, the creation of a disturbance to break up the seance, the outcome of the admission thereto of a peregrinating actor, seeking some notoriety, by a professed exposure, which was in no sense an exposure, but a contemptible misbehavior of himself and a companion, and thus the seance was broken up, and the majesty of the law was after¬ wards administered by a judge whose eyes were not bound, and hence justice could see that the doings at the seance were nefarious and the mischief-makers were protected while the so- called nefarious manager was sentenced to prison or else pay a fine of $100.00 with costs, in order to be free, with advice to leave the country. This is one example of a person “who could see and know the truth and suffer for its sake/’ CHAPTER VI T he third and concluding seance of the series, which I was privileged to attend, under the mediumship of Mrs. Moss, was held in a house taken for the purpose on this occasion, by the London (Ont.) Spiritual Society, or by some of its members. The personnel of the Society were well known citizens of good repute, several of whom are still living in Lon¬ don, and can verify the facts contained in the records of these seances. I believe that with the exception of the medium, Mr. Randall Sunderland (her manager) and myself, all present at this seance were members of that society; and hence as the sitters were harmonious, I was assured that the conditions were most favorable for satisfactory results. As nearly as my memory serves me, for I did not count them, there were about a dozen sitters present. The portion of the empty house used consisted of two rooms, front and rear, with a division similar to that described at the MacRoberts residence, only the house and its compartments were smaller. There was absence of everything in the way of carpets and furniture, except what chairs were actually necessary to accommodate the sitters, and were brought there for that special occasion. The back room was by curtains separated from the front room and thereby converted into a cabinet. The seance began immediately after my arrival and was un¬ questionably much better than preceding ones in the matter of distinctness of manifestations; but I was fortunate in having new features, and additional evidence of personal identity. I was also especially favored, by having an opportunity of seeing a mani¬ festation which was in the form of a woman who was alleged to be related to the medium. It showed me how the textures for the spirit garments were woven or made, and I also received a special visit from what was termed a visitor from the higher spheres, or an advanced spirit. Aside from the repetition of some forms seen at previous seances and some new ones, the nature 27 28 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of which I have already explained, my interest centered in those which I am about to describe. (9) The form which appeared phenomenally to be the very personality of my mother in the physical form, but with presence- of tangibility, voice and motion, again manifested at this seance, and with some clinging doubts in my mind, as to the possibility or probability of her return to earth in physical form, I determined to be more bold in my requests, and said, “if you are my mother, will you prove yourself to me and those present by coming from the cabinet (which was simply the back room empty) and speak with each of the friends present. The phantom, materialization, apparition, angel, or spirit, or whatever it was, acceded to my request, and I offered my left arm for support, but it immediately took my right arm (the arm my mother preferred in life to take for the reason that it left her right arm free), and she walked with me around the entire circle of sitters, shaking hands or speaking with each and every one of those present in the circle. One old gentleman, the first and only person in the circle outside of myself, to recognize the features, did so, as those of an old friend who used to worship at the same church as himself, in Toronto nine or ten years previously, remarking while conversing with her, “Why, Mrs. King, I used to know you at Bond Street Congregational Church, Toronto, where we worshipped together under the Rev. Dr. Joseph Wyld.” “Yes,” she replied, “that was years ago.” He commented upon the recognition, and added that he did not know before now that she was the Doctor’s mother. After giving me some information of a personally interesting character, and convincing as a test, she said “good-bye,” kissed me, and hurried back to the cabinet. Where am I at, or am I dreaming? Am I realizing that truth is truly stranger than fiction? The room was well lighted, so well that we could read a newspaper, or tell the time by our watch. Well, these phenomena are so strange, so new, so natural, what hypothesis do you, my reader friend, adopt to account for them, and the accuracy of description, the truth of statement, the naturalness of voice, the perfection of duplication, of tangibility. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 29 form, features and mannerisms? I can narrate and describe in detail the phenomena, but I ask you to simply account for them. Are they spiritual phenomena, such as are recorded in history, and in the Bible and Testament; and if not what are they, and what hypothesis will fit better than the spiritual hypothesis? (10) Another manifestation unknown to me, or unfamiliar, but whose name was given, approached me, and informed me that I was being prepared for special work, and that she, this female angelic form (resembling at least to some extent, the pictures of angels) would avail herself of this opportunity to give in¬ formation, and to show me something I had not hitherto been privileged to see. She held up her hands and arms for me to examine them, and they looked and felt like the arms and hands of women, such as we meet in our daily experiences, in fact she claimed to be — or some one in the circle stated that she was — in earth life the sister of the medium. She, the apparition, said to me, “You notice that my arms are bared, and my draperies are only such as are required to cover my body.” She then explained that by the knowledge of chemical combination not known on the earth plane, selection was made of particles of matter, with which were built up not only the bodies, but the apparel worn upon the bodies; and the spirit material to do this was not confined alone to what could be seen and recognized by mortals; but was also drawn from the air and from the sur¬ roundings. She then, with my white linen handkerchief as a starting point, began her work. I placed it on her extended hands in the well-lighted room and in the presence of all the sitters and at arm’s length, she rolled it and fingered it, when it suddenly seemed to break up into fibres and gradually changed from white to a creamy tint, and from close texture to open net work; and increased in bulk and volume, until it began to hang down nearly to the floor, when she requested a lady present to hold two corners with outstretched arms, and slowly walk back¬ wards until she reached the limit of the room, while the manifesta¬ tion held the other end in a similar manner. The fabric then would be, I should judge, about 5 feet wide and 10 or 12 feet 30 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND long. All in the room examined it and pronounced it a fine slight fabric, and compared it with that worn by the producer of it. It was dematerialized subsequently. This surely is evidential, that the apparition was more than an appearance, and had a tangible existence, with form, power and voice. She also gave me information as to what I should yet be permitted to learn and to witness; and among other things said that in the years to come, that spirits would materialize upon the public platform in day light, with some speakers. She like the others dematerialized from solid form into vapor before our eyes, and thus disappeared. Of all I had seen and heard at the various seances, the most startling and wonderful manifestation to me was that of the female form which appeared, and is described as number six, (Egyptia). This same form reappeared a second time, in the last of this series of seances, again coming in the midst of a splendid evolution of sparkling lights, colors, and odors. The form and appearance was like that of an Egyptian lady of rank, a-nd her name was spoken by herself as Egyptia. Her features were pleasing and intellectual, and she was about my own height, but medium build, and was clad in the peculiarly created draperies. She was again covered with bright stars glittering like large diamonds or small electric lights. She placed her hands upon my head, and said she had been with me as my guardian spirit from the moment of my birth, and would again appear to and commune with me in the future. As this was her second appear¬ ance at the Moss series I had favorable opportunity, and saw her form and features distinctly, and conversed with her. I may add that when she dematerialized at this the final seance, she dis¬ appeared into the curtains separating the two rooms, as would white smoke or steam. There were other features which to the other sitters, as well as to myself, were very interesting, but space will not permit my referring to them at this time. All I saw, felt and heard at this and the other seances appeared real; and as far as my ob¬ jective senses were concerned, had palpable existence. Conversations were conducted in the room, between the sitters. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 31 one with another, the same as in any drawing room with a like number, and also between the sitters and their transient visitors; and during the time of this select Levee, there was no discernible evidence of the presence or existence of hypnotic influence, somnambulism, insanity or fraud, A Special Occult S^:ance In addition to the foregoing series of materializing seances, I was also present at a special one for a select number, which proved to be one of occult wonders not a few, which I will briefly indicate. A black texture of close fibre, about three feet high, when stretched as a partition, reached across the centre of a well lighted room. On one side of it were eight or ten ladies and gentlemen. On the other side was placed a typewriting instrument of well- known design, with nothing else visible. Presently we all saw hands and wrists reaching through the texture towards those who were present, as if to shake with them; and v/hen taken hold of seemed like as human hands; and when withdrawn no opening in the fibre was found. Then articles of small size, such as gloves and kerchiefs, were tossed by sitters over the top, and immediately returned through the texture, to the side from which thrown. It seemed as if it mattered not whether soft or hard, for a purse, knife or ring came quite as freely, as a lady’s small handkerchief, or kid glove. Presently the typewriter, which stood in full view, began to operate by unseen power, using those hands and wrists before mentioned. All reeeived typewritten messages, as fast as com¬ pleted, and dropped over the top of the texture to each of the several sitters. The following message was printed on the type¬ writing instrument, in my presence, in a well lighted room, by two hands unattached to visible arms or body, in a fraction of the time it could be done by an ordinary operator, and nothing nearer to it, than two paces away. 32 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND The Message for the Writer "My Dear John:" “Is it not delightful to be enabled to once again visit each “other in the material life, and bring you such glorious proof “of the life beyond, that life that you have always had so “strong a conviction must exist, and yet could not quite "explain ? O how can I find words to explain the joy that "filled my soul, when on my awakening in spirit life, I found “your dear mother, my own dear companion, waiting to give “me welcome home; and gradually in her own loving way “make me realize that though dead, I was yet living; and “that the Infinite had indeed planned all things well, and “that instead of being condemned for our misdeeds, He, in "His great love, had provided a way whereby we might work "out our own redemption. As you know there are none “perfect, no, not one, all of us, no matter how much we try, “are sure to make mistakes, for ‘man is prone to evil,’ has “ever been found a true saying. "My son, as I come into a clearer conception of the truth, "I can more ftdly realise how great a need there is that we "should pass through all conditions that the earth plane can "furnish; and have even learned to bless the hearts and "hands that at times made me suffer in the mortal, both "mental and spiritual agony, as I find it is really for our "good. May God and his ministering angels bless you and "yours." “Father." (My father officiated as a Presbyterian Minister at Pelham, Lincoln County; and at Barton, Wentworth County, in Ontario, when I was a child, and left earth life aged 80 years.—^J. S. K.) CHAPTER VII T here are those, who having never seen or experienced psychic phenomena, briefly dispose of them, by asserting that such phenomena do not present themselves; or if they admit their appearance, account for them by designating them as an hallucination of the mind; or vision under hypnotic influence, or while in somnambulistic state; or possibly the opera¬ tion of the sub-conscious self, or perhaps a trick of conjuring, or fraud. And some there are who assert, “It is the work of the Devil.” While I am prepared to admit, that hallucinations in some instances are due to a disordered mind, it were nevertheless presumptions to claim, that a given number of people constituting a circle, must of necessity be all of disordered mind, because they all agree in their recognition of precisely the same phenomena; and this claim is reduced to an absurdity, to account for hundreds of thousands of people in all parts of the world, singly and in groups of five, ten, twenty, thirty or more, in each instance simul¬ taneously seeing, hearing, feeling in unison, and corroborating each the other’s account of what has presented to their recognition. As an hypothesis, can hypnosis without audible suggestion, silently and simultaneously afifect each and every person in the seance room exactly alike, so that all hear the suggested sentences rolling from the lips of the hypnotically materialized forms, which the sitters in their own hypnotized condition are looking at? Will such hypothesis sustain itself, long enough for a person to give it second or serious thought ? As an hypothesis, can the sub-conscious or subjective self, the ego, or within the Astral, as designated by some, externalize itself and then exercise a constructive faculty, or power sufficiently perfect to operate through its creation, and make results visible to the sight, and audible to the hearing of all alike; and exercise volition or reason, and interchange of knowledge ? As well might one argue that black is white, as to expect a convert to that belief. We have now come to another hypothesis of the skeptic’s list, 33 34 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND viz., fraud and trickery or conjuring. Here we begin with a very large handicap, for we must admit it has in the past, as well as at the present time played, and gives promise in the future of playing a most important part, in deceiving the so-designated “gullibles.” But, is it a reasonable thing, and can it be depended upon as a fact, that it is always and invariably, an imposition of trickery or conjuring? Will the reader deny, and can the skeptic honestly deny, as Barnum or Lincoln said, that “You can deceive some of the people all of the time; and all of the people some of the time; but you cannot deceive all of the people all of the time,” everywhere, nor anywhere? The hypothesis of Spirit power giving rise to the phenomena, is not on the skeptic’s list; but it most certainly must be examined, repeatedly tested, and well considered if it be found, that after the fullest, keenest, most exacting investigation by clear-headed investigators, approaching the work of investigation with an open mind, and proceeding according to scientific methods, that the other hypothesis cannot account for the phenomena. I am compelled to admit the existence of the phenomena of materialization; and many other apparently psychic manifesta¬ tions. I cannot deny their existence, if I am to depend upon my ordinary physical senses, and I have no proof that any one of my senses is unreliable. To me, therefore, the phenomena I have recorded and investigated are unaccountable, on the ordinary plea of deception of the physical senses, by fraud or conjuring of the skeptic’s hypothesis. Those present with me in the many seances confirmed my senses and experiences. They admitted to me that they saw what I saw, heard what I heard, felt what I felt, inhaled some of the strange perfume that I inhaled and described. How then shall these occurrences be accounted for? And if not accounted for in ordinary or evident ways, why should a person who had not seen or experienced them, assert that they did not occur? I have great sympathy for unbelievers in spiritual phenomena; for such unbelievers, whether avowed Christians, or outside of the church membership, place themselves in antagonism to the continued and repeated narratives of spirit return, and DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 35 spirit communion, recorded as truth in the book best known as the Holy Bible. As an investigator among strangers, I had and have no reason to either court favors or fear frowns of any one who was present; and after recording facts, leave my readers to construct their own hypothesis to account for these phenomena, and form their own conclusions. The foregoing is submitted as my testimony, as to the psychical conditions and environment of the medium, before, during and after the first and other seances. I feel that I can fairly presume, that if I gave evidence in a criminal court, before judge and jury in a murder trial, or in any other court, with any other case, my credibility as witness of the facts, would go unchallenged, nor would doubt be cast upon me, as to the reliability of my physical senses employed in compiling the facts as evidence. If so, the same credibility and reliability should hold good here, in the fore¬ going evidence presented to the reader. Along with me' were others watching, who were suspicious sitters. And now I ask the reader here to note a fact or two. All the seances but one, were held in the private home, of one of the members of the local society, where strangers or accomplices could not be, except by invitation. As a true investigator I put my trust in none, but spent an hour in most critical examination of the seance room, and con¬ sidered well, not only all conditions, but devised in several ways precautions, for example, against accomplices, trap doors and secret entrances, movable windows, and unlocked doors. So we locked the various doors, and we nailed the windows down, and felt ourselves secure from imposition there. And further, this feature or phase of mediumship was to some of us quite new, and therefore we were inclined to be quite skeptical, and but few if any of us could be called credulous. Now there are many men, who exist here and there, and every¬ where, and some of these I’ve met, who are ready, and can stay at home and tell you all about a seance, and who never yet have made investigation for evidence, nor had a personal experience, and yet presume to pronounce it all deception, and fraudulent. 36 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and take delight in saying it. To such I say, ^‘you are a 'barrack’ soldier, and out of sight, and know not the duties of a sentinel or scout; and I( now ask you, for once be good enough to now account for the phenomena I have described, and tell me truly just how it could be done, notwithstanding the existence of the various conditions I have narrated in detail; and also explain how fifteen to thirty different accomplices could get into the cabinet in the first place; or how they could individually get there later, if human, and out and away after doing their stunt, as in a play, without leaving a trace of their belongings behind them; and without a single sitter, of the ten to twenty at the different seances (who were up to average intelligent citizenship, of as many well informed citizens anywhere) being able to discern how they entered or departed from the cabinet; or not be able to distinguish either of the men, women or children with incarnate spirits, if such they believe they were, even if they could not quite understand the difference between such, and those which are dis- carnate? But it must be remembered, that all the figures, male and female, talked and walked among us, and were well seen by us. They took their departure, apparently one portion by way of the cabinet disappearing and nothing left behind at the close; the other portion did so by slowly dissolving into vapor, before our very eyes, while descending towards the carpet, and became invisible by dissolution into their elements, which would be impossible for accomplices. These are my quotations from early records ending with December, 1894; and this their first publication. End of Early Records CHAPTER VIII A TRANS-ATLANTIC communication from myself, John S. King, M.D., as President of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, to W. T. Stead, Editor "Review of Reviews," Bank Buildings, Kingsway, London, W. C., Eng¬ land ; per favor of an intelligence claiming to be Hypatia, known in history of the fifth century, as the daughter of Theon; and who made for herself a great and lasting reputation, as a Neo¬ platonic philosopher, and as the wisest woman of her time; and came to her death by being murdered at Alexandria, A. D. 415. She also claims to be the Author’s spirit guide, who can and will assist him in demonstrating to the world the truth of the continuity of life, and that of spirit return, and communication between discarnate spirits and humanity, on the earth plane. On Wednesday, May 3, 1911, I received a letter written by Mrs. Etta Wriedt, “Trumpet Medium,” on Monday, May 1, 1911, at her home in Detroit, Michigan. In the letter she (Mrs. Wriedt) said she was going to sail for England, to fill an engagement with W. T. Stead at Julia's Bureau, London. On Saturday, May 6, 1911, in the afternoon, I had a sitting with Mrs. Ripley, a trance medium in Toronto, who was entranced by Hypatia, the alleged spirit intelligence. To her (Hypatia) I addressed myself and asked if she herself would be able and zvilling to help me with a test which would be evidential of spirit communion between discarnate spirits and humanity? The intelligence replying through Mrs. Ripley’s vocal organs said, "I will try to do so, and hope to succeed." I then made the following proposition, viz.: I want to send a letter and message to W. T. Stead through you, speaking through Mrs. Wriedt’s trumpet, before Mr. Stead opens my sealed en¬ velope, containing the written message signed by myself as Presi¬ dent of The Canadian Society for Psychical Research. If this can be carried out it will be valuable as evidential matter. 37 38 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Hypatia then said, “I will he with you as you write the message.” The following under its own date is a copy of the original letter containing the specified message, which I mailed to England. (Copy) “Toronto, 7th May, 1911.' “W. T. Stead, Dear Sir: — Mrs. Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium, of Detroit, Michigan, wrote me from that address. May 1, 1911, that she was going to sail for England, to take part as a psychic in Julia’s Bureau. I received her letter the 3rd May, 1911. I have neither seen her since, nor heard from her directly or indirectly, and presume therefore she is now on the Atlantic Ocean. I have known her many years as a psychic, and have on various occasions had sittings with her, with facilities for detecting fraud¬ ulent acts; and am free to say that up to the present moment, I have never been able to detect any fraudulent act on her part, nor have I learned of any member of our Society who has, but on the contrary, up to date, they consider her to be an honest psychic. The fact that she will now be a factor, or instrument in Julia’s Bureau, will afford me the opportunity of attempting to prove, under test conditions, the reality of spiritual intercourse, provid¬ ing you are willing to assist me, as herein indicated. I am alone in my office at this time while writing; and not a living human being is even cognizant of my intention; and I have had no suggestion given, out to Mrs. Wriedt of my intention; and I presume she sailed some days ago. In this letter you will find a sealed envelope. It contains a test message to you written by myself this afternoon. It is not to be opened until after the spirit intelligence claiming to he that of Hypatia, has spoken through Mrs. Wriedt’s trumpet. You are then requested to open it, and compare the language of the message with the recorded language as expressed through the trumpet by Hypatia, If you will allow me, I will suggest that you form a circle of three or four harmonious friends 'including yourself, and I feel certain you will be greatly pleased with results. I shall be glad to be informed of the outcome of the test, which, if carried out as I have here suggested, I fully expect will develop in a more or less satisfactory way.” (The test message is enclosed in sealed envelope.) DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 39 'Toronto, 7th May, 1911. W. T. Stead. ‘Waatdoaga’. John S. King, M.D., Presdt. C. S. P. R.” Can Hypatia deliver the message ? [Note: — W. T. Stead did not adopt my suggestion of a circle of three-or four harmonious friends, and Hypatia did not find conditions therefore, in the public seance, as favorable as desired or necessary. J. S. K.] The test of exact message is promised later, hence not given out at this time. I had a sitting with medium Ripley on Sunday, 4th June, 1911, between 10 and 11 A. M. The medium was again entranced and I held converse with the same intelligence Hypatia, who asked me to note this fact. “Mrs. Wriedt will hold a trumpet seance on Wednesday night, “7th inst. It will not be at Julia’s Bureau, nor yet a public seance, “but in a private home of an interested party, and W. T. Stead “will be there, and so will a goodly number.” Hypatia assured me that she will be there, and that if permitted to do so, will try to deliver my message through the trumpet. I had a sitting with medium Ripley on Sunday, 11th June, 1911, from 10.40 a. m. to 11.30 a. m. While the medium was again en¬ tranced, the intelligence Hypatia told me she was present at the seance Wednesday evening last, 1th inst. as previously indi¬ cated, and saw W. T. 'Stead there, hut the vibrations of the seance or circle, were not such as zvould enable her to complete her task. There were about twenty present. My next sitting with medium Ripley was on Sunday, June 18, 1911, from 10 to 11 a. m. After a very brief preliminary talk, Hypatia said, “You are anxiously waiting to hear, if I have been able to deliver your message as yet, or whether I have made my presence realized. 1 have met with partial success only. I have not yet delivered the test message though I have met and spoken with Mr. Stead, 40 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and told him who I was, and that I came to him at your request. Yes, he was told you were President of the Psychical Research Society. I hope to give the message as you wrote it very shortly. Conditions are improving; and when just right, I will have very little difficulty in giving it correctly.” All the foregoing evidential matter has been on this side of the Atlantic, or this end of the new line. Now remembering evidence and dates already presenting, let us note what comes to us through the post from the other end of the line. "THE REVIEW OF REVIEWS, Edited by W. T. Stead, Bank Buildings, Kingsway, London W. C, England, June 17, 1911. "Dear Doctor King: You will be interested to know the result of the test which you kindly proposed. I forgot all about your message. They (the Bureau) have been very crowded, since Mrs. Wriedt arrived, and it was not until we had had nearly three weeks’ sittings, that on Wednesday night (14th inst.) to my surprise, I was hailed through the trumpet by Hypatia, who said she had a message from you to give me, mentioning your name. I had at that time not opened your sealed envelope, and I was therefore not aware what the message was which she had been given. I enclose you a copy of a shorthand note of what actually was said in this connection at this seance. (He had not complied with my sug¬ gestion as to three or four friends present including himself, which was by me intended to be a special circle while this was not such an one, J. S. K.). At the time when Hypatia came, I had completely forgotten her name, and connection with you, but on looking up the correspondence from you afterwards, I found everything exactly as it was said. This is very good, although it has not been quite the success that you had hoped for. Will you write again and tell Hypatia to give another message, and send it to me in a sealed envelope? I will say nothing to Mrs. Wriedt about it. Thanking you for your kindness, I am. Yours sincerely. W. T. Stead. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 41 Enclosure, Extract from minutes of Julia’s Circle, 14th June, 1911,” “Extract from Shorthand Reported Minutes OF Julia's Circle of 14th June, 1911.” W. T. Stead. “Hypatia, this is the first time you have ever come to us. Thank you very much indeed. Do you wish to speak to me privately — I mean personally ?” Hypatia. “I come to you this evening, and I have a message for you, I come to you from my medium who so kindly wanted you to hear from me — Dr. King of Toronto — (to Mrs. Wriedt) and he wrote to Mr, Stead.” Mrs. Wriedt. “He is President of the Psychical Research Society of Canada.” Hypatia. Addressing W. T. Stead. “And you tell him I am doing all I can to help his wife, and also to help him.” W. T. Stead. “Did he request you to come ?” Hypatia. “He did. Tell him I am so happy to see dear old Julia again in her tabernacle of spirit communion. I am very glad to be here tonight, and wish your Mr. King success.” (To Mr. K.) “You are a namesake of my medium in Toronto. I am most happy to congratulate you upon being a member of this Bureau, also the good gentleman (Mr. Peters) who will travel far and near. I wish you all success! and God bless you.” (To W. T. Stead.) “The interview you had this morning will not be a useless one. It will be a very interesting one in the future.” W. T. Stead. “Which interview do you refer to ?” Hypatia. “Sir Wilfred Laurier! Something good will develop.” W. T. Stead. “It was a very pleasant talk.” Voice. “God bless you — Good night.” W. T. Stead was handed roses. Voice. “Conditions are very nice.” W. T. Stead. “I will look up the letter from Dr, King of Toronto. He wrote to me some time ago.” Note taken from a letter to Dr. King from W. T. Stead. “The conversation about Sir Wilfrid Laurier was very interest¬ ing. I had breakfasted with him that morning and had had a very interesting conversation with him, and I think that Hypatia is quite right in expecting that something good will develop.” In compliance with the request of W. T. Stead, I have inaugur¬ ated a second test experiment of Transatlantic Spiritualistic Com- 42 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND munication, the outcome of which will be made known when completed. Second Experiment [Note: — The second communication in this series from John S. King, M.D., President of the C. S. for P. R. to W. T. Stead, is a reply to Stead’s letter.] “The Elliott House, Toronto, 28th June, 1911. My Dear Mr. Stead: Your letter and enclosure of 17th June reached me on Monday, 26th June, 8 a. m., postal delivery. Though everything promised or attempted had not up to date been delivered, nevertheless there was encouraging evidential matter. By a reference to my first letter, you will perceive I made a suggestion regarding a special circle to receive my test message. Hypatia states that she was present before, on more than one occasion; and told me you were present at one large circle where there were mostly men (a majority being men). She could not get conditions to suit her, nor proper opportunity on that occasion.. She told me about the matter on Sunday, 18th June, and I think I sent you a copy of that record some time ago. Hypatia’s reference to your interview with Laurier is, under existing circumstances, quite evidential in quality. Later on I may be able to confirm from my records in the past, other in¬ formation, and will be glad in the interest of truth, to do so on request by you. I shall await with deep interest the developments. Yours sincerely, John S. King.” [Note: — The sealed letter and message, were enclosed with foregoing letter; and were not to be opened, until after Hypatia had communicated with W. T. Stead through a trumpet or other¬ wise. They immediately follow this note. J. S. K.] “The Canadian Society for Psychical Research, John S. King, M.D., Presdt., Elliott House, Toronto. Office Phone M. 235. Toronto, 5. 15 p. m., 28th June, 1911. To Those Whom It May Concern, Greeting: To establish the validity of the claim that discarnate spirits DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 43 can and do return to converse with mortals, (intercommunion of spirits carnate and discarnate) I am making a strong and earnest request of Hypatia — (who claims she was the daughter of Theon of Alexandria, and therefore the veritable Neoplatonic philos¬ opher, who was cruelly murdered by a mob at Alexandria; and she also claims that she was and is to me a Spirit Guide), — to be good and kind enough to help to prove beyond all cavil, not only the continuity of life, but also the intercommunion between spirit and earth spheres; and demonstrate her ability to not only commune with me, but likewise, conditions being favorable, to give audibly to W. T. Stead, Editor of “The Review of Reviews/" London, England, through a trumpet or otherwise, a synopsis of the contents of this pronouncement, together with the test sentence in full, which I have written in red ink, before he (Mr. Stead) opens the envelope containing them; and if possible before he receives my letter containing the sealed envelope and test message. This entire statement is written by myself while absolutely alone in my office; and without the knowledge of any living human being. On a previous occasion Hypatia consented and did make an effort, which I learn was partially successful, and which en¬ couraged the promise of success in the end. Hence this second trial. It does seem obvious that aside from the postal route of the message from my pen to W. T. Stead’s hand, there are only two other modes by which the message can be carried to Mr. Stead in London. One is by the discarnate spirit Hypatia, the other by the incarnate spirit of myself. (The sub-conscious or subjective mind of my own incarnate spirit.) The completed message together with this statement, will bear the date, hour and minute, Toronto time, of sealing up of both the envelopes, and their deposit in the post box. Being therefore in care of the postal authorities, it doubtless would not be opened before reaching Mr. W. T. Stead’s hand, and therefore no chance would exist for the perpetration of fraud. If the test proves suc¬ cessful, I think the spiritual hypothesis will be the only hypothesis that will correctly account for the success of the test. My first message was ‘W a a t d o a g a. [Note: — The above message is not made out for the test is not completed. It was in full in sealed envelope. J. S. K.] “The second message will fit into the first one, and is attached herewith. This test is made in all sincerity in the interests of truth. John S. King.” 44 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Second Spirit Test Message "Toronto, 5.15 p. m., 28th June, 1911. W. T. Stead, London, England. ‘A g r a p t d.’ John S. King.” [Note: — The above message is not made out for the test is not completed. It was in full in the sealed envelope. J. S. K.] This second message will fit into the first or preceding one. The Two Test Messages Combined, Form One Complete “W a a t d o a g a a g r apt d.” I had a sitting with medium Ripley on the 2nd July, 1911, 10.15 to 11.15 A. M., at which the intelligence Hypatia spoke through the vocal organs of the entranced medium, and she claimed to have been with me when I was alone writing to Stead, and knew all I wrote in the letter, and influenced me to make certain statements, more particularly in deciding on the second test message in the make-up of the double test message; and will do her best to deliver it by the trumpet or in some other way as soon as she can. Subsequent to above date, I learned Mrs. Wriedt left England — that she went to Scotland and Wales — that she left for Amer¬ ica and therefore presumably Hypatia will have to use some other medium to get her message to W. T. Stead. I await in confidence the realization of her success in what she has undertaken to accomplish. This now completes the efforts made at this end of the line. [The Titanic disaster put an end to further effort, J. S. K.] Third Experiment, This Side of the Atlantic (A) Copy of a letter sent to Col. J. L. H. N-of Province of Quebec (Canada), while in Toledo, Ohio. "Dear Col. N -; I am sending you herewith an enclosed and sealed envelope, a DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 45 copy of a letter, or special request addressed to my Guide; and left open on my table during the night, for her to peruse before I sealed and mailed it in my letter to you, thus to remain sealed until after Hypatia has spoken with or to you, with the purpose of creating evidence to prove the continuity of life, and the inter¬ communion between discamate spirits and the human. I hope the conditions will prove satisfactory, and nothing hinder the existence of favorable intercommunion. Yours sincerely, John S. King. Toronto, Monday night, 4th September, 1911.” (B) This is a copy from a draft of my request to my alleged Guide Hypatia, as written in my home in Toronto, Monday night, 4th September, 1911; and left on my office table during the night. “Hypatia, Dear One: — Kindly convey to Colonel N-, my Quebec friend who called on me last evening (Sunday, September 3rd), my best wishes for a successful season with his Guide, at Brother Jonson’s, while you assume your materialized form, letting him know you do so at my request, as a test. Sincerely, John S. King.” (C) Following is a copy of a letter written by Colonel N. to me on the 8th September, 1911, and which, reached me the follow¬ ing day. "Toledo, 8th September, 1911. Dear Dr. King: Just a line to say that last night at a public seance at Jonson’s, I was favored by a visit of Hypatia as you predicted. What a magnificent and impressive presence! I was so overcome that I cannot well recall her exact words: — I think a promise made to you, a desire to apprise you of her visit to me. A loving message to you, and the assurance of her continued assistance. She was beautifully gowned, on her head a species of diadem. She walked toward me from the cabinet as a queen. As I per¬ ceived she was coming to me, I rose to meet her. She raised 46 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND her hands signifying she could not be touched. She then spoke the measured sentences, which I imperfectly send you. * ********* Yours sincerely and fraternally, J. L. H. N-.’ [Note: — He was a frequent contributor to “Light,” over an assumed name before this event; and was known by the Editor. J.S.K.] CHAPTER IX T he reader may question the context of hypnosis and psychical research phenomena proper; but be assured it is appropriate, as knowledge of hypnosis greatly simplifies the understanding of both mental and psychical phenomena, and in some instances makes clear the distinguishing feature between a psychologized person, and one controlled in trance state by discarnate spirit from the realms, and doubtless all psychical researchers sometimes come into contact with pseudo mediums, and psychologized persons, as well as genuine psychics. Want of space will not permit of my dealing in detail with hyp¬ nosis, though I will again refer briefly to it in a later chapter; but for the present will illustrate with a special feature case, differing from those usually met with, in that there is a similarity in some respects only, in the speaking phenomena, to that of a psychic controlled by a spirit, which may aid readers in their dif¬ ferential diagnosis between the two conditions of trance with spirit control, and unusual mental operation as a result of hypnotic suggestion. Mind functioning is by an objective portion of the mind, to¬ gether with a subjective portion, acting in unison, yet each with its own purpose to accomplish; and mind as a whole being an attribute of the spirit ego which is encompassed by an astral body of the same dimensions as the physical, and continues to serve the ego after it withdraws, which in some cases it may do temporarily; but finally, or at the death of the physical body must do permanently. In the state of hypnotized subject, when the activities of the objective portion of the mind are made subjective, or cease func¬ tioning, the possibility develops for man’s communion with the incarnate spirit of his subject through the subjective portion of the mind, and in that way, and by suggestion it — the spirit ego — ,may travel far or near in quest of certain definite knowledge asked for. This proven so, then may it not be true that centered 47 48 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND thought or strong desire, or prayer, may be sent forth from human, and reach by harmonious vibration or attunement, a desired discarnate ego, no matter howsoever far or near, for the soul or ego has the ability to acquire from external sources of available knowledge, entirely outside of present knowledge, at a distance near or far, as may be related to the physical body of that particular spirit ego. The evidence in support of this I present here. I introduce Case 3 of my record of hypnotic psychical phenom¬ ena, extracted from a talk given, as president, to the members of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research. I cite it as a case of incarnate spirit communion of my patient, with me, and by such spirit, power obtained, as the body sat on the same chair, with both eyes closed all the time, from my entrance till I secured exact and truthful information from her home in Massachusetts, hundreds of miles distant, and subsequently verified in detail in writing by her aunt in the home. The spirit being the incarnate spirit or ego of the living young woman E. B-then serving time in a public institution. Following is the text of the recorded history of the case. Case 3. Hypnotic Psychical Phenomena. “A woman in a Toronto institution, about 26 years of age, under suggestion while in hypnosis, told me what her Aunt H-was doing on that very day and at the very hour, and for a period of nearly fifteen minutes, in her own home in a town in a far off state of the American Union, talking rapidly and assigning reasons for preferring a different arrangement of the pictures, which her Aunt H-was having cleaned and rearranged. She spoke as if addressing her Aunt and said, “Do be careful, or you will fall off that stepladder.” She spoke of Annie, a little girl who came into the room where Aunt H-was. She men¬ tioned a variety of changes that had been made or were being made in the arrangement of pictures on the wall, and of furniture in the rooms, while she was talking. A letter was immediately sent to her aunt, requesting a description in detail of what she was doing during the time specified, while her niece was in hypnotic state, who was there beside herself, and a variety of details of DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 49 family or private nature. The letter received in reply confirmed what the niece had told us. I may say the woman in this case was constantly under supervision in the institution, and that the official lady who wrote to Aunt H- and received her reply was the party who was present and made record of the facts as they occurred, or as the words fell from the lips of the subject. All correspondence from or to the residents of the institution, had to pass through this lady and she affirms that none passed at that time except her own, and the girl’s Aunt H-’s reply. In the reply letter received from the Aunt by this lady, the confirmation of what was recorded and the happenings as given in the Aunt’s own words, were confirmed, the concluding portion of which is as follows: "I want to tell you that I was at the very time she told you, hanging pictures, and using a stepladder. I hung a lot of them and among them one of her, and I sat down and looked at it, and thought of her; and little Annie was out and in, while I was at work.” It would require several hours for me to give every detail of interest in this case, and to clearly illustrate the various features which present, suffice it to say that the two conditions, which for the present I will designate hypnotic clairvoyance and clair- audience, were distinctly established. I am not convinced that these terms best convey the true idea. It may be that while the natural, or rather physical senses, are in bondage as a result of the operation of hypnosis, the spiritual senses (or operations of the subjective mind) are liberated or unrestricted, or operate as a result of ego power, or the incarnate spirit; or possibly by the use of an ordinary latent sense, which may become active as the others become passive ; or fully exercised by the ego, when becom¬ ing discarnate, either alone or in connection with other new found faculties; or lastly, and quite probably the information was secured by the flight of the spirit or ego to the home, aided by spirit guides, which has been proved to have been accomplished in some cases. Fuller particulars and some other features of this peculiarly interesting case I will now give as a conclusion to my talk on hypnosis. In preserving the facts for record, I must protect the 50 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND identity of the individual personality, and she the subject shall therefore receive, or be known by, the fictitious initials of E— B—. E- B-was of fine figure, intellectual countenance, well educated, peculiar temperament, self-willed, strong-minded, some¬ what reckless, and had wandered from the path of propriety, and had met with kindred companionship in Canada; and ended that particular career by entering an educational and industrial institu¬ tion. It was while there I treated her for insomnia and other nervous conditions. This was done by placing her in hypnotic trance. It was by her own solicitation, endorsed by the strong request made to me, by her brother — a professional man — and her Aunt H- and with the cognizance and approval of her mother, and with the presence and consent of the official lady who had her in charge in the institution, that I undertook to bring about a reformation of character. Her condition at times suggested a double personality. The chief point sought, aside from treating her by suggestive therapeutics, for insomnia and nervousness, was to eradicate the vicious tendency of her normal character; and to establish a fixedness or stability of character on a higher plane of morality by psychical treatment. On the 8th of May, 1907, having with no loss of time placed E. B. in the somnambulistic stage of hypnosis, I addressed her as she sat before me in a chair near the official lady, who made record of her statements. I said, “You are shortly to leave us for your distant home. This change can be made an important epoch in your life; anterior to this time and this event, there is much that is regretable; and much that you fain would forget if you could. Before you is a life of credit and honor, or otherwise, as you choose to make it. The decision rests with yourself, and I shall be pleased if you will commit to writing your own resolution with reference thereto before we separate.” No other suggestion was given on that occasion and no further word spoken at that time. Paper and pencil were on the desk at hand, and without any hesitancy, and without even opening her eyes even momentarily, she reached for the pencil and began writing at once the following, which was copied from the original DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 51 which was given to her when leaving the institution with her aunt who came to meet her, and escort her home. “I do faithfully promise through or by the help of the Unseen yet Guiding Force that we call God, to hereafter refrain from doing or saying anything debasing, or grievous to any of my family or friends; that the kind advice given me by Dr. King and Mrs.-I will remember and adhere to, and be a help and comfort to my family and friends, and earn by so doing the respect and confidence of family, friends, and humanity.” Signed E- B-. The foregoing “decision” was written rapidly and in a very fine style, the eyes meanwhile remaining closed. On the 9th May, 1907, we sat again and when in a similar hypnotic state she spoke as if inspired. Her remarks were as if delivered to people everywhere, that is in general, and her quota¬ tions from various writers and authors, and distinguished literary men, such as one would expect only from a scholar or literary character, and that they were accompanied by emotion was apparent as her face reddened, and the tears rolled down her cheeks. The official lady having E. B. in charge wrote to the aunt after my third treatment and in the course of her letter said: “You would have been greatly edified by everything E. said in her trance state. Her thoughts were beautiful and beautifully expressed. Among other things she then spoke of the great debt she owes all of you, speaking thus, ‘Up to now, or quite recently, you could write across my life “failure.” While I have failed with empty pockets, I have been benefited in experience. I feel like calling my creditors together and trying to pay back. I owe you. Mother, more than I can ever repay. You are the heaviest Creditor. I shall liquidate that debt. Don’t press. Mother, don’t foreclose. I’ll be such a comfort. Mother, I’ll pay your debt. M-’s. I’ll be companionable, I will make home so happy for him; when he has a home of his own, he can look back on the happy home here. Aunt H-, our debt is too great to tackle I 52 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND fear at all; but I will devote my life to you and Mother.’ ” Our next sitting was on the 12th June, 1907, I had said to her that today’s sitting might be the last we would have together. It was a short sitting; and while E. B. was in a deep stage of hypnosis, both eyes being closed, I asked her if there was any¬ thing she would like to say or write, when she reached for the paper and pencil and wrote what follows — “The cross-roads are before me, and I stand to choose my path. Strange to say I do not hesitate, for I can clearly discern the best road to walk upon. May be it’s the narrowest, thereby not permitting any useless luggage of the past to accompany me. From this time forward I am going to walk that road, cost what it will, and when I return to those nearest and dearest to me, it well be with that resolution almost a reality, which will I trust in time become part of myself. I cannot do this in myself, yet I feel after seeing Dr. King that I could move mountains almost, and I feel sure that the good helpful influence he and Mrs-have had over me will tell for good.” Signed E, B-, It was only on the day of departure from the Institution that E. B. was made aware of the resolutions she had made and signed, they being handed to her as she left Five years later, or in January, 1912, those in blood relationship with E. B. are inclined to the belief, that there is a permanent change in her character and habits, in accordance with the high ideals she herself had enunciated and signed on the foregoing occasions. Now I submit that had that woman been heard speaking as she did on the rostrum of a spiritual meeting in one of the halls or meeting places in this city, or any other place, she would have been designated by a large proportion of her auditors, sympa¬ thetically in accord with the spiritual philosophy, as a medium speaking under the inspiration of a discarnate spirit. It was simply her own inspiration, acting on a well-timed gentle sugges¬ tion, made to or through her subjective mind, and set in motion by her own incarnate spirit. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 53 In this connection I may say I have the strong conviction that both clairvoyance or discernment of things in most persons, in¬ visible to the human eye, and clairaudience or hearing what is in most persons, inaudible to the human ear, are spirit senses still belonging to the ego, when it becomes discarnate; and that they must be recognized, as subconscious in the human. Though all possess these senses subjectively in human life, they are not usually recognized by the physical objectively; but really are a part of the outfit of the incarnate spirit self, and ready for utility when it becomes discarnate. Its development in man is but a springing up from spirit in the subconscious self. This is evident but relatively rarely in normal life, and sometimes also happens as evidence in a deathbed declaration, just before the separation of spirit body from the earthly one. CHAPTER X I MAY premise for general information, that when I began my investigations of hypnotism, and hypnotic phenomena, some thirty years ago, I met with difficulties and discourage¬ ments which no longer exist. Fear of heterodoxical classification, by members of the medical profession, held back several of my confreres, who with myself desired to investigate, with a view to demonstrate its therapeutical advantages. For a few years there were none of my professional brethren with whom I could exchange experiences. At that time many persons asserted that hypnotism was either an hysterical condition, or more probably humbug; and that a medical man was in bad form, having any¬ thing to do with it; and that I was credulous enough to be deceived. I held a- quiet tongue, and continued my investigations, and soon realized that I was well repaid for all the time spent in this unpopular line of research work, by the knowledge I was acquiring. But witness the wonderful change in individual and wide-spread knowledge; and the strides made by science; and the great advancement of public opinion, that has taken place during these years. Many members of my own profession, as well as the public, have come to the recognition of the truth or verity of hypnosis, and the momentous force and power of suggestion; and realize from becoming more or less familiar with either its physiological, therapeutical, or psychical phenomena, that it has important uses and that they are able to give answer to the question “What good is it?” By study and experience they have demonstrated some of its practical utilities, as well as marked out new features for investigation. At the time above referred to, I rested under an obliquity, because I did believe, and desired to satisfy myself of the truth of my belief, by investigating the phenomena of hypnotism and power of suggestion. The psychical features of hypnosis a few years later, led me to other newer and more important investiga¬ tions into the psychical phenomena of spiritistic power; and study 54 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 55 of the spiritual philosophy; and consequently following close upon the obliquity which by my previous venture, I had brought upon myself, I found that not only strangers, but acquaintances, friends, and relations were alike in their attitude towards me; and each and all, including my professional brethren, continued heaping further and greater manifestations of disapproval upon me. Sug¬ gestions were not infrequent that I was showing some indications of a disordered mind, due to my proclivities for “ghost hunting.” Others who had ventured to make investigations as to both of these classes of phenomena, feared for their reputations, and discontinued them; while some of the self-wise ones, or members of the clan, would sneeringly allude to me, and were guilty of pseudology. So I soon found myself comparatively alone; but became more determined than ever to demonstrate the truth or falsity of those varied hypnotic and spiritistic phenomena which were claimed by the few to be verities, which my intuitions en¬ dorsed, while the masses who embraced orthodox views zvithout proof, demonstration or even enquiry, as true, passed judgment and affirmed that such phenomena were not real, and were im¬ possible, or else creatures of imagination, or the production of fraud. From first to last I endeavored to be consistent, acting from self-satisfying integrity of motive. I felt competent to’ thwart the shafts of obliquity aimed from all sides at me. I was' honest with myself, in the undertaking I had engaged in, to this extent at least, that while not discarding the faith and belief of my parents and ancestry, which I still possessed, nevertheless with hope and confidence, I sought for a confirmation of the evidences, which presented in the past, and are recorded among the other evidences found in the authoritatively accepted records of the old and new Testaments. The discovery of my ability to commune zvith the incarnate spirit of my fellow human being, an instance of zvhich is found in the chapter on hypnotic psychic phenomena (see preceding chapter) ; and the establishment in my mind of the reasonable conjecture or intuition, that the same spirit continued in existence after dissolution of the body unimpaired, became one of my strongest incentives to prosecute my investigations after the spirit. 56 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Ignoring all discouragements, and mostly singly and alone (save the last brief years when my wife joined me), and without either donation, endowment, or co-operation, I continued my investiga¬ tions until rewarded by the spirit guides, that led me to discover the brilliant and most valued “gem of truth,” that so long had been hid from my view. I feel that this is the right place to recognize all those who have in the past so charitably bestowed their sympathy and pity upon their brother, (myself) who unlike themselves, was not content to profit solely by the results produced by the physical and mental activity of others; and who having accomplished something by his investigations, feels amply recompensed, for the time and energy bestowed, and money expended; and thanks them for the stimulus which their attitude towards him supplied; and in acknowledgement of its influence reciprocates, by first demon¬ strating what he has accomplished; and secondly thanking them for the undesigned aid, their attitude gave him, in strengthening his resolution and purpose. Upon reflection I believe it will be found, that most people who are in search of new or primary knowledge, have a lonely journey, and often a long one; but above all an unsympathetic and unaided one. Some there are ready to belittle the project; others will dis¬ credit the projector; while the many exhibit indifference, or ques¬ tion the wisdom of it. “What good is it?” or “What good will it be?” are the questions one frequently hears. Each individual questioner considering it from his own point of view, as to whether or not of advantage to himself personally. The uninformed, if sincere in their inquiry, are entitled to know something of the purpose of psychical research, and whether or not it be like the finger post on the highway to indicate the direc¬ tion to be taken. When traveling we naturally want to know something of the terminus from the finger board; the direction and nature of the road may be indicated, still we look for some one who is familiar with the locality, and can inform us as to details, or give us information that we feel is necessary to guide us. So when the question of “What good is it all?” was pro¬ pounded to the earliest astronomer, who through his instruments DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 57 and various devices to be used, was peering into the great and boundless ethereal immensity overhead; and who found in that as yet unknown distant location bright orbs, planets and myriads of stars, he could only say he was investigating; and after lapse of time he was doubtless asked by his halting fellow men “Now that you have discovered these, what good is it?” He probably looked upon his interrogator, and answered with humility, “I cannot yet inform you. I am only started in my investigations; but my intuitions and hopes are meeting with encouragement, that lead to a belief that I will yet reveal the answer to your question.” We have lived to learn in our school day acquirement of knowledge, that the relationship of those orbs or suns, even | the distant planetary systems, have not only their local uses, but are parts of one stupendous whole, and may contribute in some measure at least, to the conditions of existence upon our little grain of earth, designated world, which is a mere speck among the myriads that exist. Again Christopher Columbus, the great explorer, who in response to his intuitions and convictions, sought to demonstrate their reality, at first met with great opposition, and doubtless the ques¬ tion oft’ repeated “What good is it?” or “You don’t know where you’re going, or where you’ll land” was offered to discourage his proposed undertaking to sail out upon the unknown waters, in search of unknown land, hoping to meet unknown people. Nevertheless, in his isolation, with a select few helpers and follow¬ ers, he started with intrepid mien upon a sea whose extent he did not know, but craved to know, until his reward came, after earnest investigation, in the discovery of a mighty continent, peopled with another class of incarnate spirits; and doubtless with a soul-felt satisfaction to himself, on his return proclaimed his discoveries for the benefit of his fellow men, and the “good of it” has since developed. In more recent times it may be noted that Franklin, the kite¬ flying investigator of the air, discovered within the limits of his kite line, the existence of electricity. Those who were his ques¬ tioners then, as some would be today with their self-limited wis¬ dom, inquired “Now that you have found out by your kite flying 5S DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND that there is electricity in the air, what good is it ? — God created it for some purpose of His own, and you should not try to find out God’s secrets.” The epoch of time — limited on the one hand by Franklin and his experimental investigations, and on the other by the electrical wizard Edison, and Marconi the incarnate spirit, who not only sends invisible messages from continent to con¬ tinent, from a distributor to a receiver, but sends them through an invisible medium, capable of various degrees of vibrating motion, the possibility of which was questioned only a very few years ago by men of science,—is but brief. Co-existent with these are other almost equally notable electrical wizards, who are still engaged in the work of investigation; and who have developed the vast treasures of utility, not only in the air, but everywhere in creation, a power which is universally recognized and appreciated. Whatsoever the position and place assigned to individualized humanity on the earth plane, to each and all the question of the soul’s future state, as being applicable to all, is the greatest ques¬ tion, and of the first and most momentous importance to the individual, of any question hitherto presented to the human mind, for the reason that its individual creation is the result of the Infinite’s design, and for a purpose. The question of salvation, irrespective of plan or source of exposition, is one which mortal man is naturally directly interested in, has belief in, and has faith that provision exists for his in¬ clusion. Then what more natural to man than a desire to be absolutely sure without any misgivings, that his belief and faith are well founded? What more natural and what more justifiable than to think of the hereafter, and to question within one’s own conscious self whether his faith and belief fully coincide with the occasional intuitions which appear to have contact with his reason, and from time to time impress it. And further, what more natural when placing the lifeless remains of parents, brothers, sisters, husband, wife, children, one by one, in their tenement of cold clay, than to raise the thoughts from the perishable, now deposited, to the imperishable ego, the individual personality or soul con¬ taining life, which has taken departure from the physical to — DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 59 where? And to question self whether that is the final parting from our loved ones, or whether we shall again meet them in the “sweet bye-and-bye ?” Or whether it be true that they are the angels hovering 'round; or whether there be continuity of family life, and association in spirit realms? The limitation yean of the allotted span of three score years and ten, together with added years by reason of strength, covering infancy, childhood, youth and manhood, should be a period of life offering vantage ground, physically, mentally, and spiritually, to one in the fullest enjoyment of physical and mental health and strength, for investigation, weighing of evidence, reflection, and self-preparation for that approaching time, be the years few or many, when we shall know our destiny. It should at least prevent a thoughtless indifferent attitude, on any question pertaining to each individual unit in the universe, and more especially on the most important question to which any human being can give con¬ templation, the question of final destination, and the purpose or object of his individual existence. If scientists and learned men are justified in their inquiry into the origin, growth and development of human life, and who can deny their right, then am I and others not also as fully justified in our enquiry into life’s continuity, and true destination? In other words it is recognized as legitimate to study conditions past, present and future, of earth, air and sea; and so I claim it is quite as legitimate to learn what we can of man in both time and eternity. It would seem unreasonable, useless, and folly that I should have ever had an individual existence if death of the body ends all. If there be no other answer to the question of “What is the good of psychic investigation?” or more properly speaking “What is the good or benefit of finding out that you can commune with spirits?” I affirm that if for no other reason, this is not only my answer, but my justification. . . . After I had proved by my investigations, that my loved ones, who are discarnate spirits, can come to me on thought waves, or by soul power, and by the aid of mediums, and have come, as sworn testimony declares in following pages of the book, not once but repeatedly by aid of 60 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND guides and different mediums or instruments, not in a single instance, but through one phase and instrument (or medium), viz.: a trumpet phase and medium in one place; a materializing phase and medium in another; and through a human-psychic-telephone and automatic medium in a third; and proved and doubly proved their identity, and established their personality in each case by tests agreed upon during life, thus proving the truth; it must needs be to me and to others a solace and a comfort, and enhance my personal happiness during my remaining years, to know I can reunite with those loved ones who have passed out of the physical body, and into higher, purer, nobler realms where they claim they have found themselves in a more perfect condition of being, with environment and occupation best suited to their sev¬ eral existences; where harmony and progression are stated to be of Heaven’s eternal laws, and can and do, with favorable condi¬ tions existing, commune with me; and we will be enabled, each one of us, eventually to fulfil the future mission of our continued existence as a unit ego, in the great illimitable universe. It is my desire to have it well understood that I am. not taking issue with, nor trying to controvert the attitude assumed by, nor discriminate against those who are wholly satisfied with faith and belief alone, however much they fail to agree in details; but that I clearly and definitely state that my investigations have been pursued for fully twenty-five years, with a view to demonstrating my intuitions and belief to be true. I have presented circum¬ stantial evidence in the foregoing chapters; and am presenting direct evidence as addressed to the senses and conscious under¬ standing, in the chapters to follow, which I claim established their personality in each case by tests agreed upon in life, thus proving beyond all cavil in the special individual cases at least, not only continuity of life, but spirit return and spirit communion; and these special cases establish the probability of a general applica¬ tion of the claim. In this connection I may say the combination of the old and new Testament, commonly known as the Bible, apparently abounds in records of all phases of psychical phenom¬ ena. These evidences are either true or false. Old orthodoxy in its several organizations affirms and proclaims them all to have DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 61 been true at the time. If biblical psychic manifestations are accepted now by faith and belief as facts, why should not psychic manifestations at the present time be so accepted? And if not, what reason exists for objecting to psychical research or investiga¬ tion to ascertain the truth? If these manifestations were facts in bible times (and I do not take issue with orthodoxy on that con¬ tention) how can orthodoxy deny the possibility in our day and generation of similar natural psychic occurrences as those of by¬ gone times ? Natural law does not cease to exist at the dictum of Ecclesiastical or any other earthly authority, and hence still exists, and is quite as real now as it could have been then. It would almost seem as if some persons were fearful lest some alleged facts should be proven by research methods to be true; or on the other hand that other alleged facts shoidd be disproven. On entering upon my investigation I determined that I could, as any careful discerning person could, detect and expose fraud if it existed. The more minutely careful I became in the Moss series of investigations, the more I was baffled. I always had a belief or conviction, that spirits might still return, but spirit com¬ munion with earth folk appeared to be more or less improbable. My belief in the last respect was wrong, as has many a time been proved, not only in my case, but in the case of very many others. Knowledge More Valuable Than Belief Where is the man or woman who having attained maturity has not often noted the death and burial of a belief long cherished? Let any one look back over their life’s record. They will find in it many, very many changes of opinion or belief; and in some instances direct reversals of former beliefs. What has brought it about ? Knowledge gained. Let me give illustrations applicable to a generation or two ago. What would our grandparents have said if they had been told that by the aid of electricity messages would be sent from Washington to Paris, France; or from Toronto to London, England, after breakfast; and an answer received back before dinner; when it had taken these same grand¬ parents six to eight weeks to make their trip across the Atlantic in 62 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND a sailing vessel? If we had heard their reply, would it not most likely have been, “ridiculous, because it is impossible.’’ In my own mundane experiences, like others whom I have known, early beliefs or disbeliefs have later been proven wrong by knowledge gained. The cable and telegraph enable us at the present time to communicate with others successfully; yet time and demonstration were required by their discoverers and pro¬ moters, before they were able to overcome disbelief in their possi¬ bilities, with absolute knowledge. So also in the case of Stephenson the Engineer, who first harnessed steam. Disbelief and ridicule were expressed freely by his countrymen, when he claimed he had invented an engine and discovered how he could propel it by steam. But he proved his assertions to be true. The present day universality of its applica¬ tion as a world-wide utility, in a great variety of ways, truly demonstrates it, for steam as a wonderful power, on a small scale, as well as in the stupendous engines, and mighty machinery operating in all civilized lands, or in the floating fortresses, or superdreadnoughts on all seas, thus proves the original, or former existing belief unreliable, when knowledge, from demonstration and observation, was in the same countrymen’s possession. Many a person a few years ago*, hearing it said that they could stand at one end of a wire, fifty, a hundred, or five hundred miles in length, and speak into an instrument attached to the wire, called a telephone, ask for and directly hold converse with an acquaintance or friend at the other end of the wire, and clearly distinguish, not only the language, but the very characteristics of the voice and peculiarity of expression beyond any doubt, would have shaken his wise head, indicating his ripe unbelief of the assertion, and had a clear conviction or belief that such a result was certainly impossible for many reasons, which were readily offered. Time brought with it practical experience. Investigation established the truth, hence that belief has had, along with many other beliefs, its death and burial. What caused its death? Knowledge. In more recent years marconigrams were pronounced by scien¬ tists as impracticable or impossible, for they considered it quite impossible to send messages across the ocean without a wire; but DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 63 that belief has also been disposed of by the succeeding universal knowledge that wireless messages are passing to and fro in all directions, over both land and sea. Well and truly has Edison been designated “wizard,” because of the various electrical accomplishments he brought into existence. How could anyone previously thereto conceive it possible to per¬ fectly reproduce a “record” for preservation and future rendition of the human voice, in the speech of a great statesman, or the song of a vocal artist, when no person as yet had been able with the best endeavor to perfectly repeat or duplicate either, with like voice, tone and rendition, for even a brief few minutes, in the presence and judgment of a competent critic; and would not such disbelief seem well founded until knowledge of Edison’s demonstration disproved that attitude? Likewise in the case of wireless telephone, moving pictures and many other discoveries, how easily knowledge dethrones previous belief, or disbelief. If we examine'ourselves wo find that our thoughts and beliefs have undergone wonderful change, from our childhood beliefs to our adult knowledge, in very many instances, as for example the toy balloon, held captive by a string in our youth, if allowed to escape, was carried higher in the air, and blown far away by the wind; but then we believed its only use was for amusement, and could never be of practical utility, for air-ships could never carry passengers and navigate the air as ships upon the water do; and yet only a little while ago a score or more people in a single airship are reported as riding through the air. Knowledge brought that airship to a perfection which enabled it to go hundreds of miles at a velocity doubling the speed of a railway train. When the youth reached manhood his thoughts and beliefs became altogether changed, for from the toy has been developed airships propelled by machinery, while some of them have changed to dreadnoughts and other warships comprising fleets, which engage in warfare with other fleets in the air, or on the sea as well as with earth’s armies below them. So also knowledge, the outcome of investigation, has enabled men to construct boats for warfare of such utility that their destructive power can be employed by 64 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND trained men within them, while in action on the surface of the ocean, or to escape destruction by the enemy, by diving beneath the surface for a definite time and escape pursuit, or even pursue the small boat, or that laden with human freight, and even attack the greatest dreadnought of war, and from its own submarine nearness deal that monster a wound sufficient to sink it. These foregoing phenomenal demonstrations of fact have been given during the world’s greatest war. Belief in their possibility would have been discredited or considered chimerical, not many years ago, but at present day everybody knows it is so. Here again present knowledge supersedes in value previous belief enter¬ tained in the same human lifetime. In this volume is presented some of the many evidences which I have discovered and which I present as absolutely true, after many exacting and repeated tests and confirmations through dif¬ ferent mediums of varied phases; and I am able therefore to claim with full confidence, that notwithstading any or many disbeliefs or declarations that what I offer the reader as truth is fiction, imagination, deception, fraudulent or impossible of realization, I am quite as sure of the results attained alone, and also in the presence of credible witnesses, from knowledge secured that continuity of the life of the human spirit ego, return of the same to earth, and communication with those in attunement with them is all true, as I am of my own existence. From past personal experience I now can state that it is easy for self-wise men, yet ignorant of psychic facts, to refer to those who know the truth and credit them with suspected gullibility in entertaining as feasible communication between spirits and humans. Doubting Thomases still continue numerous, even though scientists and psychical investigators in all lands are establishing psychic facts as truly as any other natural law. Psychical phenomena were com¬ mon in ancient times, and were recorded in the sacred book, and accepted as true; though modern creedists exclude them from their present teachings without endorsing or condemning them or even admitting their modern existence. I am one, however, who dares to proclaim the "Dawn of the Awakened Mind”; and am convinced we are at the beginning of DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 65 a New Era, when spiritual knowledge will prevail, and spiritual power and influence will reign supreme; then error and false belief will give place to knowledge. CHAPTER XI C ritics of every kind and grade, find it almost impossible to approach the question of psychic demonstration with¬ out bias; and hence their mental sight is impaired, and their judgment perverted, when they encounter truth which they do not want to find. Psychics by inference as well as by affirma¬ tion are classified by unbelievers as fraudulent or hysterical, and darkness aids their deception. Critics ask, “Why are conditions made to favor the fraudulent?” “Why are they not such, and so?” I am prepared to admit that fraud or deceit seeks to pass as genuine sometimes in a seance room; and sometimes in nearly every other group of persons; but even so, it gives value to the genuine. One must of necessity, when proceeding with an analysis of any particular phenomenon, and more especially when attempting to account for its existence by some definite hypothesis, well consider certain features in each case, which attain to a position demanding at least the best thought of the unbiased and impartial investigator. This holds good in the highest degree, especially in considering the spiritual hypothesis, as we cannot readily cite acceptable examples outside of those recorded in the Bible and Testament writings, which by general consent as well as by authority, are designated inspired writings. Is it not somewhat presumptuous for a man, whose capabilities are very limited, and whose powers at best are small, to formulate conditions for spirit communication, and expect spirit forces to act in harmony in producing the best results, while thus prevented through the ignorance of the human, from demonstrating in the best, or perhaps the only way ? As well might one expect to hear the choicest music from an instrument, capable in the highest degree of producing perfect harmony of sounds, for the cultured ear, after a mechanic had changed the keys, wires or tubes, with a desire to test the player, and hear whether he could now so play, as to prove himself a music artist. 66 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 67 The difficulty in dealing with the spiritualistic hypothesis is due to our lack of knowledge of the conditions necessary to the pro¬ duction of what is designated spiritual phenomena. When con¬ ditions necessary are present, the phenomena are successfully presented. If the necessary conditions are not present, there will be no spiritistic phenomena. The conditions essential must in the natural order of things be harmonious. In a seance a skeptic, or strong opponent of spiritualism, or one who asserts that the in¬ habitants of the spirit realms cannot by spirit form or in any other way, present themselves to a single individual, in the seance, composed of few or many, by such attitude supplies the ingredient called discord, which destroys harmony, and likewise destroys all chance of contributing conditions so essential to the production of successful phenomena. To illustrate my meaning, take the perfect or phenomenal production of Verdi’s Requiem by the two hundred and thirty members of the Toronto Mendelssohn Choir in New York City, which a representative musician considered so successful, that no chorus in that city at that time could hope to rival its achievement; and allow that only two per cent, of discordant voices were heard in that same choir, still it would have destroyed all possibility of such a result as was demonstrated according to the witness who spoke his authoritative judgment. But no matter what hypothesis we may select to account for the production of the phenomena, we must in all fairness admit that certain conditions must exist in order to obtain certain results. The importance of giving further consideration to this question will doubtless be recognized. The relations existing between conditions and results is that of a permanent equation. No matter what the equation represents, it will be found that its parts bear harmonious and perfect relationship the one to the other. Let us both reflect and investigate, that we may intelligently establish the verity or falsity of this claim. Will it not be admitted that the success or failure of everything in our everyday human experience of results, is conceded to be dependent upon conditions? Everything in nature and in art, presents different results, or different aspects, under different con¬ ditions. An abundant harvest of grain is conditional upo» richness 68 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of soil, suitable cultivation, good healthy matured seed, sown or planted at a favorable time in advantageous location, with soil suitably drained, sufficient heat and moisture, sunshine and dark¬ ness. If the conditions are not favorable, poor crops or no crops is the result. A grain of corn or wheat may have remained a century or longer in an hermetically sealed jar, — and it would neither grow nor decay. Take such a grain out, and plant it in the soil, so that it may have the advantages of the already named conditions, and in the course of a very short time, “In the silence” and “in the dark,” its. spirit energy promotes its physical unfold- ment, and it begins the attainment of certain results, which were unattainable without the favorable conditions. It reaches for sustenance, and growth is attained, and reproduction follows. In the air-tight jar there were no conditions favorable to growth, and hence no results of growth. The conditions have everything to do with results, in the quality or perfection sought, by the careful selection and mate-ing in the inbreeding for perfec¬ tion of animals. Favorable conditions, under natural laws, are essential in every chemical action. In such action when certain results are desired, certain conditions must exist. If the strings or wires of a musical instrument are not properly attuned, discord of sounds rather than music results. All the conditions must be favorable to insure success. In the case of anticipated conversa¬ tion with a friend far or near, by means of a telephone, the slightest impairment of the essential conditions, prevents the result naturally desired. Specific knowledge, therefore, is necessary to provide the essential conditions, to secure the favorable, or in this instance, the desired results. In many cases, given the con¬ ditions fully, our experience will enable us to predict results; and vice versa, the results being known to us, we may from our habits of investigation, premise what the conditions were. While this is true to a limited extent, and with reference to matters pertaining to the limitations of practical experience, it is because man has learned the operation of many natural laws; and works along the line of his knowledge of, and experience with such natural law. When man runs counter to such laws or seeks to create results by attempting to make conditions which DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 69 are out of harmony with natural law, he fails to create or produce the results. We may fairly assume that although physical life has a beginning and an ending on the physical plane, that individualized spiritual life begins cotemporaneously with the physical, as an evolvement from the Infinite Spirit energy, and varies in degree of unfoldment of abilities in not only races of men, but in the individuals of any race, which unfoldment is progressive and ever continuous; and hence the individual accumulates knowledge from experience in the physical body; and subsequently from spiritual sources when disembodied. Now with reference to spiritual phenomena, or results of cer¬ tain first causes and favorable conditions, man who is still in bondage to ecclesiasticism, naturally denies their origin and insists upon making his own conditions; and with an absence of the results, proves to his own satisfaction, that he has definitely established the existence of fraud or deceit; or on the other hand, shown what was claimed as fact, to be impossible. As well might we expect rapturous, soul-stirring music from a large choir, which included a few voices ignorant of the music, and wholly out of harmony with the others, as to expect successful spiritual phenom¬ ena to present to a circle of friends, in whose midst there were several .who objected to the existing conditions, who charged the medium with trying to practice fraud, and who put themselves in an antagonistic frame of mind, thus contributing discord, which would break up harmonious vibrations. The skeptics’ questions have been so long utilized that they are universally familar, viz.: Why do these phenomena occur in the dark? Why don’t they occur in a well lighted room, or in daylight, anywhere, at any time, whether there is a medium or not? The inference sought to be established is that darkness' is preferred to enable deception to be practised. Well and profitably might the skeptical questioners! take time to reflect, to ascertain whether it may not be, and probably is a fact, that darkness con¬ tributes most advantageously to conditions favoring the operation of natural laws; and that this is almost, if not quite universally true in nature; and that investigation will lead to the discovery. 70 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND that it is a law of nature that conception, occurs in the stillness or quietude and in darkness; and the young of the human race and of animals, have their beginning, formation, development and spirit influx, in the stillness and darkness of the womb till ripe for birth. The same conditions and stillness are included among the necessary conditions for the grain and seed to result in growth and reproduction of their kind, as I have already pointed out. The conditions of life, whether animal or vegetable, would fail to be perpetuated, were it not a law of Infinite Wisdom, which is another name for Law of Nature, to permit rest in order to recuperate energy. Continuous condition of sunshine, or con¬ tinuous condition of darkness, without interruption, would pro¬ duce disastrous results; as much so as would continuous heat, or continuous cold; continuous drouth, or continuous rain. With a multiplicity of human experiences in the darkness and in the light, with every known precaution against fraud, by the clear-headed, cautious, intelligent investigators, as well as scientists of the highest standing, to prevent fraud, to discover truth, the most wonderful phenomena continue to be recorded from time to time; and still the skeptic enquires, “Why can’t these phenomena be produced without the presence of a medium?” Our answer is, for the same reason that electricity cannot be utilized without suitable conditions and a medium; or the heat and light from the sun cannot be received and appropriated by our earth except there be essential conditions, and a medium of communication; or the daily events of the civilized world cannot be collated and spread before our eyes in the daily newspaper, without a variety of essential conditions, and a medium, — the printing press. Neither can you use your ‘phone successfully without a central! office, to connect you with the ’phone you want. While human beings may seem ordinarily able to control the conditions, in order to bring about certain results, it must not be forgotten, that all conditions must have for their existence, and all results for their attainment, some governing influence; and that everything that is, even life itself, and its continuance, must be in accord with the intention and will of the Infinite Spirit or first cause, which is an All-seeing, All-wise, Everywhere present. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 71 All-powerful energy, and utilizes its own conditions for producing spiritual phenomena. And is it not a reasonable conclusion that the Infinite form and existence is Universal Spirit, permeating all things, developing its innumerable conditions, and manifesta¬ tions of the animal and vegetable kingdoms, and more or less latent, so far as we can judge in the mineral kingdom; in fact, in all matter of whatsoever kind and form? How else can it be that regularity is everywhere constant in the various processes of nature, even in the molecular arrangement of so-termed inanimate matter? Latent energy has a source. Does not the molecular action in chemical changes prove the presence of a hitherto latent energy, or force dependent on something more than mere chance for its manifestation? It is a calculable condition, with an effect or result, of something regular in its purpose, and so regular as to be termed a natural law? And if it be a law, there must be a law-maker; and the power of the law-maker must be in contact with every ultimate molecular portion of that which is effected by it. Does it not occur to the mind that it is probably the correct conclusion, that in the molecular disposition of power, primitive power, we have the Universal Spirit or Infinite Intelligent Energy? Where else shall we look for the power? And is not our spirit entity, a partaker in some measure of the attributes of the Infinite and Universal Spirit? Is not the spirit portion'of our individual existence working upon every molecular portion of our physical personality an understandable condition ? How else shall we com¬ prehend the physical functions of the body, such as digestion, assimilation, secretion, circulation, development or growth and decay, none of which are under the control of the organism, nor amenable to the objective or physical senses? If the brain organ¬ ism or machine operates, it does so as the result of some power, in the same way that the engine propels the machinery of a large factory, but only when the power, whether electricity or steam, (in man the incarnate spirit acting through the objective or sub¬ jective mind), is applied to its working. And is it not a reasonable conclusion to arrive at, that the spiritual part of our existence is from the Infinite ? And a portion of his Universal Spirit, and should have, to some extent at least, the attribute of ability to 72 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND utilize the physical part of our existence for its present purposes, though not able by the physical senses tO' comprehend, or at least to control, such as I have mentioned ? INIost pheiromena ultimately come to be viewed as the result of the operation of natural laws, and it appears reasonably probable, and at least undeniable, that all operations in nature, animate and inanimate, as ordinarily classified, are in accord with natural laws; if we had the knowl¬ edge and wisdom to understand them. If our spirit entity has the power to control, through the subjective mind, outside of our ordinary consciousness, the various functions and processes above alluded to in the body in which it governs, why should it be difficult for that same spirit, when freed from the confines of the physical body, to control molecules of matter and accumulate energy, and form a likeness to that body; and to utilize for the time being the body so formed? Or again, what is to prevent that disembodied spirit exerting influence on the embodied spirit of another? In those suggested conditions, we have what spiritualists term materialization and spirit control. The human mind can comprehend that evolution of man as a duality (body and spirit) is for somd wise purpose; and that the embodiment of the spirit, for a term of earthly experience, the better fits the spirit for its subsequent development and participa¬ tion in some of the attributes of the universal and All-wise Spirit power. Where there is life there is evolution, and in the case of the human life there is continuity of life for the real ego; and the Infinite utilizes the spirit egos as angels. He gives them charge concerning men. He employs ministering angels. He sends angel visitants to man. All of which, in His infinite wisdom, and by His all-wise power, may be done now as in the past, for the instruction and guidance of members of the human race. His ways and means of convincing men by signs and wonders, and physical, mental and spiritual phenomena are not necessarily new, but in keeping with scriptural records; though ecclesiastical in¬ fluence will seek to establish a human made gateway of entrance to Heaven, the Orthodox Church. CHAPTER XII [Note : — The Author feels that each reader, to appreciate their full import, should most carefully read chapters twelve and twenty-nine consecutively. Chapter twelve must of necessity be read for proper understanding of all succeeding chapters in which “May” expresses her thoughts; but may, with advantage, be read a second time, before beginning to read chapter twenty-nine. The former is written by the Author; and the latter — the reply, is by his spirit wife. The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences of the reply are shaped, by the instrument (the medium), but not by her normal self. The reason for this is stated elsewhere. It matters not what personality makes use of her, it rhymes in places when read, and is euphonious.] T hese chapters are essential to the book, and will be found to be a guide in the consideration of the evidential matter, not only in the November 1911 series of seances, including both trumpet and materialization, but also, and most generally since, and with the addition of the new instrument. Miss Maud Venice Gates, “the Human-Psychic-Telephone,” as well as in the April series of 1912, at J. B. Jonson’s, and on other occa¬ sions, for reasons that will be obvious to the reader. I feel sure, that owing to thel exceptional nature of their contents, they will be accepted as a justification for their presentation; and at the same time, will be considered as a memorial acknowledgment of proof offered by my spirit wife; and that she kept a momentous promise, and thus has aided me in proving true, the hope of human life, its continuity, and the further fact established, of • terrestrial and celestial communion, by strong evidence presented in many chapters of the book. May E. King, my beloved wife, my ever kind and affectionate life partner, my daily and almost hourly companion, for a quarter of a century, my true love and pal, in whom I could and did confide, passed from the physical to spirit realms on the 29th of September, 1911, in her 47th year. Hereafter in the chapters to follow this one, I shall use her daily name “May,” (by her 73 74 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND approval), as I was wont to do when she was with me in physical life; and as her" intimates and relatives were accustomed to call her. Her home private pet name during her last illness was “Babe,” — which I fondly bestowed upon her while she was in a dependent condition during her frequent illnesses, at intervals w hich extended over a period of nearly four years, — while officiating in my triple capacity of physician, nurse and husband, until the closing days of her suffering and sickness. When I returned from my London, Ontario, spiritistic inves¬ tigations in 1894, I found my wife nearly distracted, from the number and variety of the questions received by her over the ’phone, by personal calls, and by letters from her own and my acquaintances, as well as by representatives of the press; and some, among all of them, of course were most desirous of know¬ ing, if I were really “going insane,” extended their sympathy to her, and hoped that I could be prevailed upon to have nothing more to do with such unnatural things, as no good could come out of it. The press reporters also wanted all they could' get for news, or for sensational reading, from one who was so well known as a professional man, and as a former newspaper man. Nights without sleep, and days without food, and the threatened loss of my prestige and our means of livelihood, well-nigh wrecked her physical and mental health at that time; and seemingly created a chronic uneasiness, and want of confidence for a time; but an extended recess in the research work resulted in the bringing about of a period of calm and contentment. In the year 1905, some eleven years later, sufficient change had been wrought in her mind, that she could admit to me that there had been much change in personal and public sentiment; and raised no objection to my visiting the famous resort of the spiritualists, Lily Dale, which I did in August of that year. Two years later she designed a trip to that same place with me, and though I had carefully refrained from inviting her, I expressed my pleasure when she intimated her desire of going with me. Opportunity was presented to attend several seances with a party of a dozen of our relatives and friends. She saw and talked (at two separate seances, and two different mediums) with the materialized form THE AUTHOR’S WIFE, MAY E. KING, (At the Age of 47.) “THE KEY THAT UNLOCKED THE MYSTER^■." DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 75 of Egyptia, who alleged to me in London thirteen years previously, that she was my guardian spirit; and she also on many different occasions there and at other places saw and conversed with that beautiful embodied guiding spirit Hypatia, who succeeded in winning her to a thorough conviction of new realities; and satis¬ fied her, that there, were more verities than fictions or illusions, in these seances. When the Canadian Society for Psychical Research was organized, under a charter obtained from the Government in March, 1908, my wife willingly consented to my acceptance of the office and responsibilities of President, while she identified herself with full membership by undergoing the ballot, and being regularly and legally accepted; and from that time on, so far as her health would permit, took an active interest in its meetings, which as the membership could testify, she much appreciated as long as its activities lasted, which was until her own passing to spirit realm. With the knowledge of the; truth gained by us both, through spiritual teachings by the angelic messengers, our guides and aiders, who came to us in reality of form and voice; and which we had repeated experiences of, and profited by, as psychical researchers, with our motto ever in mind “Search, prove, and declare the truth,” and therefore we knew that wherever and whenever the door (or way) is opened by earth friends, and welcome extended the spirit loved ones, they will enter. We like¬ wise knew that in earth life of whatsoever grade, class or attain¬ ment; whether the personnel of governments and parliaments, churches and assemblies, societies and groups of individuals and alleged friends, we are liable sooner or later to be deceived by them. No mentally well balanced person will extend full confidence to anyone, and fully accept and welcome such as a friend, until he or she has had time to ‘try the man’. So too the advice long since given is good, “try the spirit,” it is the proper thing to do. There existed a strong bond of affection between my wife and myself, and the lasting impression made upon her by the minister¬ ing spirit Hypatia, gave her full confidence that once in spirit 76 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND sphere it is possible to return to earth, when an interest is centered on loved ones still remaining there. My wife and I frequently discussed, among the very many interesting matters of psychic character, how best we could estab¬ lish for each other’s personal advantage and satisfaction, the proof of our individual human personality, which would be un¬ assailable and convincing. Some weeks before her very last illness, we again seriously considered and decided, what her in¬ dividual test, and my individual test, would be. “May,” my wife, had acquired the habit of always calling me (whether in company or in privacy), “Doctor.” A few short years ago she adopted a variety of nicknames, which she invariably humorously interpreted and applied in good-natured way, which were adapted tO' certain conditions; or bearing relations to some of my habits, that for instance of smoking. She would exclaim, “Oh Johnnie Smoker! you make the curtains black; and you perfume the house with your tobacco.” And so with other names for other habits, but always spoken good-naturedly. Some years ago or at the end of the year 1907, I ceased to use tobacco, and had not smoked even once after (until left without a companion). Her practice when alone, of calling me ‘Johnnie Smoker’ when she wanted me had become so strongly a habit, that thoughtlessly she would call me ‘Johnnie Smoker,’ even after my cessation of the indulgence. Having told her that was not my name any more, as I did not smoke now, she dropped the word “Smoker” and called me “Johnnie,” only however when we were alone. On the other hand I simultaneously and humorously responded to her initiative, and adopted various names or appellations for her, suggested by some habit, peculiarity, faculty, condition or association. I also had pet names for her, as she had for me, which we only used when with each other alone. She was out of health as I have said, more or less for the last four years of her earth life; and had passed through two serious illnesses before the last one, which resulted in the final dissolution. During her last illness, I officiated more fully as nurse than I did as doctor, scarcely leaving her; and) in lifting or changing her, or administer- DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 77 ing to her suffering or wants, would call her by endearing designa¬ tions, such as “Dear,” “Darling” or “Babe.” What then more natural, because it would be more specific and convincing, in selecting some discarnate test, than to adopt some such private or personal expression peculiarly our own, in home life only, and unknown to others ? So it was easily decided what our test names were to be after separation by dissolution of the body, of either of us; if it should be we continued to live on in spirit realms, and were permitted and found ourselves able to return. If I passed away first and returned, I was to partially prove my human personality, by speaking her test name “Babe”; and partially by private or personal matters, unknown to those outside of ourselves. If she passed away first and returned, she was to partially prove her human personality by speaking my test name “Johnnie,” and partially by private or personal matters, unknown to those outside of ourselves. These appellations or designations were unknown to other parties. It was likewise understood, that the personal or private matter, was to be taken in connection with some event of a per¬ sonal or individual character; or an act or interest, that was known to us both, but not known to others, and would in such way strengthen the evidence in favor of the personality of the one returning, its value depending upon its truthfulness, or its existence as a fact, and a matter of exclusive knowledge to our¬ selves alone. At the same time the selection thereof must not in either case be agreed upon in earth) life; and must be chosen from facts or circumstances, which may have occurred before the incarnate spirit became discarnate; or something that had occurred since, and which the returning discarnate spirit could not possibly have known as an incarnate spirit on that account; and which was known only to the survivor of the two, the sole idea being, that to prove the identity in the return of the in¬ dividual spirit, something should be stated that could not be stated, by any other person, from that other person’s knowledge, nor in accord with the habit or manner of expression; and con¬ sistent with the general line of action and character, of the partner 78 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND first becoming discarnate. These shades of differences in modes of tests have their values in evidence secured. In the case of an etherealization or materialization, then acts as well as words would be considered evidential, on the one hand to establish the verity and personality of the individual existence; while on the other hand each act, look, and word would form evidence for or against the claimant for recognition, to which in each instance would be added, if in materialized form, that exact¬ ness of appearance, voice, and language, which could no more be doubted, than it could in human life, in the home association; and where lives the husband or the wife, who could be accused of making a mistake in the personality of their life partner, while looking at and talking with the form presenting as that life partner, if it was not that partner? I venture to say that psychical researchers would never as readily accept as evidence of returning spirit, or of a particular human form or personality in a communicating intelligence seen or unseen, as would be accepted by an ordinary police magistrate, or presiding judge. In a Court of Justice, — or rather a court of law — a witness swears that such or so, as he asserts, is the case, and his statement is presumably evidential; while researchers demand proof to convince that it cannot possibly by mistake or otherwise, be anything else, or any other person, or any other case or fact than as stated; and let it not be forgotten the public will accept on statement or publication generally, when the source or origin is respectable, — yes and are satisfied to accept by faith and belief alone, yet will deny that privilege to psychical researchers, when psychic presentations or demonstrations of great or small extent are considered, and even deny the truth of their evidence, if it does not harmonize with, or become parallel to their own existing beliefs. This is not to be wondered at when we reflect upon the fact, that almost universally young children have implicit faith and belief in everything their parents say or do, as being so; and their unbounded faith in their parents’ ability to do almost anything. Do they not retire on Christmas Eve, in the full belief, that Santa Claus, a non-resident of their home, who comes from where they DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 79 do not know, will call and leave them a present during their slumbers, if they have “tried to bo good,” because their parents told them so ? And as they became older children, did not they grow up Protestants, because their parents were Protestants; or became Catholics, because their parents were, and most generally followed in the political footsteps of their father, and in the exercise of their franchise? The exceptions to this only prove the rule. After a number of discussions along the foregoing lines, we each jointly and individually adopted our proof tests, as specially indicated in this same chapter, to enable us to establish our human personality, little thinking that only a few short weeks would elapse, ere one of us would have our opportunity present for identification, by establishing our own personality, and making the proofs of our continued existence so strong, as to defy any effort to destroy them. After twenty years of my own and four years of my wife’s earnest, patient, critical research work, our reward has come at last, though it was not consummated until she who had been my most devoted and zealous co-worker, had passed to that sphere where spiritual discernment gave her the opportunity which had long been previously discussed, to comprehend and bring about, she in the spirit, and I in the earth sphere, the conclusive proofs such as are presented in the following chapters, which we stood in need of, and which but seldom are arranged for in detail, as in our case, before it is too late, by which to establish without a single lingering doubt, 1st, Continuity of life; 2nd, Spirit return; and 3rd, Spirit communion. CHAPTER XIII A S AN introduction to the medium Mrs. Etta Wriedt, I may say that I first met her at a Moss seance, in London, Ontario, in 1894, and since then, have had very many sittings with her for investigation; as well as communicating with guides, relatives and friends. I had hoped to print the medium’s picture in my book, and along with it, a short sketch of her life; but she informed me, in reply to my request, that “I never had a photo taken; since I was a little girl; and as to my life being printed, I don’t really care for it. Let people remember me as they knew me. My life is of no. interest to investigators. My work speaks for itself. I was born in New York State, but lived most of my life in Ohio, and am now here.” (In Detroit, Mich.) To revert to the object of my visit, I will here state that a few weeks after the passing over of my wife, my guide Hypatia — speaking through the entranced medium Mrs. Ripley, utilized previously (see Chapter VIII), told me to go to Mrs. Wriedt in Detroit, Michigan, on November 11, 1911; and (prediction) she would bring to me. May my spirit wife, whO' would be able to speak with me through the trumpet; and to also go to Jonson’s in Toledo, Ohio, where she hoped by then, to have May show herself there in a materialized body, and converse with me. I acted accordingly, and have made record of it. I was fortunate in having in this series no less than seven seances, in two different states, and of two different phases, which were closely connected in the features of time, and of their joint production, of strong evidential matter; as also the advantage of alternation, and ex¬ clusion of opportunity, for co-operation between the instruments. I may here say, by way of explanation, that of the seven seances, comprising the November series, the first and second held on the twelfth and thirteenth, as well as the sixth and seventh held on the eighteenth and nineteenth of the month, were trumpet seances; and were held in Mrs. Etta Wriedt’s seance room, in the city of Detroit, and State of Michigan. Three of the series, viz.* the 80 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 81 third, fourth and fifth, were materializing seances with conversa¬ tions, and were held in Mr. J. B. Jonson’s seance room, in Toledo, State of Ohio, on the thirteenth, fifteenth and sixteenth of Novem¬ ber. In this manner, and by this plan, results are more convincing; and as a consequence, there was a remarkable connection of direct evidence, first developed in the two sittings with Mrs. Wriedt in Detroit, followed by a continuance of that evidence, and some entirely new, at the three succeeding seances, at Jonson’s in Toledo, and then concluded at the remaining two at Mrs. Wriedt’s. I had my first sitting, of about forty-five minutes, on Sunday, 12th November, 1911, begining at 2.45 p. M., and with, to me, direct and most convincing evidence, that May’s ante-mortem promises were being, on this her first opportunity, most faithfully fulfilled, and In a manner wholly satisfactory 44 days after death of her body; and consider it to be, both the strongest and most conclusive I could get — which would endorse our agreement — from May, my lately departed wife, who passed to spirit realms on the 29th September, 1911, after an unconscious state lasting nine days. She talked with me for fully fifteen minutes in this sitting. The first intelligence to address me in the seance was the alleged Guide of Mrs. Wriedt, viz.: Dr. Sharp who referred to my loss, and my wife’s gain. He pointed out that I could not do much for the departed spirit, but that it could do much for me; that my worrying and fretting, or sorrowing, would only tend to hinder or delay her progress or advancement. He also advised rrie to take care of myself, told me that Hypatia, my spirit guide, was here with her, and would speak with me. (Prediction.) The next voice claimed to be that of Dr. McC-, who passed out of the flesh at Toronto some years ago. I said I remembered that there was a Dr. McC-, but that I was not personally acquainted with him. He replied “I was about your age, and about your time. You are Dr. J. S. King of Church Street, ain’t you?” My reply was “Yes.” The third intelligence that spoke said ‘YVell, Uncle John, how are you?” Instead of answering him directly I enquired: 82 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND “Who are you?” The Voice: “I am your nephew.” J. S. K.: “Which nephew?” The Voice: “Jesse.” Mrs. Wriedt: “Dr., is that your brother’s son?” J. S. K.: “My brother had a son Jesse.” Mrs. Wriedt: “Jesse, how does the Hamilton Spiritual Society progress ?” Jesse: “Not very well, there is too much wrangling among the membership.” Jesse: “Say Uncle John, your worry makes Auntie May worry. I want to tell you that the party.you know who I mean, don’t you?” J. S. K.: “Yes, Jesse.” Jesse: “Well, he expected that you would die before Auntie would, and then; there might have been a chance to try and get .but he was disappointed and wonders what you are going to do. Auntie wants me to tell you not to give. your money, nor the other party your.or money, but take care of them and of yourself. Strangers think more of you, and will do more for you, than some of your relatives who want what you’ve got. Now Uncle John, don’t tell.anything you know, or anything I tell you.” [Note: — For reasons which will be readily apparent the very convincing evidential matter, which directly connects with per¬ sonal, private, and family events, I am unable to make public by recording all the conversation. — The Author.] Jesse went on talking, the synopsis of it being that his Auntie May wished me not to give her rings and trinkets away, till she told me what to do with them, and the other things that I kept. He said she would try and talk with me if she could, but as her tongue and throat were paralyzed before she passed out (a fact), she might find it a little difficult to speak as yet, clearly enough for me to hear her distinctly; and she had asked him, to tell me those things in case she could not make me understand. The fourth intelligence announced herself as Hypatia, the one who at my request visited and conversed with Wm. T. Stead, DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 83 in London (see Chap. VIII), and to those who read the succeed¬ ing chapters the name will become familiar. She has for years alleged that she is my spirit guide. She announced that she had brought May with her, and that May would herself speak with me. Hypatia, as usual, gave me advice and instruction; and informed me that May and she would also meet me at Jonson’s seance in Toledo; and that she, Hypatia, would return to me at Jonson’s seance, the rose I gave her nearly two years ago (prediction), to be kept by her for a good period of time, and returned to me; and said I would also receive while at Mr. Jon¬ son’s home a great surprise. (Prediction.) The fifth and last voice communicating at this seance, was alleged to be, and I need no longer say alleged, for I believe it was my wife, for I now know: for a truth, it was the one who has been the nearest and dearest to me, the one who had promised that if ever she could, and if permitted, would according to our mutual agreement of a few weeks ago, help to prove her person¬ ality, and thereby the continuity of life, spirit return, and com¬ munion between her spirit discarnate, and myself. It proved to be my own May, whom I had not expected to do much in the way of talking after what Jesse had said, but as she proceeded her voice assumed a human naturalness, increased in volume and in strength, and soon was adjusted in pitch or tone, until it sounded as familiar, and life-like to me, as I had been accustomed to hear it when she spoke with me, in life, in our home, or over the ’phone. (A fulfillment.) True to her ante-mortem promise, her momentous test of her human personality, came with force, power, and evident satisfac¬ tion, her first utterances being “Johnnie!” “Oh Johnnie!” “My dear Johnnie!” “It’s I!” “It’s May!” “It’s your ‘Babe’!” “I am not dead, I am alive.” “I told you I would come if I could, and I am here.” (Fulfillment.) From what Jesse had said I expected to hear a weak voice. My joy and satisfaction therefore at her success, and my ex¬ pression of appreciation of her effort, seemed to give her strength and encouragement, and throughout the fifteen or more minutes, occupied with our conversation, she frequently repeated the name 84 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND “Johnnie” both with and without the qualifying adjective, inter¬ mingled with various endearing, and pet names, that she was accustomed to use in her every-day life; still “Johnnie” was evidently so often repeated to impress me deeply, with the fact that it was the test name previously selected, by which to identify herself. (A fulfillment.) She told me that she could not alone have succeeded in coming, and talking with me, but Hypatia had helped her very much, and so had Jesse helped her. She was glad that by the help of others, she could speak with me, and said among other expressions, “Oh my dear, I miss you so much; you were so kind to me always, and I loved you so much. I cannot help my feelings, I miss you sO' much. Yes, I know now that it was all for the best for me to go first. I am happy; I am free from pain and suffering now, ^.nd I can be near you still. It was better than for me to be left. I want you to stay on independently where you are. I don’t want you to be beholding to anybody, but attend to your engagements as usual; and spend your money in caring for yourself. I am satisfied with the way you disposed of my things. (Evidential.) Don’t part with my watch, diamonds, rings, jewelry, and things that you put in the safety deposit vault at the hank.” (Strong evidence.) (I had only placed them there on Friday, as I left the city on Saturday morning, and held this conversation on Sunday afternoon.) “Don’t give my diamond earrings to E- (a relative) as she is careless and would lose them (good evidence). I will tell you from time to time how to dispose of those things. When you go home I want you to get my single diamond ring out of the vault. You can take the stone out, and have it set in a safety scarf pin, so you can wear it without losing it, and get the good of it. ' Be careful to take the diamond to an honest jeweler, for it would be easy to slip a less valuable stone in its place, and you could hardly tell the dif¬ ference.” (Strong evidence connecting with more about the pin in Chapter XXVI. J. S'. K.) She then became more earnest and said, “Don’t make a will. Give away whatever you wish to give away of what you possess, and to the persons whom you wish to have it, and the same with your money during your life; and do not let anybody have a claim on anything, except what you gave DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 85 them in your life time as a clear gift; and put away or leave enough of your money to provide for yourself in your old age, and set aside enough to give you burial. I cannot keep house for you any more, my darling, but I can be, and I will be, with you to help you all the time.” (All good evidence.) She asked me to send word to her mother, that she was able to come back and talk. I asked her if she would like her mother to come and speak with her some time, and she replied “Yes,” which was followed twice by the sound of kissing. She also asked me to give her thanks to M—^— for the part she took in preparing her body for the casket (true). She talked as naturally about these things as she ever conversed with me in her home life, and she was always known as a shrewd business woman. When I said that her efiforts had exceeded my fondest, and most sanguine expectations, she said encouragingly, “I will materialize for you at Toledo, and I will speak with you there, while in my materialized body. (Prediction.) Good-bye!” I give to readers the foregoing details, as being a sample of the evidence I got, and all she said appealed to- me as true. T do not hesitate, but say this is the kind of evidence, “the home-life kind,” which brings conviction home to man, and makes hini know it’s true; and that no criticism can upset it, nor hypothesis account for it, except the one. Readers may watch for future evidence, and for fulfillment of predictions, for there is much more to come. I felt sure that May’s earthly promise would be fulfilled, and further that when accomplished, the proof of the truth in that single instance, would establish the probability of its general application to the human race, and if so, the wholesale and retail dealers in every variety of hypotheses, save and except the Spiritual hypothesis, would have to sacrifice their entire stock in trade, and re-invest in what must needs be the source and supply for all nations, tongues, and peoples, which will satisfy the soul’s hunger, development, and perfection, and change humanity’s in¬ harmonious vibrations, into one grand and universal harmonious vibration of peace and good will among mankind, and all shall 86 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND then recognize the fatherhood of God, and the true brotherhood of man, and live the life thafj they profess. Before the seance was over Hypatia again spoke, and said, “I will give you back the rose at Toledo (prediction) ; but we will have a surprise in store for you besides.” (Prediction.) Dr. Sharp, Mrs. Wriedt’s Guide, in reply to my invitation, that he call and see me on the occasion to which Hypatia and May alluded, said, “I will materialize in the cabinet, step out, and put my hand on your head to let you know that it is me.” ( Prediction.) This seance lasted for three-quarters of an hour, and I can no longer doubt, for I am confident without a remaining shade of doubt, that I have established by strong evidence the truth of the continuity of life, spirit return, and spirit communication. This report and chapter were completed as soon as seance was ended, from notes taken during the seance. My comment and my argument upon the evidence in this, and in each of the seven seances embraced in the November, 1911, series are here deferred, and will appear after the seventh seance in a chapter wholly devoted tol that purpose. [Before leaving this chapter, I will ask the reader to carefully examine the evidence of May, so far as it is recorded, and also from time to time, and see if it be not truly in accord with the plan mutually agreed upon, (and as embraced in Chapter XH, which I claim to be the psychic key, that enabled us together, to unlock the mystery.] CHAPTER XIV M y second sitting of this series, with Mrs. Wriedt in Detroit, was held on Monday, 13th November, 1911, between 9 and 10 a. m. in the same seance room as on the previous occasion. As I sat expecting to hear the voice of Dr. Sharp, Mrs. Wriedt’s guide, who usually opens and closes the seance, I had the unexpected view of an old grey-haired lady wearing a black cap. She looked at me but did not speak. She bore some resemblance in features to my own mother; but I could not declare it a true likeness; but it was almost as clear to vision as in an ordinarily lighted room. The creation showed the head and face and very little more, the black darkness of the room made it stand out very distinctly. The same face appeared later in the evening. Mrs. Wriedt considered it anj etherialized face, though she said she could not see it, the first time it appeared, nor when Jesse appeared; and claimed it might be a clairvoyant vision, as I saw it, and she could not, when I spoke of seeing it so distinctly. The view wasi not held for more than a full half minute I should judge, and presented on my front and right, the opposite side to the medium. The second personality to present showed the face of a young man, a few feet to the front of me, while he (Jesse) spoke through the trumpet, and said, “Good Morning, Uncle John, it’s Jesse.” He referred to a statement of five pages I had written, after making my record of the first seance; and which I had designated by the headings or jottings after the seance, in which I addressed it to May, selecting what I considered proofs of May’s human personality. It was written with lead pencil, and left exposed on the table, separated so that each written page was uncovered, and in fulU view in the parlor below. Jesse told me that Auntie May had seen and read it, and didn’t want family or private matters made public. I assured him that I would respect her wish; and no names would be mentioned, and that there would be nothing said that would prove injudicious, or 87 88 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND worry anybody. He said he was helping Auntie all he could, and so was Hypatia. Dr. Sharp came next and complimented me upon my speech last evening, when there was a gathering of fourteen persons present; and conditions were not favorable for the production of phenomena (true). May came again and said for the second time, “I am going to be with you, and go with you to Toledo; and am going to materialize there, and speak to you also, while in my materialized body. (Prediction.) She gave her kisses for me in smacks through the trumpet. One instance here of evidential matter I must give, as follows: J. S. K.; “May, can you tell Mrs. Wriedt what present you gave me last Christmas Day?” May: “I had a grip made for the Doctor's instruments, and had his initials, J. S. K., printed in gold letters on the outside; and a Christmas card with printed greetings and written on by myself, which card I placed on the inside of the grip. He found it on his chair at breakfast time.” (Absolutely correct.) [Note : — At this very time I had that card in my pocket diary, though I could not give from memory what was written on the card. The following is what was upon it, viz.: “With best wishes for a Merry Christmas” (in red and black print) and “May life, health and happiness grip you for years to come, so long as a shred of this grip lasts.” (The writing was by her own hand.) J.S.K.] It strikes me very forcibly and convincingly that this is about as strong circumstantial evidence, as one is likely to find, if it is not direct evidence, in support of the personality of May., Another query in my mind was — had May read the memoranda of proofs on the table downstairs, as referred to by Jesse — when she gleefully informed me “I not only have some of my ordinary senses which have been quickened or become more acute, but I can now read or know your thoughts,” and she told me in response to the question in my mind, and not yet expressed, that she had read what I had written, and that it was all right, but that she did not want private or family matters made public. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 89 She next made a repetition of the promise or prediction, that she would be able to materialize, and talk also, at Jonson’s; and would be with me all the time, and humorously remarked that she could go as a little parcel in my grip to Toledo, and laughed. This promise or prediction is made the second time. May also told me that she communicates ^with me whilel I am in bed sleeping. This I interpret as follows: [May is a discarnate spirit; I am an incarnate spirit. During sleep the objective portion of my mind ceases activity, and hence the subjective portion of my mind, which never ceases function¬ ing, in addition to its own regular activities assumes those of the objective portion, utilizing the spirit senses instead of those usually called physical, and by so doing can register the conversa¬ tion-in my life record.] May also makes a promise or prediction that she will again commune with me, during my wake state, and impress me, while present by spirit sense functioning. And granted that she fulfills her promise complete, then which of all the listed hypotheses adopted, in any or all lands, will account for it, outside of the spiritual hypothesis? Here I av^ow my knowledge, and say that I not only believe and have faith that she will do as she has promised, but my intuitions endorse my faith and belief; and I await in confidence the result, because I know, that it is the spirit of May that speaks. It is but right that I should at this time, premise; for the in¬ formation of all concerned, that May was better informed along psychical lines than most women. She had knowledge acquired from the many papers and discussions by fellow members of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, practical experience from her association with my work in that line, from her attendance at trumpet seances — the very first of which was under the same medium, Mrs. Wriedt, and Dr. Sharp, her guide, probably ten years previous to this seance — as well as other similar experiences; at seances with materialization and mediums, Effie Moss, Nichols, and J. B. Jonson, at Lily Dale in 1907, and several times with J. B. Jonson, since. This experience had quali¬ fied her to comprehend her postmortem condition, and the oppor- 90 DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND tunities afforded her; and being met at this stage, by the very spirit Hypatia, who first brought conviction to her conscious understanding in 1907; and met her as she claims on her entry into spirit realms, and became for the immediate time her guardian spirit and teacher. Thus securing her aid, she made close con¬ nection with me, through the very spirit who claims to be my chief spirit guide, on the first opportunity presenting. This in¬ formation, and other as well, is the assurance I have received from May herself, elsewhere recorded; and coming as it does confirms knowledge similar in character, which I received through a trance medium, controlled by Hypatia, it seems that with that knowledge possessed by her, and the knowledge also that she passed away in the belief that she would be able to find ways and means of returning to the one from whom there was enforced severance, but made the desire all the stronger to return. Returning now to the seance, the very next to greet me was the intelligence Hypatia, who has in preceding chapters established her capabilities, her intelligence, her loyalty tO’ truth and to promise. On this occasion as on many others she bid me “Good Morning’’ and next repeated two beautiful poems of her own composition, one addressed to the Lilies of the Valley upon the table at my side, and the other as a toast. In addition to this treat she again intimated that I would get a great surprise at Toledo. I next received a pleasant surprise, in hearing the voice of my alleged old-time friend MacRoberts, at whose residence in Lon¬ don, in 1894, I had my first series of materializing phenomena, associated with the mediumship of, the late Mrs. Effie Moss, where an intelligence claiming to be Egyptia presented herself to me as an Egyptian Princess, who also claimed then to be my guardian spirit, and who figured very prominently in connection with my investigations at the MacRoberts home, as detailed in early chapters of this book, and continuously ever since, embracing the present time. On the previous Saturday evening an assemblage of fourteen had gathered in the seance room; but owing to the absence of favorable conditions, or due to causes unknown to me, there were no communications or phenomena. I was requested DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 91 by Mrs. Wriedt to address those present, which I did. The intelligence MacRoberts chanced to be present while I was speak¬ ing, so he subsequently made this call, and told me he was pleased with what I said. Dr. Sharp, a wonderful personality, and the guide for many years of Mrs. Wriedt, intervened to close the seance, and repeated his promise to be at Jonson’s, and would materialize. CHAPTER XV I LEFT Detroit Monday afternoon, 13th Novembef, 1911, by trolley, arriving on the same day in Toledo, I called at the Jonson residence soon after seven o’clock in the evening, and chatted pleasantly with Mrs. and Mr. Jonson, until the arrival of Mrs. H-, her two daughters, and a gentleman friend, which four were to have a private seance with Mr. Jonson. I was invited to join them, and I promptly accepted the invitation. Investigation of the Cabinet and the Medium On this occasion as on every other previous one that I have visited Jonson, and participated in these materializing seances, all present were invited to investigate or examine the so-called cabinet, and approaches to or adjoining it, which I had done before; and on two occasions did so in connection with another member of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, these latter seances the special two, being conducted under test condi¬ tions, in a house other than his home. On ond occasion an officer of our society reported that he sat in the cabinet with Jonson, part of the time during the seance, and that Jonson was in a trance state, of lethargy or deep sleep. On the present occasion the cabinet consisted of one corner of the upstair room, square in shape, the height being from floor to ceiling, two of the walls the natural walls of the room, and the other two, temporized partitions, completing the cabinet or room, with two separating curtains for doorway of entrance to, or exit from the room or cabinet; and no other discernible opening or place for one, could be discovered in the walls, ceiling or floor. On the inside was an ordinary arm chair, a small stand for flowers, papered walls, bare floor, unbroken ceiling, no window except one in the wall oflF to our left, to which the front wall or partition of the cabinet extended, dividing the window from top to bottom, so that a section of it a few inches wide, would be on the inside of the 92 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 93 cabinet, and a section outside of the cabinet visible to the sitters, leaving a space too narrow to permit a person to crowd their body through, and all visible above the floor, so that no one could enter through the window without the sitters being aware of the fact; and to reach the window from the outside a person would require a ladder long enough to reach the second storey. Nor was there a door to the cabinet, except that improvised one, formed by curtains on the side next the sitters. As noticed at the different seances, Jonson spends a part of the sittings seated with the sitters in the semi-circle or curved row of seats; a part of the time walking along in front of the sitters; and a part of the time inside the cabinet. Mrs. Jonson sat off to my right, when she did sit, but she was on the move most of the time, either winding the movement of the music box, or tending the stove, answering questions of sitters, or meeting the forms after they came out of the cabinet; or those which formed outside of the cabinet and moved about the room. I had on more than one occasion seen the most wonderful results, after to me satisfactory test conditions had been imposed, and Jonson’s body found toi be covered only by a dark woolen shirt, and a dark pair of pants. I cannot claim to be a neophyte, nor should I be so classed, for I have been a researcher in hypnotism and spiritualism, for many years; and can fairly claim to have discovered but one or two bold attempts at fraudulent work in either of the lines I was engaged in. I had nevertheless had more frequent occasion to regret the premature appearance in public, of eager psychic aspirants for approbation, long before a mature development of their psychic qualities. It will not, I trust, be considered egotistical to claim that I feel myself to be, from long and varied experience, quite competent to distinguish between the fraudulent and the genuine; or to discern the status or grade of the individual psychic instru¬ ment, for my sympathy is always with the striving student, rather than with the acknowledged graduate. Reverting once more to the cabinet, the medium, and the devel¬ opments at this seance, I with the others examined the room, 94 DAWN OD THE AWAKENED MIND utilized as a cabinet; and had a look at the medium Jonson in ordinary clothing, as he sat with the rest of the people in the circle. Mrs. H., her daughters, and friend, and myself, together with Mrs. J. B. Jonson, constituted a circle of six people. Aften they each had a visitor from the cabinet, the predicted event of May materializing and conversing with me, — as having been definitely made, as late as this very morning in Detroit, through the trumpet in Mrs. Wriedt’s seance, — actually took place (fulfillment), and was not only intensely interesting and convincing to me, but even more so than anything which had previously transpired in this series. May stepped out of the cabinet with a degree of confidence, and greeted me in the stipulated manner (fulfillment), adding “It’s I,” “I’m May,” “I told you I would be here,” and with that joyful “welcome home” look on her countenance, that had oft- times greeted me in her home and mine, in days gone by, slapped me on my left shoulder with her right hand, put her right arm around my neck, pressed her left cheek against mine, and said, “You will come here oftener than you used to, now, won’t you? Oh I am so glad I can talk with you; andl I want you to come here oftener, so I can materialize and talk with you. I am so happy now to find myself alive, and able to talk with you still. Hypatia and others help me so much, and I get stronger each time I come. I can’t stay any longer now.” (Fulfillment of promise complete.) As I stood looking at her she got shorter and shorter in stature, and while still looking me in the face, she went down and down, in sight of all the sitters, till she disappeared in the floor. Her voice in this, her first materialization, was not as strong as when speaking through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt’s. I here desire to say that May’s physical form as materialized, was not as large as her physical form in life, in other words while perfectly natural in appearance in other respects, still it was not of full natural stature. This fault or deficiency may be rectified in her future appearances, the first of which will be according to promise at Wednesday night’s seance, 15th Novem¬ ber. In her natural size in life, she stood about two inches shorter DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 95 than myself, and her weight averaged about one hundred and sixty-five pounds before she took to bed. A third materialization came from the cabinet to me, and claimed to be David Williams King, my brother, who passed to spirit life while a baby, not more than eighteen months old. He was born three years after my birth, and three years before my living brother’s birth, and in size appeared to be an average between my living brother and myself. He said he was with very many relatives and friends who were present when May entered the spirit realms. He soon passed away from want of power to hold his form together, but presently returned to tell me he knew that my spirit guide, Hypatia, would be at Wednes¬ day night’s seance. Another manifestation came from the cabinet in the form of a young, beautiful, and angelic female, which proved to be im¬ portant, inasmuch asi it was the form of a young woman about twenty years of age, and corresponding size, who alleged she was my daughter by my spirit wife May and bore resemblance to us both; and had passed to spirit realms at her physical birth; and promised (prediction) she would be able to speak more clearly and distinctly through the trumpet when opportunity presented, at which time, unless she had some other privilege sooner, she would tell me (prediction) the name given her in the spirit world. The fact is that some twenty years ago a female child of ours died at birth. This occult demonstration in the seance presents to the reader’s mind the problem of attained spiritual growth, where an infant soul has passed on to the other life, and returns as an adult demonstration. The question* has been submitted verbally to me more than once, “Do you really mean to say that infants and small children attain to adult existence in spirit life?” In answer I may say that I have been so informed by communicating in¬ telligences from the spirit} spheres. But I also think, and I am guided by that reason that Deity has implanted in me, and so realize the meaning of the words that Christ used when he said, “Suffer little children to come unto me, for of such is the King¬ dom of heaven.” I do not take the meaning as literal, as to size 96 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND or stature, for it would surely be unthinkable, if after all the teaching and preaching during the past centuries, it were found to be true that no souls of adults had gone to heaven; or that there were no adult souls to save ; but rather it would seem, as it is conveyed to my mind, that all are as little children in their knowl¬ edge of their future state, and have to be taught by those who have gained by long experience “over there.” Even adults, and those bereft of reason, when entering on the future state, begin to acquire knowledge, or start, so to speak, at No. 1, helpless as babes bereft of mother; and are cared for, and are taught, for progression is a law in spirit spheres. If it were not so there would be stagnation in development, and souls would cease to aspire. Every human being changes in both soul and body from the cradle to the grave. All are wholly dependent at the start on a mother, real or foster; and all have a limitation of physical development in earth life for an allotted time; and in accord with the soul’s requirement. Each infant child, and every man, has a soul which utilizes a body, which changes continually as the soul develops till the end of mortal life; and when the body is no longer of service, whether young or old, it is discarded, and the soul is set free; and like its former body, has a limitation to attain, and hence develops to its perfection by slow degrees. As in a juvenile or ordinary school, all the while there are little children there, but the same little children are not there all the while; for as mental development takes place, they each pass on through other grades of mental and physical development till they reach man’s estate on earth; while in the future life each soul attains its own perfected growth, and when it adopts the human form, that form would simply be of the dimensions it would have been, had it developed as did the soul, during those selfsame years, or lived during those added years. From the storehouse of acquired evidence we take that which sustains the claim that human life as spirit is a continuity, and therefore an infant spirit which enters the spirit sphere must con¬ tinue to develop until it completes its spirit growth, and becomes a perfected soul. This it will accomplish more rapidly than when DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 97 fettered or confined in the environment of physical matter, its first and cruder abode. Reverting again to the seance and to the phenomena: Up to this point I felt I had had a great share of what presented, but I was destined to have more, for a man with auburn hair, a small moustache and short beard of the same color, a dark coat, white turn-down collar, black tie, advanced to me and bowed; and put his finger to his throat and mouth to indicate that he could not speak, for the person he represented himself to be could not speak before death, on account of tuberculosis in the throat and lungs. He impressed me as being Mr. H—^—, who a few years ago was the storekeeper at an Institution in Toronto, at which I was, and am at this writing, the medical officer. I identi¬ fied him as the party mentioned above. I would estimate the number of materializations at this seance as about twenty. Unbelievable Phenomena, Become Believable by Investigation and Experience How natural for people of inexperience to judge or criticize the experience of others, and point out its failures. How easy it is for one ignorant of the knowledge, to assume that the knowledge is deficient of genuine existence. Supreme pity is deserved by the ignorant mortal, who cannot accept as true some¬ thing that he docs not happen to have knowledge of and how prone individual humanity is to affirm the impossibility of such phenomena, as mentioned by those who have knowledge of them. How common a remark it is that we hear, “I would not believe it unless I saw it, and then I would want to be sure it was not a fraud.” What a minute array of humanity there would be, if it were to be composed of people who would not believe something, unless they could see it, and as a matter of fact it is substantially true, that the great bulk of our knowledge comes from what other people tell us, what we read in books, and the public press; and what a minimum of knowledge we have acquired from in¬ vestigation, and individual observation. I remember reading somewhere of a person who would not believe what another had 98 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND stated to be a fact, unless he could appreciate it with all his senses, and having presented to him the opportunity of being tested in that way regarding pain, was asked if he could see it, hear it, taste it, smell it. No, but he could feel it. In brief he could only appreciate it by one-fifth of his normal senses, and he would certainly come far short in proving it to be a truth by his five senses, and yet he accepted that pain as true by sense of feeling only. I am prepared to admit that many phenomena are so strange, and incomprehensible, that they seem unbelievable until they have been appreciated or experienced by physical senses. I mention some such phenomena that have occurred at seances, and will limit the examples to the three Jonson seances on the 13th, 15th, and 16th of November, 1911, which were appreciated, and can be testified to, on those occasions by from six to fifteen people at each seance. As examples of these classes of phenomena to which I have alluded, I was witness to a form of a full grown tall old man walking about the room, while Jonson sat with the other sitters outside of the cabinet in view of every one present; and that form talked with those who' claimed to be relatives and with myself, and at the request of one of them he picked up his little granddaughter of seven years of age, held her up in his arms, kissed her, then put her down on the floor, in full view of everybody, then melted, so to speak, down into the floor, and disappeared from view, several feet from the cabinet entrance. Now had there been a bold rush to catch the body and it had succeeded, it would not have been, as we are so often assured, the medium in disguise, for Mr. Jonson sat in an armchair on my left, and was neither near the opening of the cabinet, nor near the form. But even mosquito netting, which has been so often suggested, by some who never have investigated, as very necessary or useful to catch the fraudulent persons who pretended to be spirits, could not have caught or held this spirit, for it went down into the floor as vapor and disappeared. Another form, with long hair, like an Indian girl, reaching to the knee, and holding Crysanthemums in her hand, went down at another spot, feet first, arm extended above the head, holding DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 99 the flowers, down and down, till nothing remained but hand and flowers, and lastly they also disappeared in the floor, which pre¬ sented no evidence of an artificial opening. Still Jonson sat on my left, and Mrs. Jonson away to my right, when almost immediately the flowers again appeared at the spot on the floor where they had disappeared a minute before and began to rise, followed by the materializing hand and arm and head, neck, body, limbs and feet; and all this in view of the sitters outside the cabinet, and no one in close proximity to the form; and the Jonsons at either end of the circle of sitters. Where does the fraud appear with these phenomena? And the form talks after it reappears. The existence of these and similar phenomena can no longer be denied, nor can they be credited to fraud. Their cause may be legitimately dis¬ cussed, however. The majority of the forms I saw in the three seances in Novem¬ ber materialized inside the cabinet, and returning towards the cabinet, disappeared as they got to the opening of the curtains, but without entering the cabinet. A few materialized outside of the cabinet, and several were materialized inside the cabinet, while Jonson sat at one end of the semi-circle of people part of the time, and another part of the time hel walked along in front of the line of sitters, drawing magnetism from them to build the forms inside the cabinet, so Grey Feather, his Indian spirit guide, explained through Jonson’s vocal organs; and lastly a part of the time was spent on the inside of the cabinet. The presence of music, instrumental or vocal, or both, facilitated the appearance of the forms. Absence of music seems to lessen the number and efficiency of the forms. The higher developed intelligences appear to have the power of producing much more light, or else require less darkness to exhibit themselves in materialized form and perfect detail. I have had opportunities for years past to investigate Jonson. I have yet to discover the first act of fraud on his part, and have no hesitation in saying that after full and satisfactory investigations, I express my belief and well established knowledge that the phenomena are genuine, and the most clever conjurers, professional fraud exposers, leading United States detective, nor any of our modern Solomons, have 100 ■ DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND so far been able to locate and establish as such, one single act of fraud on thd part of J. B. Jonson, sol far as I have learned. Predictions of an Important Seance for Me After finishing my record of the Monday night seance, November 13, 1911, I compiled the following for comparison with Wednes¬ day night’s record of November 15, 1911. My alleged spirit guide Hypatia has notified me herself on dififerent occasions, and through a trumpet recently at Detroit, that she will be at a seance at Jonson’s Wednesday night, 15th November, 1911; that she will not only bring my spirit wife, “May,” with her, but will also have a surprise in store for me; whereas my alleged spirit wife. May, has notified me through my alleged guide, Hypatia, and through my alleged nephew, Jesse, in spirit life, speaking through a trumpet; and by her own statement through a trumpet in Mrs. Wriedt’s seance room, — and also while in her material¬ ized form this Monday night, 13th November, 1911, that she will come to the Wednesday night, 15th November, 1911, seance, and will be materialized, and will talk with me (prediction), so I shall have the opportunity of testing her, and of asking her to further prove — if she don’t do it voluntarily — her human personality; and as my alleged spirit daughter (prediction) has promised to be at that same seance; and that while there she will tell me the name which was given to her in spirit realms (prediction) ; and lastly. Dr. Sharp, the alleged spirit guide and control of Mrs. Wriedt, told me in Detroit, he also would be present at the seance above designated; and would step out of the cabinet, and place his hand upon my head (prediction). I have therefore decided to secure, if possible, a stenographic report of the seance, and have said report, when complete, sworn to as a correct report; so that instead of an epitomized report, by myself, of the personally interesting parts, I shall have a report of everything from the beginning to the end of the seance, without personally having anything to do with that report. All those foregoing predictions were made to and received by me personally, from the various intelligences, at different times, and in a different place, and through a different channel of com- DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 101 munication in their entirety, without my being able to discover error, or the existence of fraud, as regards the main facts; and I leave fair-minded people and honest critics, to say whether on the hypothesis of fraud, or that of any other hypothesis than the natural one, “the spirit hypothesis,” such facts, explanations, conversations regarding family matters; and individual mutual talks, regarding articles that have been put in a place of safety; and something directed to be done, with a special article, which was not even entertained as a thought for a single moment; or advice given contrary to a conclusion reached in my own mind, touching some particular matter and whether what I now note and declare as herein preceding, is within the bounds of possibil¬ ity, to carry out, by fraudulent means. Such samples are to be found in my earlier trumpet communications of this series of seven seances. CHAPTER XVI T he fourth seance of the series of seven, and the second J. B. Jonson seance, is the only one of the entire November series, which embraces a record of all the materializations presenting during the seance; and is likewise exceptional, in that it is the only one of any series up to date, in which the full record is reproduced in the publication; and the entire stenographic report of what each and every one presenting said; also the stenographer’s description of their appearance and acts, as well as each event of sufficient interest tO' be described. I had several reasons for having not only a full report of every¬ thing of interest, but for making sure of its being an accurate report in every particular. I had been assured by Hypatia in Detroit, that a grand surprise would await me at this seance (November 15, 1911) ; and it occurred to me that if I made the record, it would not be a stenographic one, nor would I be able to concentrate my attention upon the presenting surprise; and the individual incidents connected with each and every one of the psychical phenomena under observation; and at the same time take notes or make a full report, and do justice either to myself or to the report. Further, I desired the report to be absolutely and verbally perfect, as only a stenographer’s report could be; and my own would not be a stenographer’s report. Lastly I desired to place myself beyond the possibility of being to any extent chargeable with interested motives, on account of what was promised, or influenced by selfish reason, or excited by what presented itself to my senses and mind; or having my personal judgment warped, so as to influence the description I might sub¬ sequently give to others as evidential matter; and to make it obvious that I could not possibly write up the matter to suit myself, or to give color to the possibilities or probabilities, which might be presumed to harmonize with my opinions, hopes or convictions. In fact my wishes were no less my soul’s desire, to demonstrate a truth, for I did indeed most heartily and sincerely 102 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 103 desire that some one, possibly a member of this select group of psychical researchers, or some one employed by the class, would make for me a true and full report of the, in this instance, seance as a whole, for me to have and to hold as evidence of what occurred outside of my own written or spoken description. I had not been at the seance many minutes, before I found that the secretary of the club or class was making a stenographic report for the class. When opportunity presented I bespoke a copy of the record, and secured the promise of it, and later obtained possession of it, and thus my wishes, my soul’s desire, my true prayer for a full report — and the said report to bear the declara¬ tion, and sworn statements of the stenographer who made it, as to all the matter, including that which pertains to my guide and loved ones, as evidential records — was truly answered. Those present never saw me before. I had only a few minutes previously been introduced to them as the official representative of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, and as such was admitted as the first individual not a member, who was permitted the privilege of being present at a seance with this class of in¬ vestigators, which favor is hereby acknowledged. I attach the record as embracing all the main features, and being absolutely independent of even a suggestion on my part. The Official Stenographer’s Sworn Record “The seventh meeting of the Sunflower Class was a notable one, being honored by the presence of Dr. John S. King of Toronto, Canada, who is President of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, with a charter from the Government. This gentleman’s long experience in the work, and high development, were a source of great benefit to the class, and productive of marvelously beautiful materializations most thoroughly appreciated by the Circle. We wish to thank! Dr. King for his words, attesting to personal experiences so convincing as to impress more deeply on our hearts and minds the wonderful possibilities of this great work, stimulating us to strive together to the attaining of results with ever-increasing earnestness and harmonious co-operation. 104 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND The materializations recorded for this meeting are as follows: 1 .JOHN. Mrs. Moore’s son, a boy of sixteen, who has been in spirit-land for one year. This date being that of his birthday, Mrs. Moore had provided beautiful chrysanthemums to be given to each materialization in honor of the occasion. John materialized most beautifully and strong, building up in sight of all, attired in his vesture, having on earth been a member of the Trinity Choir. Seeing that his mother held a largd bouquet to give to him, he entered the cabinet, dematerialized the book which he held, and returned to receive the flowers. Walking beside Mrs. Jonson, John went from one end of the circle to the other, carrying the flowers, thanking one and all for their words of greeting on this his birthday. Returning to his mother, he told her to be patient, that it would not be long before she would be able to walk. Going to the cabinet for more strength, John returned, stopping on his way to take a flower from the case and handing it to Sister Martha, the beautiful white sister who materialized with him. Standing beside his mother, John said: “Now don’t sigh, mother dear, nor be sad. It would be much worse if you could not see me at all, but had to feel that I was lying in that cold ground.’’ Meanwhile Sister Martha was drawing strength from the medium toward John with indescribably graceful movements of her hands. John continued: “I have to go now. Please don’t feel lonely any more, will you, because I am with you?’’ Kissing his mother and little cousin goodbye, John retreated toward the cabinet, holding in his hand the large bouquet of chrysanthemums, and dematerialized both himself and the flowers, outside of the cabinet, in full view of the class. 2 .FLORENCE. Mrs. Russell’s sister. This materialization is a beautiful young woman who comes each week to talk to her sister, often giving DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 105 important advice. At the close of the conversation Florence de- materialized with her flower from the birthday bouquet. 3 .VIOLA. This is always a beautifully strong materialization, being Mrs. Jonson’s spirit guide. As is usual with her, Viola had a bright word for each member. Answering the general greeting she said gaily: “Fse right here.” To Mrs. Moore: “Hello Auntie Moore,” “Told Mr. Robleto that he was too sober tonight.” Accepted her birthday flower saying “Sorry Auntie Cleary is not here,” a facetious remark which she seldom forgets, appearing to ignore the member’s invariable presence. Going toward Mrs. Cleary, Viola held her dress in position to catch the candy which Mrs. Cleary had brought for her. Inquired about Mr. Eyster as “Secretary No. 2” and instructed the secretary to put a long line for him way across the page for being absent. Standing in the middle of the floor Viola said: “Now I cannot go until you all laugh and talk at once and give me a little brightness. We must have conditions, you know.” Dematerializing outside the cabinet, Viola added as she was disappearing: “Now don’t all get sober the minute I quit talking.” Grey Feather, who had kept his medium outside of the cabinet with the class to show that he could bring the materialization in that way, was magnetizing some cards for members, and the sparks radiated from same in a remarkable manner. 4 .INEZ. This materialization is a most beautiful young girl of about six¬ teen, and is a guide of Mrs. Cleary’s. She always brings brightness into the circle, and has a merry word for all. Receiving her birthday flower and thanking Mrs. Moore prettily for same, she went over to Grey Feather and held the flower under his nose, much to his disgust. 5 .CELIA. Mr. Cleary’s guide. This is always a beautiful materialization of a young woman, and Mr. Cleary has received many convincing proofs of her power to assist him. Celia gracefully acknowledged 106 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND an introduction to Dr. King, and walking toward the flowers, evidently admiring them, remarked that flowers gave beautiful conditions. After a private conversation with Mr. and Mrs. Cleary in the cabinet, Celia dematerialized visibly to the class. 6 .INEZ. Inez reappeared and took Grey Feather into the cabinet. Returning, Inez let each member smell her flower, remarking: “They don’t smell very good, but, oh, aren’t they beautiful?” Coming to Dr. King, Inez let him feel her beautiful hair. Dancing merrily toward the cabinet Inez also dematerialized visibly. 7 .CLARA. A young woman materialization whO' is a guide for Mrs. Russell. She says her name is Clara Navarre, and her home on earth was in Philadelphia. Also that she is in the fourth sphere and soon to progress to the fifth. That she will tell Mrs. Russell when the time of her progression comes. Asked if she wore a white veil because of the sphere in which she existed, she replied: “No, we garb ourselves in white because it is symbolical of purity.” 8 .DR. SHARP. A wonderful materialization of a spirit guide of Mrs. Etta Wriedt of Detroit, and a man whose venerable and striking appearance commanded the most profound respect. Responding to Dr. King, Dr. Sharp said: “Yes, I told you I would come. I told you at Sister Wriedt’s in Detroit I would be here. Yes, you may tell them who I am.” Having told Dr. King at Detroit that he would place his hand on his. Dr. King’s, head, when he visited Toledo, he also fulfilled that promise, saying: “I am a friend to all who are friends of the Cause.” With the words: “Here is your surprise,” this im¬ posing spirit dematerialized. (Fulfillment complete.) 9 .HYPATIA. Dr. King’s high spirit guide, who alleges she is the daughter of Theon, next walked out of the cabinet into full view^ of all DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 107 present. Words are hardly adequate to describe in a fitting manner this beautiful materialization. Tall and queenly with brilliant jewels scintillating at every movement, Hypatia was glorious to behold. She said to Dr. King: “This is the rose you gave me nearly two years ago, do you remember? and here is another. This is the white ribbon and this is the blue. The conditions here tonight are glorious. How beautiful that this was all prepared ahead of time for you all. I am going now, but I will try to return. Just sit down.” Requested by Mrs. Jonson to take the birthday flower to Dr. Sharp Hypatia graciously accepted her own flower and the one for Dr. Sharp. While waiting for Hypatia to return, Dr. King spoke most beautifully of the wonderful qualities of his queenly guide, saying he had always found her the soul of loyalty and truth. That she helps his wife on the other side, making her rapid progression possible. Also told the class of Hypatia’s promise to bring to him on this occasion his wife’s first-born child, who passed out at birth, and who had now grown to be a beautiful young woman. When Dr. King had finished speaking, Hypatia reappeared and said: “I would do much more tonight but it takes so much power from the medium, and there are so many yet to come that it would not be right for me to do so, therefore I will bid yoii good night.” Bowing gracefully to all, this radiant spirit dematerialized outside the cabinet. 10.MAY DONNA. The promise of Hypatia was fulfilled and Dr. King saw before him his spirit daughter, who spoke beautifully as follows: “Papa, O Papa, I love you. I came the other evening. Yes, I am going to tell you my] name. I want to be near to both you and Mamma; so they call me May Donna. The May is for Mamma and the Donna is for you.” Asked to spell the name. May Donna did so distinctly. She continued: “You must never feel sad, dear papa, for you never shall be alone, so you must not feel so lonesome. You will be, oh, so 108 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND happy when mamma and I take you with us. Don’t forget, papa, to tell all the dear ones that I came.” May Donna accepted a flower from her father, and also took the birthday flower from Mrs. Moore, saying: “Be sure and tell grandma that I came. Good night, papa, dear, dear papa.” With these loving words this lovely spirit dematerialized in view of the class. 11.MRS. JOHN S. KING (Known in the Records as May). Beautiful and strong, and so convincingfy natural as to over¬ come a strong man’s self-control, Dr. King’s wife stood material¬ ized before him, speaking the following comforting words: “Don’t cry, dear Johnnie. My dear, this life is beautiful, all brightness and joy. Oh, dear one, I love you so, and the love we feel on earth only grows stronger and more beautiful on our side. “Do just as I said about my things. It is not necessary to repeat that. About my jewels, I want them left where they are in the safety deposit vault in the bank, I don’t want them given away for a very long time, then I will instruct you about what I want done with them. The single diamond, I want you as soon as you go home, to have set as a scarf pin. Be careful and watch where you take it, do you understand ? and when you wear it, it will make it easier for me to come near tq you. “Oh, my dear Johnnie, I wish I could stand here and talk to you, but I cannot, but as many times as I come it will give me more strength. Oh, Johnnie dear, I feel my strength going. You know I could not speak when I passed out. I want to materialize to you more often, dear Johnnie.” Being asked what pet names she called Dr. King besides “Dear Johnnie,” she replied by mentioning all the terms of endearment which she had been accustomed to use to her husband. Resuming the conversation, Mrs. King said: “You were not with me when I passed out, Johnnie dear, but I could not have spoken to you if you had been there, but now, dear Johnnie, we will make up for lost time. I feel my strength DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 109 leaving me, and I must say good night, my dear, dear Johnnie, I love you so much.” 12. . . . CONSTANCE EYSTER. A beautiful materialization of a child who passed out at the age of eight years and has been in spirit world a year and a month. Asked by her mother how she ever managed to get through when there were so many great spirits there, she replied: “Well, you see, mamma, they sang a little baby song and I just popped right in on it.” Being told why her papa was not present, she replied, sympathetically: “Oh, poor daddy. You tell daddy that I am going to help him and Chrystal is going to help him, and we will make him feel all right again. And don’t feel sad so much, mamma dear, because I am, oh, so happy, and I love you and daddy more than you know that I can love you. Chrystal is going to talk to you, mamma dear, and now I must go. Please say good night to daddy for me, and good night, mamma dear. I love you so much.” 13 .CHRYSTAL. Mr. Eyster’s beautiful spirit guide, who always materializes with strength and power. Giving a message to be taken to Mr. Eyster, she said: “Tell the dear one to push ahead in that matter. He must get hold of that. If he has to work day and night, he must find a way, for in it lies an end to all worry for you both. I see ahead to great things for you both.” With a few words of further advice this powerful spirit dematerialized outside of the cabinet, her silver crown resting on the floor for an instant before disappearing. 14 .MR. STACK. This is a materialization of Mrs. Cleary’s father, who is always convincingly natural to all who knew him in life, even to speaking with a rich brogue. When someone said it was Mr. Stack, he replied: “Sure it is, but I waited too long to come. Sure I am happy.” no DAWN OF TFIE AWAKENED MIND Being offered the birthday flower he took same with the pleased remark, “Of course I’ll take it.” Mr. Stack also dematerialized visibly with his flower. 15.VIOLA. A beautiful materialization of a young girl, who is a guide for Mrs. Jonson. She seemed delighted with her birthday flower, and went from one member of the class to the other showing it, dematerializing with it in her hand. 16. . . MRS. MOORE’S FATHER. This gentleman materialized very distinctly, and accepted his flower from his little grandchild, who was present, and kissing her good-bye, the little girl afterwards remarking that Grandpa’s whiskers tickled her mouth. 17 .MARY. • Mr. Robleto’s beautiful guide, who by referring to certain happenings gave him positive proof that she is always with him. Sent a message of love to his family, and promised to give him proof of her presence at a future time by touching him on the head. Taking Mr. Robleto by the hands Mary led him with her to the cabinet, where, after a short conversation, she dematerialized visibly, 18 .ALBERT. This materialization is the young son of Mrs. Russell. He is always a beautifully strong spirit, and talked for some time with his mother, also walking toward Dr. King for an introduction, and expressing his pleasure in meeting the gentleman. 19 .MINNIE. A beautiful materialization of Mrs. Moore’s sister, who stood during the materialization of Albert and admired the flowers, removing from the vase the one\ of her choice. She also told Mrs. Moore to be prepared for the passing out of her sister, which lies in the near future. Saying good-bye to her little niece, Minnie and Albert dematerialized almost simultaneously. DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 111 This closed one of the most beautiful and satisfactory Circles ever held by the Sunflower Class. Nov. 15,1911. (Sgd.) Katherine M. Eyster, SEC. State of Ohio, Lucas County, ss: Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public in and for Lucas County, Ohio, this 18th day of November, 1911. (Sgd.) James W. Harbaugh, Notary Public. Law Seal. ADDENDA. Readers will, in the foregoing seance, find fulfillment of pre¬ dictions made in the Detroit trumpet seances, with addition of more new evidence. Dr. Sharp, guide of Etta Wriedt, was present as promised, materialized, placed his hand on my head, and contributed to my surprise. Hypatia brought May and our daughter to the seance so they could both materialize and talk with me; handed to me the two roses May and I gave her, when May was in earth life, nearly two years before this, thus completing a test of her (Hypatia’s) capacity, which she had promised. This is referred to at length elsewhere. She also fulfilled her promise to bring my angel daughter to materialize and talk with me. May Donna fulfilled her promise to tell me the name the angels gave to her. May fulfilled each promise made at Detroit. She also gave evidence that she was with me and knew what articles were in the safety-deposit vault, which I only placed there on Friday, as I left home the next day, and no living person save myself knew what I had placed there, or when. She also gave in response to a request of a lady present, all the pet names I called her by when in our home, and did so correctly. She likewise made a request of me which no one else could comply with, the outcome of which will appear as completed and complied with, in a future chapter. J. S. K. CHAPTER XVII T his seance was,held on Thursday night, 16th November, 1911, following the special seance of the night before. The Thursday night seance each week is called the public seance, inasmuch as it is open to admission to those not belonging to the Sunflower Class, nor to any special circle of friends; and it is the circle to which newcomers, strangers, and personal friends of some of those who are more or less familiar with seances, are admitted, or acquaintances of the Jonsons. As every opportunity for me counted, I availed myself of this one, and found myself present at the appointed time, for the opening of the seance. I recognized three or four whom I had met on previous occasions, but the total number present was less than at the previous seance. Of the materializations which presented, in all about twenty, several had presented at one or other of the two preceding seances. The forms which came to me at this seance, and held converse, were only four. The first form to come to and speak with me was the man whom I have described in a previous chapter, as the one who pointed to his throat and mouth at the Monday night seance, but who was on that occasion unable to talk with me; but he now walked right up to me, so that I could see his every feature, and every movement of his eyes and lips, and hear the words distinctly, as they passed through his lips. He was dressed as on the previous occasion, and a perfect reproduction of his former self; a man I had known in life as connected with a public institution, and as I had often seen him dressed in his Sunday clothing in my city. This time his face was radiant with smiles, and joy seemed to gleam in his eyes. He spoke as follows: “Doctor, when you return to Toronto I want you to tell Mrs. O-, — who thinks that I am dead, — that I am not dead, that you saw me and talked with me, and that I asked you to tell her this. Will you do so?” And I told him that I would. (On my return I did as promised. J. S. K.). 112 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 113 May Donna, my alleged Spifit daughter, for the third time materialized, and seemed to have gained in strength each time. She said that both she and her mamma were with me most of the time, and would accompany me back to Mrs. Wriedt’s in Detroit; and then back to my home in Toronto, to keep me from becoming sad; and would, before long, be able to talk with me, and to appear to me when alone. Before sneaking of the next form to appear, I may say that a single light on the wall behind the sitters cast its direct rays to the point where the cabinet curtains were separated by the forms as they came out and where the investigators’ faces turned from the light toward the face and form which received the light rays, while the entire room was dimly lighted, but sufficiently so that one could distinguish the sitters, male or female, in the chairs, and easily note the difference in size and feature of those presenting. The next form to appear was that of May, who evinced greater strength, and the more natural developed physical appearance, than on the first occasion, being normal, in size, voice, and the various attributes already mentioned in previous chapters. On this occasion, while speaking affectionately, she expressed the pleasure that she realized in her capability of materializing, and being able to talk in this organized but transient body, though she could speak better through the trumpet. She also again acknowledged the wonderful care and assistance she had received from Hypatia. She wished me to visit the Jonsons again before long. She promised to be with me on my return to Mrs. Wriedt’s, where she would have opportunity of talking with me through the trumpet. “We will all be with you,” meaning those who had been with me when I was there before. There came to me in this seance in materialized form a very ancient-looking and peculiar-visaged spirit form, who alleged he was a spirit guide of mine, the most ancient of all the guides. He indeed was the strangest-looking human I had ever seen, differing so much in features, and in size and color as well as dress, from known races. He spoke, giving a name so long, and so peculiar, that I could neither pronounce, write, nor even 114 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND remember it; and found out what little I did find out then regard¬ ing him through others; through my own alleged guides, especially Otelleo, and the little cabinet spirit worker, who said that he, the guide, would for the present be designated des-Asia. He originally came from Thibet or Himalaya mountains, in which former place he was one time a priest in a religion differing from anything now in existence. The little cabinet spirit who claims she helps to build the forms in the cabinet at these seances, speak¬ ing out after the ancient spirit dematerialized, said he was thousands of years old, and had said four or six thousand years were not much, as there was a city buried in Mexico, which has been buried for full forty thousand years, but would soon be discovered. I requested Otelleo to find out more concerning this materialization, and to let me know, and later requested Hypatia to let me know the purport of his visit, and his character, and whether he should be recognized. Though there is no evidential matter, save what the physical senses produce. Still I will maintain the record and await future developments. My spirit guide, Hypatia, was reported to,be present, but did not materialize at this seance. Autobiography of J. B. Jonson [Note :—In response to my request for a brief autobiographical sketch of his life for publication in this book, Mr. J. B. Jonson complied by sending me the following under date of February 28, 1912. The Author.] “I was born in 1854 in Akron, Ohio. Father was a native of England, and a lineal descendant on the paternal side of the house of the immortal Ben Jonson, the British poet and writer. His father’s mother, my great-grandmother, was a Payne, a descendant of Tom Payne, the noted infidel, so called. Ih my boyhood days I remember attending a celebration of Payne’s birthday, held in Toledo, in the old Lyceum Hall, then used by Spiritualists and Free Thinkers, when they spoke with much unction of his relation. It seems that his father, who, by the way, was a very wealthy man and an intensely religious individual, never spoke of Payne except in tones of disparagement and deplored the relationship. His son J. B. JONSON, Rlaterializing Medium. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 115 never agreed with him either in his views of religion or Payne. Father, being the youngest son, at the decease of his father, was cut otf with the usual portion accorded in those days to the youngest, which he refused to accept, coming to America in 1851, entered into business in 1853, meeting the one who was to become my mother, and after a short courtship was married. Mother’s maiden name was Margaret J. Dolson, she was also of English ancestry. At the time of my birth, October 16, 1854, my parents were boarding with a family in Akron, who were spiritualists. The evening previous to my birth they held a seance for physical manifestations, so being born amid such surroundings, is it not possible that prenatal conditions had something to do with devel¬ opments of later years? My earliest recollections of anything of a psychic nature date back to the time that I was seven years of age — having a sister, Josephine, five years of age. Romping through the house one summer day in childish play, she chasing me, I ran out of the house, and into, and through, a large, burly, black-whiskered man on the steps of the house. On turning round no one was there. My sister saw him, too. We ran to mother in fear. While telling her, father came home from the store. I remember father saying, “Tut, tut! It is all imagination,” but that did not satisfy us, and all through my boyhood days we had various manifestations, wherever we lived, unexplained noises, Tappings, sounds of footfalls at night through rooms where no one was visible to our sight, in fact so many manifestations that I have not the time or space to mention them. My first serious investigation began at the age of 18, as to the cause of these manifestations. My sister, who had passed away shortly after the first incident mentioned, being the first to mani¬ fest in my first regular seance that I sat in. My progress after that was rapid, beginning with trance control in 1876. Having moved to Springfield, Ohio, I became acquainted with friends interested in Spiritualism, who formed a circle. I got directions to build a cabinet, and soon obtained physical manifestations under strict test conditions, and some materializations developed. There occurred many things of an occult nature during my sojourn of four years among the friends I met in Springfield, and a decided development of my mediumship. Coming back to Toledo, Ohio, in 1880, my employment inter¬ fering with our sittings, I did not devote so much time to the subject for several years. In the interval I found that I possessed mediumship in the trumpet line, which I have experienced more or less from time to time, up to the present. We had various manifestations in our home circle of spirit power, until I was 116 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND forced through circumstances to come to the front as a public medium, my first development being as a trumpet medium and for physical manifestations, having materializations in the meantime, which did not assume the present stabilities until I married my present wife in 1901, which I lay to the fact of our being both born under the same planet. Our birthdays fall respectively, hers on the 9th and mine on the 16th of October, making a strong psychic combination, as per Butler’s Solar Biology. As to the character of our manifestations or rather description of them, I leave that to others, as my friend, the author of this book, has requested me to be brief in sketch of my life, will leave it with the reader, with the statement that if I in my humble way have been the instrument through whom their friends, who have passed to the higher life, have been able to again come in touch with them, with the consoling knowledge that if a man dies he does indeed live again, then my work has not been in vain, or my life without purpose. I am, dear reader, yours sincerely. (Sgd.) J, B. JoNSON.” CHAPTER XVIII T his seance was held on Saturday night, 18th November, 1911, in Mrs. Wriedt’s seance room, Detroit. The sitters were four women, a man, and a little boy, who together with myself made a circle of seven. I did not take copious notes as I usually did, but wrote my record after my return to the hotel. I do not therefore record all the facts, but briefly note interesting features which I deem worthy of record as evidential in character. Dr. Sharp, the control of Mrs. Wriedt, greeted me, and in doing so, reminded me that he had fulfilled the promise he had made me in this same seance room last Sunday, the 12th November, to visit the Jonson seance on the night I would have my surprise. He had promised that he would materialize in the cabinet, walk out, and place his hand on my head, and I would know by that act, that it was he (Dr. Sharp). I admitted to his medium, Mrs. Wriedt, and before all the sitters, that Dr. Sharp had fully and successfully carried out his promise, exhibit¬ ing much strength when he placed his hand on my head. That occasion was the second one where Dr. Sharp appeared material¬ ized in my presence. In my records of August 7, 1910, I find this entry, which mentions him, viz.; “At the private seance this Saturday forenoon, 7th August, 1910, Mrs. Jonson sat with Mrs. King (then in mortal life) and myself, we three being all in room B, while Jonson was lying on a couch in room A, the other side of the curtain, which filled the space left for a door. After several forms had materialized, a form claiming to be that of Dr. Sharp, a heavy set, and well bearded intelligent-looking old man, called on me, and said, while he stood in the materialized form, “As you are an old friend of my medium, Mrs. Etta Wriedt of Detroit, I felt I would like to call on you.” We (my wife, then living, and myself) bade him welcome, and after a short conversation he withdrew.” The same seance which Dr. Sharp attended in materialized form, above recorded, was rendered memorable to me for several 117 118 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND reasons which merit recognition, and may hold connection with events of prior date, as well as with others of later date in this volume, which even now, or probably in the near future, will by association with other dates, events, facts, or statements, prove to be circumstantial evidence, or corroborative testimony, hence will be noted in the foregoing connection. “Otelleo, another intelligence, who has held communication with me for years, through various mediums, and as varied phases, having first materialized and conversed with me, through this same medium (J. B. Jonson) in another place in 1907, as he was about to retire promised to return, and bring with him a distinguished personality that I would be pleased to meet. He retired and shortly after returned with an alleged friend and brother; and introduced one alleged Hiram Abiff.” “My guide, Hypatia, who has always alleged that she was the daughter of Theon, and consequently as such would be known as the Neoplatonic philosopher, visited us and then retired, but before doing so promised to return and did in a little while re-enter with another beautiful angelic young woman, whom she introduced to my wife as Saphrona. This same 7th of August, 1910, seance was made memorable, by the conditions imposed and accepted, at the time of our presentation to Hypatia of white roses, tied in my case with a bow of white satin baby ribbon, and in the case of my then wife. May, tied in a bow with blue satin baby ribbon, and which is more fully referred to in two other chapters covering the present series of s&nces, viz.; at Detroit through the trumpet, and on Wednesday night, the 15th November, 1911, at Jonson’s, on both occasions by Hypatia, who retained the roses one year, three months and eight days before returning them to me, tied as when she received them, and looking as fresh, and my wife as spirit was present when she did so.” The next intelligence to address me at Mrs. Wriedt’s seance of 18th November, 1911, was Grey Feather, the alleged Indian control of J. B. Jonson, in Toledo, who gave me two reasons for coming to this seance, the first being, that he promised me he would come, and he now kept that promise; and the second DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 119 being a matter of solely personal and private interest, which would serve no useful purpose to make record of here. May, my spirit wife, followed Grey Feather, and not only endorsed what Grey Feather said, but went more into details. Hypatia spoke about the same matter as did Grey Feather, and May, but spoke more earnestly and advisedly than was usual with her. The attitude and earnestness of these three spirit witnesses in their several communications to me, touching a matter of personal interest, supplied evidential matter of a most convincing kind, but unavailable here. Another feature of this seance was the singing by two different voices separately of Scotch melodies, and a few stanzas of well- known hymns. One of the sitters received very much advice from some alleged spirit speaking through the trumpet, regarding an intricate busi¬ ness matter, which became very interesting to her, though of no evidential value to me. My alleged spirit daughter’s name (May Donna), as I received it at the Jonson seance, was announced, with the addition “Only to let you know that I am here. Papa,” At this seance the very ancient guide — with a very long name, which I could not write down nor pronounce, nor remember after he had materialized at the fifth seance of the series at Jonson’s, but who was by me to be designated, and known for the present, as des-Asia, — came. As he spoke without announcing his name, the question asked was, “Who is this ?” After a brief pause there came in thundering tones the word or name “Asia.” He had some years ago made himself known as an ancient spirit guide of mine. He spoke slowly in the English language, and informed me that he had now come to begin the work that he had on the first and only occasion, about six years previously, indicated through another medium, and that he would talk with me again when I sat alone. The alleged spirit of a little Indian girl who said her name was “Pansy,” and that she came to see Big Chief, enlivened matters for fully fifteen minutes, creating much laughter, which 120 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND became more or less contagious from her own. She also created some amusement at my expense, and set me guessing. She said she was in my home, Toronto, and “your squaw (meaning my wife’s photograph) was on your office table.” I was at first puzzled to know what she meant. She apparently enjoyed my stupidity for the moment, and laughed heartily and said, “Your squaw stands by you now.” Then I realized that part, when it dawned on me that I had left my late wife’s picture on my table with that of a friend. So I said, “Now tell me if she is anywhere else,” and she told me where three of her pictures hung on walls and a photograph picture on the dresser. She described the location of each as I found them on my return home. They, with all the hangings, had been changed during my absence, and I had not absolutely definite fixture of these in my mind; and though I knew the position of some of them, before the change, I could not give their relative positions with adjacent pictures, after the change, which she had done. I think under the circumstances, the hypothesis of thought transmission or mind reading in this case would be far-fetched. After my return home I was able to verify the absolutely correct location and situation of the pictures, as she had stated in the seance; and am able therefore to include in this connection my acknowledgement of the correctness of what was described in the hearing of all who participated in the seance. So that the testimony given in the seance was confirmed as correct from my comparison of the testimony with the existing facts. THE TELEPATHIC AND MIND READING HYPOTHESES. Here let us analyze the mental hypotheses, and prove if we may, that they cannot account for all psychic phenomena, for there are some produced by the carnate soul, and others when it becomes discarnate. The functioning of the objective portion of the mind, it is claimed, has to do with the five senses, with reason, and with the acquisition of knowledge; while that of the subjective portion of the mind controls the organic functions throughout the body, and is the seat of all emotions, and the storehouse of memory. I will even grant this much of what is DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 121 claimed, and further admit it is harmonious with the incarnate spirit, in each individual man; but while it may be impressed to do service for a discarnate spirit, is not itself creative of physical form, voice, or other psychic phenomena outside of its own physical environment or human body ? I am not a mental expert, nor eminent psychologist, but have a healthy functioning of mind, and normal faculty of reasoning and therefore claim the right to question the assertionist, who says a certain functioning of the subjective self will account for the so-called psychic mysteries. I wish to say and make my state¬ ment clear, that I am not myself able, and do not believe that any man is able, to correctly define or demonstrate all the varied functions of any mind; and I object to the assumption of an hypothesis, without facts are presented to sustain it, and therefore with definition there must be demonstration, by the defender of the mind hypothesis. It is the champion’s part to sustain it. I do not, in discussing the hypothesis in question, claim to know, but simply assume or suppose, for purpose of argument leaving onus of proof, with the one who uses the hypothesis. Let us see the application of the different mind hypotheses, in the case of the testimony, of the alleged little Indian girl. Can it be accounted for by any mind hypothesis? Or was the information she con¬ veyed compiled from facts and knowledge stored in my subjective mind? Or was the voice a physical phenomena on that occasion in the seance due to mind reading or telepathic transmission of thought? I claim it was neither. I must have cast eye on each one of those pictures before they had changed from their former locations, and if so I am prepared to admit their former location was fixed in my subjective mind, and there retained for all time to come, in earth life at any rate. I have proven, to my own satisfaction, scores of times, that the subjective mind is a store¬ house of all our knowledge, howsoever obtained, from childhood to old age, though mostly forgotten by the normal or objective mind ; and as I had absolutely no objective knowledge, at the time the information was telepathically given off from me, of the location of the pictures, it must have been supplied, if that hypothesis be the correct one, from my sub-conscious or subjective mind, if 122 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND from me at all, and if that possibility is admitted (and I will admit it for argument’s sake solely), then the thought impression, or association of thoughts, having their existence in or self- evolvement from the human transmitter (my subjective mind), to the human receiver (Mrs. Etta Wriedt’s subjective mind), it was thus in her possession. Keeping in view the fact, that the thought impression reaching the human receiver, must be absolutely'the very thought, or perfect duplicate or wavelet as from the stone thrown in the pond, of the thought leaving the human transmitter, my sub-conscious self, which is not supposed to be active in that way; and is practically well illustrated by the well known acts of transmitting both telephonic and telegraphic messages, which follow a line, straight or circuitous in route, from the trans¬ mitting clerk or person, or instrument to ear of the receiver, or the receiving instrument; and if it be thus, the origin is human, and if the knowledge be not voluntarily sent by the sitter (at Mrs. Wriedt’s, myself) then the medium, in order to get it, must interview with her subjective mind, or peep into my storehouse of memory (my subjective mind), and look and find therein, the very thing she wants by mind-reading process; and having found it, set to work to dress it up (in words or shape) and palm it off as original with her, and by her conscious self transmit it back to my objective mind, but not by telepathy, but in a different way, by putting it into a trumpet, a physical reality, and giving it a voice to speak it, — for all present heard the voice, and what it said — so that the thought is dressed in physical, and by waves of sound strikes on the drum of ear of me, and through this channel physical gains entrance in the normal way, to my con¬ scious mind and understanding; and to be consistent, in any such contention of course the information would be first stolen, or at least taken from my subjective mind, by the so-called mind¬ reading plan, for it was not transmitted, as I will later show, and it was not original with the medium, and thus from first tO' last, even if it were possible — which it was not, under my super¬ vigilance— it would be nothing but hypocrisy, and now I’ll pin the critic fast. There is nothing sent back by telepathic route, nor yet by the natural way, but what was stolen from my sub- DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 123 conscious mind, by mind-reading theft, and note this fact, that if it was not there at first, it could not he stolen, utilized, received or sent, and hence as I got information through “Pansy” and knowledge of some events new to me, that never were in stock in store of my subconscious self, but came from other source to me on that occasion, upsets entirely, the hypothesis which critic had adopted; instead of mine, by which he claimed the medium (Mrs, Wriedt) had humbugged me (as sitter). Let us look at it another way, as, for example, I as sitter do not think it, and therefore don’t transmit it, which is quite reason¬ able ; and hence it is not my telepathy, nor my transmission of thought, but on the other hand the critic claims she (the medium) reads my thoughts in mind, and hence “’tis done by mind¬ reading,” and action emanates from her; and she knows, by copying it from what is in my storehouse, or takes it out of my subjective mind by view, or by theft from me, which would be mind-reading theft, with intent, and sends it back by route of trumpet, on waves of ether or common air to my objective mind, through sense of hearing, all of which is physical, and once again the copy goes, or else the original, on the shelf of my subjective storehouse; but even that won’t do, for ’tis not true, for once on shelf of subjective mind, it stolen cannot be, nor lost, but always there, and copied or repeated only, so medium gets a photographic picture of thought or thoughts of mine, or myi reflected thoughts, in her subconscious or subjective mind, and there they’ll stay, and not rise to the upper, or objective mind to be forthwith sent back to me, as she might wish to so impress me that it was spirit, instead of her, so here again the mind hypothesis won’t fit, because the ■ knowledge, or facts, are not in mind to be photo¬ graphed, copied, reflected or repeated. And still I may in other words express it, and bring out the facts by reasoning, and say the receiver of the thoughts (the medium’s subjective mind) becomes possessed of them, or their reflection rather, or from the waves of harmony produced by molecular vibrations, or in some other way, which have origin in thought creation or evolvement, and rearranges them from what they were, and sends them back by aid of the physical to my 124 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND objective mind, for the express purpose of deceiving; me into believing it to be what it is represented. But here again resort is had to what is physical, that is a trumpet, and a voice, which are not created by the mind, and that hypothesis will not account for them, for that presupposes prior existence of these thoughts. But to carry out her motive the medium assigns or designates the duty to its subjective self, of acquiring thoughts from out the storehouse of the subjective mind of me, which I may grant in argument as possible, if such thoughts are there, and have them passed up to the assignee, the objective mind of medium (but even this is exceptionally difficult), and then arrange therewith a likely story to be sent back to me, from: her objective mind, but it would have to be, if at all, by telepathy, for it could not be by transmission through a trumpet; and through the organ of hear¬ ing of myself, to my objective mind, what is supposed, or so argued by the defender of the mind hypothesis, to have been obtained out of my subjective storehouse, which, if that be true, belonged to me, which it did not, under the false pretense of its being obtained from an Indian girl, which had in fact, at least so argued at this time and place, no real existence. This I would designate a very lame excuse, for a very weak mind hypothesis. But had the thoughts and the knowledge once been there regard¬ ing Pansy, they might possibly have been telepathically transmitted or read, reflected or cognized, soi they could be utilized, recon¬ structed, redressed in words, and sent back, in the natural and human way, but not by trumpet and language spoken, for the purpose of deceiving me. To me it seems ridiculous, the argument and reason, that the medium gets it all from me, even if the thoughts were on the shelf of my sub-conscious mind, and hence I ask who could devise the deceitful part of it? or what motive could prompt it? What advantage or benefit could it be to anyone? The possibility and actuality of mind-reading, or telepathy, have never yet been accepted as well established for communication, or for practical utility. But the thoughts were never mine, and therefore could not be obtained from me, and hence no thought or knowledge of Pansy, whom I never heard or saw or identified, and never DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 125 knew had an existence up to then; and consequently never had in mind to be transmitted, read or reflected to the subjective mind of medium, and therefore it was mentally non-existent, and no attempt could be made either mentally or in natural way, to carry out a fraudulent deception by means of mind, and hence no mental hypothesis could fit the situation. As author I aln now addressing an intelligent and very numerous jury of thinking men and women. Perhaps you think my style of expression, or mode of illustration and likewise demonstration new and peculiar, and my language not exactly clear in definition; but I want each and every one to know, and fully understand, that I seek to solve and demonstrate as I would a problem in geometry, and so defend the spiritual hypothesis and make pass¬ able, to honest critics, and true investigators, the pons asinorum of the calumniator of this philosophy, and argue on the premise, that the true hypothesis which will and does account for the phenomena I have recorded and the philosophy I have adopted, is not a mental one, but is the spiritual one. If you bulk large in confidence, that I am wrong, and critic right in his selection of the telepathic transmission of thought hypothesis, or on the other hand the mind-reading one, then you must defend and prove it, if you can, by demonstration, that it can withstand all criticism, but more than this, you must needs also demonstrate how such hypothesis works out. This I have done with the spiritual one, by demonstrating in dififerent ways and times and places, as all must admit who heard my former lecture. I have yet to see and fully comprehend, how the mentat operating hypotheses do operate. As yet I have not had the opportunity to see,'or the privilege so far to learn the operation and wish to be shown by critic the solution. I will call the' champion of mind hypotheses and examine him. My previous criticisms in this same chapter do not affect your claim, you state, as it is not the proper operation I have indicated, nor have I guessed your plan. Well then again you may jingle your sweet-sounding symbols, or arguments, of mind hypotheses, for I’ll make a fresh attack. I ask your close attention to my arguments. The thoughts of the subjective mind of sitter 126 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND (myself) need not, voluntarily nor otherwise, move from their location in the subjective storehouse of mind, but reflect from where they are, upon the mind of medium, as face of sitter reflects perfectly on the mirror in dressing room, and this indeed seems true, as I have proved (see case 3 of hypnotic-psychic-phenomena in Chapter IX). As May and my spirit guides have told me, and as I have proved by thought attunement with them, and with others in spirit realms, and found by actual experiment oft repeated, my thought sent out by me as souls desire to ego ofl spirit of a loved one, or friend, or desired one, impinges shortly on their mind, and my desire brings back from them through a writing psychic, or other instrument, though absent from me, a message, which is an answer to my true desire. But mind you, my thoughts are recognized, that is they are seen by spirit sight, or their reflection is made manifest, or through vibrations create waves in harmony, as a certain note in tuning fork vibration begets the same in wire string of piano at other end of room; and also by a sense of prescience or spirit sense of intuition. The latter two are active with the discarnate spirit ego, while passive with the incarnate one, and therefore not patent to the incarnate ego, or at least to his objective mind, especially an ordinary one. But to admit that these senses exist in the subjective mind for discarnate life purposes, does not in any way account for what does not exist in thought or thoughts of my subjective m.ind, as sitter, in the trumpet seance, nor has it been, nor can it be shown, that spirit sight, nor intuition, nor any power of mind, has creative power to make or find, what was not there in my sub¬ jective mind; and if not there in mind of me, it could not show reflection, on the medium’s mind, nor as apparition to her, nor could the mind of either, or these two faculties of ego create sound, or voice, or language in the air, nor show the thing as physical, beyond the normal self of medium; and hence we find ourselves again at the blind end of the lane, and this hypothesis along with several others counts as naught. “Pansy,” the little Indian girl, was therefore not created from a thought of mine, as listening sitter, along with other six, nor from a reflection of such asserted thought, nor was she a creation DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 127 by the thought of medium, nor was she a reflection of a form or vision, nor a simple apparition in the medium’s mind. “Pansy” was a spirit, and what I heard was simply vibratory sound waves of harmony impinging on my drum of ear, and that of the other sitters, produced by spirit vocal organs, operated by a living intelligent entity, which then and there asserted she was “Pansy,” once an Indian girl. I had no thought in my mental storehouse, at any time in all my life, of such a personality as “Pansy;” and hence it could not be in my sub-conscious storehouse of knowl¬ edge, at the time in question. And here is an insurmountable obstacle to the adoption in this case at any rate, of the hypothesis of mind-reading, to account for the sayings of an intelligence of some kind, either by the medium, or the Indian girl, no matter which. I subsequently learned that she or some other intelligence, representing itself as “Pansy,” was a guide in the seances of the late Maggie Gaul, medium. I have pointed out elsewhere in connection with the expressed wish of May — where my decision as to the proposed gift of a certain article to a certain relative — if transmitted to the medium, was not in accord with May’s wish; and that was recognized and spoken of by her; and she adduced her reasons for a different disposition of the article, at Mrs. Wriedt’s trumpet seance, in Detroit. Again it was not my thought to her or to the medium, to withhold certain articles which I had decided to place with a certain firm for sale (for the same reason as in previous instance) but accepted and decided to act upon the expressed advice received a day or two later from her at the sitting at the materializing, seance at Jonson’s in Toledo, where she appeared in her transient body and spoke through its vocal organs. This is another insurmountable obstacle for the claimant that the mind-reading hypothesis will account for it all, or for such part of it at least. The numerous readers, constituting my jury of thinking men and women will please excuse me if I say, that if the telepathic hypothesis, or the mind-reading one, or any other mental hypothesis is adduced by an opponent of the spiritual hypothesis, as the true cause of the “Pansy” phenomena for instance, I must have evidence, for as it stands, it is but an assertion, and it seems 128 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND as such ridiculous to me, to say the least, and very intricate in theory; and I maintain cannot be substantiated, nor sustained by proof, that my own thought should be conveyed by any such plan to some other, to enable her, that other one (the medium), to practice deceit on me, for it could not be obtained, as my thought, if it were not my thought, and if it were not there, and therefore the one who uses the argument, is too presumptive, to try to use it as a weapon against the other argument,, that it is a psychic truth. There is another point which may be considered here. The facts as conveyed to me in the language of the ostensible Indian girl I could not verify, until I returned home, and then by com¬ parison with my notes after sitting, I satisfied myself of the absolutely correct statements of the alleged spirit of the Indian girl. There is another feature that will merit the best thought of those who so readily discredit the spiritual hypothesis, and quite as readily assert their belief in the telepathic transmission of thought, which has never been accepted as well established, and the other one, mind-reading, as well. That feature is, that to be consistent all the way through, there should on the part of the advocates of these hypotheses, be given us some descrip¬ tion or indication of how an invisible, inaudible, intangible thought is carried from the “transmitter” of one human person¬ ality to the “receiver” of another human personality, over long or short distances, and some reason should be assigned for the necessity of a medium using the foregoing, or some other mind hypothesis, to account for her getting it, and then adopting a different one to account for her using it, such as for the necessity of harnessing the thought in words, and creating sound for their expression when conveying them back to the original source from which they came. But for the present, and for argument’s sake solely, it is admitted that the language used is the outcome of transmitted thought; then how could that account, on the one hand for varieties of sound emanating from the so claimed intelligent entities; or on the other for psychical manifestations called etherializations and materializations? But is it realized where we land, if we adopt a mental hypothesis, viz., the mind DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 129 creates physical sounds, and can therefore create physical forms. Is it realized that the incarnate spirit acts through the sub¬ conscious or subjective mind, this being an indestructible occupant, of the ego or soul, or more correctly, an attribute of soul. Now a step further, and the incarnate spirit having a mind, and living in its soul or astral body, within the ordinary body physical, has been thus associated during infancy, childhood, youth and manhood or womanhood, till advanced age, disease or accident makes this physical habitation no longer tenable, and a natural law lets the incarnate spirit out, and into the spirit sphere, and by this transition it becomes discarnate, and there¬ after a spiritual being in contradistinction to the physical man. Does it occur to you that as discarnate, the personality is no longer encumbered with a physical body, which held it while incarnate in check; and does it not also follow that the phenomena which at best would be only clumsily and imperfectly performed with a physical environment or shell, can now, if at all, be produced with greater facility and effectiveness, by the unfettered spirit, which has perfected more or less in spiritual knowledge; and do not the evidences in favor of the latter greatly outweigh those of the former? Though believing in the probability of telepathic communication between incarnate spirits through their sub-conscious minds, still of weightier importance are the testi¬ monies of many discarnate spirits who communicate with me, through the incarnate spirit aid, as given in the latter chapters of the book. From personal tests and observations in the normal, trance and hypnotic states, I have yet to discover clear, unmistakable, and perfect reproduction of the thought of one person being received by the mind of another, by telepathy or mind-reading, to an extent to be fairly considered as practicable among scores of trials I have made, during the Tong period of my psychical, hypnotic and other investigations. I may have been much less successful in my telepathic tests, than most investigators, never¬ theless I have found as a rule, where there were any evidential results at all, they may be described as “a general impression,” “an approximation,” “an approach to the real,” or impression that 130 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND it was “a coincidence,” rather than an absolutely perfect duplica¬ tion in the “receiver” of the thought that emanated from the “transmitter.” I have for example written on a slip of paper, folded the same, handed it to a lady sitting passively, giving her the suggestion to sit for a minute or two, with her mind not concentrated on anything, until a clear thought came to her mind, and then act on that thought. I had written this note, “You will arise, walk over to me and pull my nose, as a joke.” She did it, laughing from the time she arose from her chair, until she returned to it. I then asked her to read the note in the hearing of others present. She said the thought came to her distinctly but not with every detail of words. I next handed the lady’s brother a slip on which I wrote, “You will rub the top of your head with your hand, while sitting, because you don’t know what else to do.” He sat on his chair, and laughingly started rubbing the top of his head, and remarked, “I don’t know what you want me to do.” That lady was my wife, who with the brother is now in spirit life. My office boy, a lad of sixteen years, with whom I conducted many hypnotic experiments, could while hypnotized stand at a distance from me, at the opposite side of the room, and tell me, what figure or letter of the alphabet I was then looking at. He could not do it invariably, but has consecutively sometimes, with occasional mistakes, but he did it while in hypnotic state. With my own experience, of which the foregoing are examples, and with such knowledge as I acquired from the experience of other men, I cannot avow my conviction or belief in the adequacy of the telepathic hypothesis, nor the mind-reading one, in the normal state, and when it’s found in trance condition, or hypnotic state, it’s apt to have its origin in suggestion, which may then be word, or act, or concentrated thought. I would not expect the mind to account for the production, for example of answers to mental questions in the nature of a quizzing, or a cross-examination, or otherwise I would not expect answers to mental questions, which would necessitate a thorough and exact knowledge as to each detail, nor could I transmit a DAWN OF THE AWAKENED JAIND 131 thought that would be to me a solution of a problem, or a some¬ thing outside of the latitude and longitude of the receiver’s sphere of knowledge, as I do not think such mind capable in natural way, to appropriate what was tendered. In the trumpet seances with Mrs. Wriedt I would not expect the opportunity to gather evidences of the sub-coriscious variety, for the reason that she is not entranced in her sittings. Obviously there could be no attempt made at using the telepathic hypothesis to account for the various phases of psychical phenom¬ ena of the physical kind, such as materialization of a transient body, which uses its own vocal organs to communicate with; or the externalization of psychic power, when heavy bodies are moved without visible contact with any person, power or object. I have carefully and patiently watched for evidence, which might appear to sustain one or other of the mind hypotheses, but up to the present time, have, watched in vain; and to my mind those hypotheses utterly fail to account for the phenomena described in the foregoing pages, and among other records. One may theorize, invent and plan, as to how the thought originates, and what it is, and what is mind in which it is. Perhaps it is a thing or body physical, for we are told that thoughts are things. Some one may claim that it is power, as manifest in molecular aggregation which may cause waves of motion, and then at other times a dormant state, but still if it be power, quiet or in motion, then to that extent at least, it has existence, and must be physical, and patent to spirit sight, and also capable of reflection. But under each and every circumstance, the thought or thoughts must by this hypothesis have existence in the mind of sitter, before seen, reflected, read, realized or felt. As thought or knowledge of an intelligence called “Pansy” had never habitation in my mind (the sitter), it clearly follows a mind hypothesis will not apply. In this connection I feel free to say, that there be none who can truly describe the mind or rightly designate its various powers, capabilities and functionings. The more I grope and think, reflect and meditate, the more convinced am I that mind 132 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND is as deep a mystery as all else, which pertains to the wonderful universe of each individual man, which in turn is but a molecule of spirit personality, in the larger Universe. In its functioning it would appear to be an attribute of the soul. CHAPTER XIX. T he seventh and last seance of the November, 1911, series was held during the forenoon of November 19th at the home of Mrs. Etta Wriedt, and was absolutely private, save and except for the presence of this very exceptional psychic. This seance proved to be, to me, one of the most important, if not absolutely the most relatively important, of all the seances I have ever attended in my life up to the present time; and at the same time most deeply interesting, and evidentially con¬ vincing ; leaving not even a lingering doubt in my mind, as to May having kept her promise and redeemed her bond. Taking into consideration the many evidential matters presenting, from the intercommunion between various members of the family con¬ nections of mine, and myself; and the various attitudes of individual relatives one toward another, to all intents and pur¬ poses, the private family talk, with the attitude assumed by one and another, regarding this or that circumstance, all so realistic and true to the knowledge I possessed, even to minutiae; and the apparently harmonious condition, and happy relationship experi¬ enced by each and everyone; as well as the confirmations of previous evidential matter, facts and messages; together with the presentation of new evidential matter, and the clearing away of any fragments of ignorance, and my enlightenment as to many matters, while so satisfactory and convincing to me, cannot in the very nature of things be reproduced in this publication in detail, but only alluded to in the briefest outline. One reason for not reproducing family affairs in this publication is the fact that to most people, as well as to myself, it would appear as needless exposure of confidential knowledge; and another reason, as has been mentioned elsewhere, that May, my spirit wife, whose human personality she has established to my entire satisfaction,— and as I have already said redeemed her bond, — expressed her desire that I should not use family matters when I had enough 133 134 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND other material for my book. This request I shall show my respect for, by a faithful compliance therewith in matters of detail, or where it would prove inadvisable to repeat a message from one to another, or to use language which might be construed as personal. My alleged spirit daughter, who not only materialized as a young woman of about twenty years, but also spoke with me on the special occasion at Toledo, when I learned for the first time her name, as known in spirit life, and which occasion is elsewhere recorded as being the 15th November, 1911, seance at Jonson’s, and who promised then, and at the last of the Jonson seances, to come with her mamma and myself to Detroit; and without a doubt she has fulfilled that promise; and was one of the first of the numerous intelligences, to speak to me through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt’s. She gave me messages to be delivered to her brother and her sister (half-brother and half-sister) ; also told me that their mother Martha was present at the seance with her mamma. May. The next to converse with me was Martha E. King, my first wife, who passed to spirit realms about 37 years ago now, and who, on this occasion, talked with me, about our children, and also other matters. Then May joined in the conversation With Martha and me, and both of them were agreed and harmonious; and with one accord and single purpose, advised me as to my future course. Hypatia, my ever-present guide, joined in now, before the loved ones withdrew, and her first words were, “You wrote it correctly, ‘tia’ is right.” To make clear the relation of this interjected sentence, I may say that the stenographer who made the report of the second seance at Jonson’s for me, had in the report spelled my guide’s name “Hypacia,” which I corrected with my pen by changing the fifth letter to “t,” thus making the word “Hypatia.” A few minutes before going upstairs to the seance room, and while waiting to be called, I wrote the following on a page of my memo-book, and kept it exposed to her view until I started upstairs, when I put it in my pocket. “Hypatia, the stenographer DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 135 spelt your name with last syllable ‘cia,’ while I write it ‘tia.’ Which is correct?” The first exclamation was Hypatia’s answer to my question, and was the first expression which she vocally gave in my hearing. This was followed by advice, and instruction in regard to certain business matters. A short discussion of a particular situation was had by Hypatia, May and Dr. Sharp, the psychic’s own control, and conclusion reached, that all would come out right by my maintaining the attitude I had assumed. The balance of the seance turned out to be a gathering of spirit guides, and many of them gave their instructions to me. There was also some prediction, and caution meted out to me, as well as information for me, and instruction what to do. My life was to be a new one, and still active I would be; for special work, in spirit spheres, was planning for me. From records which I now possess, I must select and gather more, and print a book. Then other books to follow this there’ll be; and other work for me to do, of which I must be close, and much would be done for me. I cannot more than outline give, as I have done above. This chapter now will conclude a series; but still more evidence I will collect, and more truth I will proclaim. CORROBORATIVE TESTIMONY. “Reports by Herbert G. Pauli, Secretary; and by Rev’d Canon William Walsh, member of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research. A deceased member, Mrs. May E. King, zvife of the President, visits a trumpet circle, in Toronto, held by Mrs. Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium, and speaks to those tzvo members. Dr. John S. King, President C. S. P. R., Dear Sir: I herewith hand you a partial report of a trumpet seance held at the house of Mr. and Mrs. W-, Toronto, on the evening of Monday, November 27, 1911. The seance was held in an attic room, with twenty-five sitters, and the medium, Mrs. Etta Wriedt. Among those present were the following members of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research, namely; Dr. John S. King, President; Rev’d Canon Wm. Walsh, Professor E. B. Shuttleworth, Mrs. Coleman, and the Secretary, Herbert G. Paul! (the writer of this report). 136 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND The circle was opened with a repetition of the Lord’s Prayer in unison, followed by singing “Nearer My God to Thee,” aug¬ mented by a powerful spirit voice through the trumpet. After a cordial introduction by the guide. Dr. Sharp, who evidently was able to give the names and idiosyncrasies of every sitter present, occasional whispering voices were heard and recognized by friends present. Presently a strong and clear voice spoke out near Canon Walsh. Voice: Canon Walsh, Canon Walsh: Yes, who is it? Voice: It is May. Canon Walsh: What is your name? Voice : May E. King. I want to thank you for the kind and beautiful words you spoke over my body as it lay in the casket. The voice purporting to be that of Mrs. King, then continued in a lengthy, and touching strain, voicing her thanks and apprecia¬ tion of Rev. Canon William Walsh’s tribute to her memory, she having been a member of the Research Society, of which Rev. Canon Walsh is also a member. Again the same voice changed location to where I was sitting, and addressed me. May E. King : And you, Mr. Pauli, I’m so pleased to see you here. Mr. Paull: I am delighted to hear you indeed. May E. King: I am pleased to be here tonight. All is beautiful and bright over here. There is no death. The writer cannot recall the exact words of what followed, but Mrs. King continued to speak cheerily of the spirit life, and spoke once at least of Dr. King as “Johnnie.” Several other individual voices continued to speak through the trumpet, and then a whispering voice said, while the trumpet was directed to Dr. King. Voice: Papa. Dr. King: Who is it for? Voice: For you, papa. Dr. King: Is it you, my darling? Mr. Paull: Tell us your name. Voice : May Donna. May Donna: Papa,_ Hypatia is here. Dr. King: Will she sing for us tonight? Mr. Paull: I do not recollect the exact reply. May Donna : Good-bye, papa. Dr. King: Good-bye, darling, speak to us again. The writer cannot set down with exactness what further was spoken, but subscribes to the above as a faithful account as he DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 137 recalls it after the seance, and the conversations and communica¬ tions between the voices purporting (and evidently being) the voices of Mrs. May E. King and her daughter, May Donna, both in spirit life. (Signed) Herbert G. Paull, Secretary C. S. P. R.” ' Dr. John S. King, President C. S. P. R., Dear Sir: I send you my report of Mrs. Etta Wriedt’s seance, held on the 27th of November, 1911, as follows” (corroborative testimony) : [The Author's Note: — Following is another individual member’s report of the same section of the trumpet seance as reported by the Secretary, Mr. Herbert G. Paull, and although the report as a whole was given much more extendedly, the quota¬ tion therefrom has a slightly different construction, though it is valuable in that there is harmony of facts in the reports of both, though neither is a stenographer.] The Canon in his report says: “I had a small writing pad and by feeling was guiding myself in writing, as it was absolutely black darkness in the room, and straining my eyes and ears; almost unconsciously I was stooping forward, trying to catch some faint sight or revealing sound, when this to me new, unexpected, and surprising episode took place. Now I was quietly startled by just a perceptible touch of the trumpet on my left eyebrow. At the instant there was sug¬ gested to my mind that it was done caressingly. From the trumpet, seemingly, m the centre of the circle, and pointing towards me, came a strong whisper repeating my name. Then I said: “Who is it?” Voice: May. Then a voice, full, cultured, and clear, and which at once recalled to me the voice of Mrs. King, said: “Canon, I want to thank you for your kindness in coming and offering up a prayer before the casket was closed that day.” “Then the trumpet seemed to move over in the direction of Dr. King and Mr. Paull, who were seated comparatively near together, and addressed them in similar tones, as they by their responses seemed to recognize. The words addressed to them I cannot recall, as I was so interested, excited, and thrilled by the recognition of Mrs. Dr. King’s familiar and kindly voice, that I could not concentrate my attention upon them and their respective conversations with her. To me it was all the more 138 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND startlingly striking in view of the fact that not long before I left the residence of Dr. John S. King (the President of our Society) accompanied by him, he wrote in his office on a slip of paper and showed it to me, as a request of his addressed to Mrs. King, using her Christian name, and when the trumpet voice spoke to me it was a direct response to, and compliance with, the written request at that moment remaining spread out on the table in the room we had just left to come to the seance, and some of the words and phrases of the trumpet voice were identical with those contained in the request. Surely the line of least resistance is to follow the exercise of our reasoning powers, and accept of the claimed fact, that the spirit of Mrs. Dr. King spoke through the trumpet consciously and intelligently, touching that very important episode — the removal from time to the spirit world, and the bearing away of the sacred body to be laid in the last resting-place. (Signed) William Walsh.” More Corroborative Evidence. Mr. and Mrs. John G. Bain, Toronto, converse with Mrs^. May E. King, while in her transient body, at a Jonson seance in Toledo. Toronto, January 27, 1912. “Dear Dr. King: About the middle of December last, we left Toronto on Sunday morning, and on Christmas night I called up Mrs. Jonson and made an appointment for the next morning, ten o’clock. On meet¬ ing Mr. Jonson, he informed me that Tuesday evenings belonged to the Sun Flower Club, but he would arrange matters so that myself and wife might attend. We were on hand at eight o’clock, December 26th, and met members of the above club, which on that night consisted of seventeen. The room where the sitting was held was a large room upstairs; the cabinet a small room leading from the large one. As strangers we were taken into the small room to inspect it. There was no outlet from this room called cabinet, except to the large room. Plenty of light was left in the room so that we could plainly see anything that might come from the cabinet. The minutes of the meeting showed that there were twenty-one materialized forms which came from the cabinet. I shook hands with two or three of them, one an Indian girl, who came out and gave us a lively dance within two feet of where I was sitting, and without the slightest sound or vibration. One came who had hair about four feet long. I also shook hands with her, and DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 139 by request of Mrs. Jonson I examined her hair, and let about two feet of it draw across my hand, when she turned to cross to the other side of the circle. Another form, that of a lady strong and most beautiful in appearance, came to the cabinet door. At first it could not be ascertained who was wanted, but at last the form spoke, saying: “I wish to speak to Mr. and Mrs. Bain.” We went to the cabinet door, and to our surprise and delight there stood Mrs. John S. King, your wife, whom we had both known well in life; and who had passed out about three months before. She told us she had been attracted there by Mrs. Bain’s singing, which she had heard before while at home in Toronto. She then gave us this message to give to you, viz.: “Tell Johnnie that you saw and talked with me. Hypatia is here; and my Baby also.” She was a woman a little above the average size, and she dematerialized at our feet, which seemed quite as interesting and wonderful, as did her appearing. After a few more had appeared, a gentleman came to the door. He seemed somewhat weak, and it was perhaps nearly a minute before Mrs. Jonson could get any information from him that would identify him. At last he said, “I wish to speak to John.” Mrs. Jonson turned round and said, “Who is John?” I said that perhaps it was me. I went to the door of the cabinet, and to my surprise, there stood my brother, who had passed out about four years ago. He seemed rather weak and became partly dematerial¬ ized two or three times; and after a few words of welcome he said, “I wish to speak to Katie.” (No one in the room knew my wife’s name.) I called her and he spoke to her. I never saw him more plainly in my life; and his voice was if possible more convincing than his features. The last few years of his life he wore a beard; but while in the hospital this was shaven off. He came with this beard on, and the last suit of clothes that he had worn before his illness. Itc He >l< >l< :ti * I have given a true account of features of this seance at Mr. Jonson’s, in my simple way as-it occurred. Yours very truly, (Signed) John G. B.ain, (for self and wife).” CHAPTER XX. T his chapter is devoted to the various trumpet and materializing seances, ending with the November series of 1911, where communication was had with the per¬ sonality alleged to be my wife; and in that connection I present my argument upon the evidences which brought me to my final and firm conviction, that I have attained to a positive knowledge, of the truth of spirit return and communion. The form that presented for me, was certainly neither a probable nor possible fraudulent creation to deceive. I would say to each reader, ask yourself the question, how do I identify and know my loved ones, friends and acquaintances, of the present time, when I meet them anywhere? Would not your mental answer be a quick response, “By seeing, hearing and conversing with them, as we all do constantly in our daily lives, when we meet?” If you have lost your sight, you utilize your sense of hearing, and thus judge and recognize them by the sound of their voice, tone of speech, manner of expression; and by the nature of the conversation which evolves the evidential knowl¬ edge. The reader can best test these matters in his own home, or among his friends or relatives; for there are no two human beings exactly alike, not even so-called twins. No two voices sound precisely the same, though in the same key, for nature loves variety and produces some peculiarity, which differentiates the one from all the others. There is in the make-up of every individual a combination of variations which we term human personality, which is the distinguishing feature of each, and of every individual. Unless a man is bereft of reason, he can identify a relative or friend, or anyone whom he previously knew, by the aid of one or other of his senses, and usually by two of them, such as sight and observation, by hearing the voice, and the conversation, noting its intonation, and mode of inflection; and by knowing his 140 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 141 previous habits, and any peculiarity; or from a knowledge of his personal history, or by enquiry, in brief, though changing phys¬ ically as the years roll by, he never loses his personal identity, and his personality, either here or hereafter, and constantly by the securing of evidence from personal, family, business or other topics of conversation. The same faculties, and similar procedure as in the case of mortals, will enable you to identify the forms, voices and individualities which present themselves to you for your recognition, when conditions favorable for occult demonstra¬ tions exist. Personally I can neither claim to be easily deceived, nor can I be charged with ignorance regarding psychic matters, for I have devoted many years to investigating hypnotic and psychic phenomena; and have discovered much hypnotized condi¬ tion, and self-deception, as well as fraudulent design and practice. Furthermore, as will be seen in Chapter XII of this book, the one who has been “my other self,” my true love, my life partner, my pal, my constant companion for more than twenty-five years, had agreed with me, and I with her in life, how each should prove to the other his-or her human personality, no matter which should first pass out of the body, and be permitted to return from spirit realms, to greet the other in earth realm; and I am able to present instances of fulfillment of the bond. To prove it was none other than my own “May,” who now presented, frequently in the series of occult seances, she wore that smile upon the face which signi¬ fied the externalized joy she felt at her ability to redeem in full the bond; and the impress appeared to me as distinct in detail, as the pictured face in looking-glass or on photographic plate. To me she came as tangible, as true to life, as ever she had been; her slap of hand upon my shoulder, the arm about my neck, the cheek to mine, were all in view to those who viewed with me, and they too thought it grand and true, and due to her joyful thought, that she could come back to me. “And did she speak with you?” you ask, “and did the voice sound natural ?” She spoke, conversed, appeared and natural was in all respects. Her voice was quite as natural as it sounded, when she spoke formerly to me in the home, or through the 142 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND telephone; and you have had the experience of hearing the voice of your acquaintance, friend or relative, who conversed over the ’phone with you the other day. My “doubting Thomas” friends continue to ask me in all earnestness, “Could you be quite sure that it was she?” Quite as sure as you could be, either) in your home, or in your own ’phone conversation with a loved one. “Do you not think the gathering where these manifestations occurred was the outcome of evil influence or evil spirits?” No! To me it was corroborated in a very marked degree, by the scriptural evidence — a physical seance, held in a closed room, where were gathered Christ’s own disciples, at which their late Lord and Master, in materialized form, showed Himself to them, and proved His personality to them, in order to convince them, exhibiting to a doubting disciple the wounds in His side. One the other does confirm, whatsoe’er it be, for there is exact similarity. And still you ask, “Why do you need a medium?” To this my answer is, for the same reason that you need a central office, as well as your home ’phone. May, who at another place, through the aid of another medium, at a previous time (at Mrs. Wriedt’s, the trumpet medium, 12th, 13th November, 1911, see Chapters XHI and XIV), had promised me to be at Jonson’s seances, to do the very thing which she has done, and which I have recorded (see Chapters XV, XVI and XVH) ; and the reader is now considering; and who, acting on the suggestion I had given her at a previous seance (see Chapter XV), that she was not as large as in life, came to me since then in her fully formed natural development, true to life in form, features, voice, mannerisms, action and tangibility; with power, zeal, and other characteristics, and normal expression, and step¬ ping out and up to see me, with the agreed upon name greeting of “Johnnie” patted me on the cheek and head with her hand, put her cheek to mine, slapped me several times on my left shoulder; and continuing said, “Yes, my dear, dear Johnnie” (which was to be her proof test name for me after she passed out), “I am May. I am your ‘Babe’” — what I had agreed to DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 143 call her, as a test of my human personality, if I passed to spirit realms and returned, and “Johnnie” was to be her proof test name, after she had passed out and had come back to me. So that in either case, no matter which passed out first, my name was to be “Johnnie,” and so designated by her, as a test, if she could return; and hers was to be “Babe” if I could return. So here came the proof urging itself on me, viz.: “Oh ! my dear ‘Johnnie,’ I do miss you so much, but I am able to be near you, and each time I materialize I can be stronger; and I enjoy materializing so you can see me, and the oftener I do so, the easier it will be for me to do it.” She said also, “ It is easier for me to speak to you through the trumpet, than this way, and I can speak louder too,” which I found to be correct. Her style of speaking, language used, mode of expression, features, size, build, her very compound self, with her every mannerism most assuredly estab¬ lished in my mind, her individuality and personality at each of the seances, but particularly so at the last of the November seances held with Jonson. Aside altogether from the foregoing, there is in addition absolutely strong and irrefutable evidence, relating to family matters, personal possessions left behind her, and her directions as to their disposal; and family and personal business affairs, in which her directions, in several instances, were in direct conflict with the decision I had reached in my mind, thus entirely destroy¬ ing the hypothesis of thought transference or telepathy in her case; and her expressed desire to have her gold watch, jewelry, diamonds and other valuables retained in the safety deposit vault of a bank, that no person other than the bank official and myself knew; and said official did not see or know a single one of the several articles; and there to remain until she would give me at some future time instructions as to her desires regarding their disposal; and in this respect proving that there was not, nor could there be, any mental telepathy from others to the medium, while if telepathic communication from me to the medium, whether Mrs. Wriedt, trumpet medium of Detroit, or J. B. Jonson, materializing medium of Toledo, Ohio; it must certainly, to be 144 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND genuine, be my mental thought or decision, and not the very contrary. So that the only hypothesis that has any sho\v of probability, or even possibility, outside of the spiritualistic hypo¬ thesis, viz.: mental telepathy or thought transference, has already been shown to be in other chapters as well as now an absurdity as well as untenable, insufficient and useless, as an hypothesis to account for the production. I may here add that much of the communications relative to family connections, domestic affairs, personal possessions, and business matters, for obvious reasons cannot be given publicity; and hence some of the very best evidences, to myself personally, cannot be utilized in the record herein contained, which is intended for publicity. In earth life. May E. King used certain pertinent, and as I thought sensible expressions; on occasions when they might benefit those who heard them, though not intended for that pur¬ pose. Her many friends will recognize them when they read them. “I don’t believe in telling family or business affairs to anybody.” “I never gossip about others.” “I have enough to do minding my own business,” etc. While she spoke with me alone through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt’s, and gave advice about certain possessions, and the views which she had been able to hear of certain interested parties, she said in her characteristic language, “I don’t want you to make public family or business matters.” This is certainly characteristic of the personality, if it be not of the character that will admit it as circumstantial evidence in favor of the personality. Again at the Jonson seance, where others were present with myself, she, in materialized form, not only confirmed her predic¬ tion at Detroit, that she would materialize at Jonson’s seance, and speak with me there, but she likewise confirmed, and con¬ tinued that conversation, and most guardedly avoided naming the Bank, which she had done when I was with heii alone, on the first occasion; and also studiously avoided naming any of the articles to be destributed, or the persons who were considered in that connection; or the name of any business firm which had on the previous occasion been mentioned. Nor did she allude to DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 145 my removal of her jewels from the home to the bank on Friday, 10th November, 1911, as I left for Detroit next morning. (Saturday morning, 11th November.) In addition to the fore¬ going, the same intelligence spoke; and the records contain addi¬ tional evidence, establishing the human personality of May E. King. (See No. 11 materialization, in Chapter XVI, at Jonson seance on 15th November, 1911.) I submit that the evidence is presented, which proves the intel¬ ligence to be exceedingly cautious, a characteristic of the alleged personality. The evidence also proves that the intelligence talking through the trumpet on the 12th November, and the one talking in materialized form on the 15th November, another time and place were one and the same intelligence, and personality. The evidence also proves that as the intelligence disapproved of' some things that I had decided to do, it could not be accounted for by telepathic communication; and could not possibly be accounted for by a coincidence; nor by fraud; nor as a matter of fact, by any other known hypothesis; it must therefore of necessity be, as it represented itself to be, the stated personality., Then there is the circumstantial evidence of both Hypatia and Dr. Sharp, promising me at Mrs. Wriedt’s that they also would visit the Wednesday night seance at Jonson’s; and both keeping that promise; and not only keeping it, but materialization of their bodies was promised; and this promise was also kept. Not only does their appearance at Jonson’s in materialized form establish the fulfillment of their prediction, that they would; but becomes corroborative evidence, that the materialization of both wife and daughter took place as predicted at Detroit; and established as a fact or truth by the introduction by Hypatia of wife and daughter, which is evidence of each of these personalities, that the prediction made at Detroit, by May was, as well as the promises by Hypatia and Dr. Sharp, fulfilled at Jonson’s in Toledo, in the sight and hearing of all the members of the Sun¬ flower class, present at the seance on 15th November, 1911. (See Chapter XVI.) I am quite certain, in fact quite as certain as I am of anything 146 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND I presume to know, such as my friends, relatives, acquaintances, occupation and responsibilities, that the best professional delineator or actor the world could produce would ignominiously fail to present himself or herself, or produce anyone to! so present, for example at a Joason seance, as a perfect duplicate form| of my life partner, and constant daily associate for the last quarter of a century; and with similar natural development, form, feature, voice and mannerisms, together with similar action, tangibility, power, zeal and other normal indications, and thought expressions, so as to deceive me, regarding each and all of the foregoing characteristics. And again, even in one of Mrs. Wriedt’s trumpet seances conducted in the dark, for voice communication, how could it be possible for the medium, or an accomplice, to conduct a conversation, or reply to my numerous interrogations, or make request of me not to dispose of each of several of her personal effects as I had designed in my mind to do; and give her reasons therefor, regarding their disposal; make use on the one hand of the personal name, and in these cases likewise give her reasons. And further, two days later in another State in a Jonson seance with the materialized body (and to be consistent it would have to be the same personality, even if an accomplice) comes, as I will show, into the view and hearing of all the sitters; and the conversation began in Detroit is continued in Toledo, and not only that but it confirms what was said and done at the former place, as witness the quotation from the stenographer’s report, which was sworn to: “Do just as I said about my things.” “It is not necessary to repeat that. About my jewels, I want them left where they are, in the safety deposit vault in the bank. I don’t want them given away for a very long time. Then I will instruct you about what I want done with them. My single diamohd, I want you as soon as you go home, to have it set as a scarf pin. Be careful and watch where you take it, do you understand ? And when you wear it, it will make it easier for me to come near to you.” I ask the reader to note the facts; that I placed watch, diamonds and jewelry above referred to in the bank on Friday noon, left DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 147 my home on Saturday morning, and had my first communication from my wife on Sunday through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt’s, slightly more than forty-eight hours after the deposit had been made. In speaking to me at the very first of the November, 1911, series, in Mrs. Wriedt’s seance room May or “Babe” employed the test name “Johnnie,” it being the first opportunity she had for so doing; and alluded to my having placed her things in the safety deposit vault at the bank. I immediately asked her what bank, and she replied giving the name. I have already twice mentioned our agreement in the summer of 1911; but I wish to impress its importance on the mind of the reader, and to enable each tO' recognize the early constant efforts made by May, for not only proving by test names her personality, but by tests of her own design, to prove her personality in many ways, some of these have already been presented, and she has assured me she, if debarred at one door, will try another; and if one plan fails will devise another. It had been mutually agreed between us in the summer of 1911, that after separation by death of the body, if should be we continued to be alive and were permitted to return, if I passed out of body first and returned, I was to partially prove my personality by speaking her test name, “Babe,” and partially by private or personal matters unknown by those outside of our¬ selves. If she passed out of body first and returned, she was to partially prove her personality by speaking my test name “Johnnie,” and partially by private or personal matters unknown by those outside of ourselves. These names were not known as ours by other persons. As she passed from her physical body on Septem¬ ber 29, 1911, it was the forty-fourth day thereafter, that she began to prove her personality, as outlined in the chapter dealing with the first s&nce on November 12, 1911. I now quote further from the sworn statement of record as follows: *‘You were not with me when I passed out (a fact), but I couldn’t have spoken to you if you had been there, but now, dear ‘Johnnie,’ we will make up for lost time.” 148 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND In order to rightly and understandingly appreciate my con¬ clusions, the reader has only to assume a similar relative position to mine. If you are a man do you really mean to say it is possible to deceive you in either night or day, by the presentation of a woman form to represent your wife, with whom you’ve lived most happily for many years of life, and whose habits and conversa¬ tions, acts and mannerisms, as well as knowledge of personal affairs, induce you to accept the presentation as your wife, if it were some other woman? And I ask you further, either man or wife, if you really did believe and accepted it as a fact, how long would your acceptance last? Now I will also ask you, if you are not aware that variety in all creation is so vei'y great, that man cannot find two apples in an orchard, or two blades of grass, two human beings, not even twins, nor two units of any natural thing which are in each and all respects a perfect duplicate, the one of the other. I feel justified in saying that, having during many years made scores of individual private investigations, conducted with patience, perseverance and care, results have in a large number of them proved unprofitable and disappointing; and therefore the assump¬ tion by any person that I could be so imposed upon, by either a medium or their accompfice, or in any other manner, with the experience I have gained, would awaken my sympathy for them in their self-delusion. I submit the foregoing group of associated evidence, which I claim no single hypothesis or combination of hypotheses will account for, other than the spiritual hypothesis, which, even if unsupported by any other evidence, clearly establishes the truths contended for. I will ask the man without prejudice, and with an open mind to consider the possibility of a fraudulent interjection upon the scene, at each of the three materialization seances at Jonson’s, of some one, and the same one human being on each occasion, claiming to be my spirit wife; where the said form would be visible not only to me, but to all present; and whose conversation DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 149 would have to be consistently maintained throughout the three occasions at Jonson’s, as well as on the first two occasions before I went to Jonson’s, together with two which were subsequent thereto, or total of four trumpet ones at Mrs. Wriedt’s and a grand total of seven. Three of the four sittings had were with her alone, and door was locked, and voice was strong, and more clear than that at Jonson’s, and easier too with trumpet there, than with the mouth at Jonson’s, so the form claimed. The reader will further realize that these various talks on subjects personal or private, or in the home, as held throughout the November series of seven seances, first two in Detroit, then three in Toledo, and lastly and again two in Detroit, must all absolutely harmonize with the verities discussed, or realized, or which were known to have existence; and close connection with family, general and business matters. I ask you now, could I be deceived into believ¬ ing, or could any one, by any system of fraud, however cleverly devised or invented, succeed by both trumpet, and form presenting — in either or in both cases to the area of my mental conception, so as to be cognized by my physical senses, and accepted by con¬ viction as being my wife; which likewise was confirmed by others, as note the stenographic report sworn to as correct, and supplied to me, if it were not her? And here note further that the said form encompassed a detail of knowledge, sufficient to converse intelligently upon personal, private, family and business affairs, and at the same time if fraudulent appeared in the duplicate physical form of the genuine, for the presumably express purpose of deceiving me, and with me all the others at the seance. More¬ over, is any reader of the foregoing, or could there be any one in their normal senses anywhere, ready to admit the probability, much less the possibility of my being hoaxed into accepting the fraudulent substitute for the genuine? Such presumption cannot stand. Is it not self-evident that there could never be a fraudulent substitute, that would be the exact duplicate of the genuine physical form and personality; and equally self-evident, that no attempted fraudulent effort could have been made, that would harmonize fraudulent and genuine, in natural voice, facial expres- 150 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND sion, manner of speech, language used, and personal character¬ istics, to say nothing of the intimate personal knowledge possessed of family events, personal possessions, casual knowledge, local in character, or acquired information. Where would land, or what would be the fate of a fraudulent person seeking to duplicate the genuine, under my quizzing cross-examination, and difference of view or opinion, as held by the genuine and myself before; and between another and myself since the genuine passed to spirit life? Ever and always, remembering that events on this occasion, as well as on the first, the fulfillment at Detroit of a promise or agreement made in earth life, by the genuine and myself; and secondly the consummation of predictions made to me in Detroit, by my alleged life partner, or a fraudulent existence, that she or it would materialize and talk with me at Toledo, a continua¬ tion there, of what was talked of in Detroit. No other plan or way, it seems to me, would serve as well, to intercept a fraud presenting. The detailed instructions or requests for me not to do, what I proposed to do, with certain things among my wife’s possessions, of which no person, other than myself and she, had any knowledge, together with instructions as to what she (this form, my wife “May,” or “Babe”), desired me to do instead, with the self-same articles; disposes not alone of the question of fraud in this instance at least; but likewise, most effectually, disposes of the mind-reading, or thought-transference and every other faulty mind hypothesis; and they need not, therefore, be further entertained for even brief consideration. Throughout these chapters, the careful investigator will find from beginning to the end, a cobweb connection of circumstantial, corroborative and direct evidential matter, in support of the claim that the human personality has been established, as that of the individualized materialization, claiming to be my spirit wife May. So conclusively convincing is the evidence to me, that I am sure, that the intelligence which formed up in my presence, on the three occasions at Jonson’s, talked and walked with me, as she had done for nearly quarter of a century in life, asked me to do certain things when I returned home and bid me “Good- DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 151 bye,” then slowly dissolved or melted away as snow, passing down into the floor, as I leaned over towards her, my face and my eyes meeting hers as the smile and all else melted into thin vapor, disappearing at my very feet, was none other intelligence or personality save what it professed to be, viz.: my spirit wife, with manifest and tangible body. May E. King. What she and I had earnestly, sincerely, and I might say almost sacredly agreed in life to do, if our existence continued in spirit realms, and it were possible for either of us, and we were permitted to carry out our agreement, that either one would contribute their best efforts in offering the proofs of the truth as we found it. Unless the minds of readers are firmly set as biased, so that they will not accept any evidence to be adduced to prove a truth, but stubbornly object to acknowledge it, then such must stand convicted as unreasonable. I therefore maintain that the case as herewith submitted, along with the evidence, is sustained. Permit me, honest critic with unbiased mind, now to ask you, was all the foregoing as described, and further much more of it, in great variety to come, simply a coincidence, or a strange yet singular combination of hypotheses to work together as a com¬ plicated plan; and if not, then what was it, if it be not spirit life made manifest to man? If answer you cannot give to me, and have an awakened mind, I will appeal to reason, and I answer for you. My physical senses, my mental impressions, my soul recognition manifesting in my spiritual sense of intuition, which long has slumbered, but now awakens to find resulting proof, from tests mutually agreed upon, while yet she lived with me on earth; and which are further endorsed or supported by numerous evidences throughout the book, together now confirm the truth, that our spirit life or carnate spirit continues on after the shell or body dies, and can and does, when it becomes dis- carnate, communicate with mortals. I frankly state that I no longer doubt, nor hold a mental reservation; but claim that May and I have together solved the problem, upon which I have spent the riper years of my life; and she as a co-investigator spent several later years (four); 152 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND and concluded with carefully studied plans, and strong desire, and with determined truthful operative demonstration, are satis¬ fied that we are by the aid of mediums and spirit guides and helpers, able to conjointly present in the chapters and records of this book facts, circumstances, and evidences, which can be substantiated in most cases on oath by responsible and reputable witnesses and auditors of such evidence. We believe that the evidences presented can withstand the storms of any or all adverse criticism — no matter where nor what the point of origin; nor the measure of the force or influence employed; and this and similar evidence, which accumulates as the work of compilation goes on, does and will establish the existence of (1) The continuity of life; (2) Spirit return, and (3) Spirit communion with mortals of earth. CHAPTER XXI I HAVE already afforded the reader the opportunity of con¬ sidering two distinct phases of psychic mediumship, viz.: That for the trumpet-voices; and that for the physical production of materialized but transient physical bodies, I will now introduce a third distinct phase commonly designated auto¬ matic writing — but as an exceptional case of that phase, differing from all others of the phase I have met, in that it is complicated with other features of a psychic character. The intelligences who have written through her hand have utilized one or the other, or both of the other two phases, to prove themselves to be the identical personalities they alleged themselves to be. Miss Maud Venice Gates, “The Human-Psychic-Telephone,” is a native of New York State, and was educated, trained and graduated as a nurse; and has also been teacher, manager, genealogist and writer. She is mentally bright and intelligent; statuesque, robust in build, and a maiden lady. The photo for the plate, the last one possessed, was taken a few years ago, when as a graduate nurse she registered at Albany, New York State. Her object in view earlier in life was to become a physician, but family changes and illness prevented its attainment. In answer to my question “How did you find out about your automatic writing gift, and when?” she replied: “In 1892, while experimenting with a ouija board (a kind of planchette), I soon learned that I could not only write with the board, but could write if I placed a pencil in my fingers and sat passively. I asked my hand questions when I wished to know things about the future, and about other things, with as much interest as girls ordinarily have in telling their fortunes by cards. The capacity to write automatically has remained with me ever since, but not as per¬ fected as it now is,” “The automatic speaking is in obedience to my will or voluntary commands. This only came to me in 1905, when I was playing 153 154 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND different records on a graphophone. My vocal organs talked an eloquent speech, that I had never heard. Without to me apparent cause this speech stopped in the middle of a sentence, and refused to continue in response to my mentally expressed wish.” “In August, 1892, I became ill, abandoned a case I was nursing and went home. I had what I believed to be a slight delusion, which I naturally ascribed to the effects of mercurial poison I had inhaled, while I had sublimated it in course of duty. Soon voices began talking to me and told me I was to be a medium. To this in any form I was strongly opposed. However, on August 21, 1892, a constant ring of rhyme began to go through my head; and different intelligences talked to me on one subject or another.” The melody of rhyming sentences in what the psychic writes is not more strange and exceptional, than are the spoken exclama¬ tions of trance mediums speaking to their audiences. The language used in either case, is not the exact language of the intelligence in every case that communicates, or if so be, it is moulded by the instrument through which it comes, no matter from what source the thought emanates; the thought itself is really conveyed. Rhyming in this case is an unconventional mode of expression, some of which may sound as frivolous, or meaning¬ less play with words, but nevertheless conveys, both hidden and plain, certain thoughts and absolute facts, quite unknown to the psychic writer’s objective mind, which had existence in some instances before she was born; and in sources which she never could have reached, and which thoughts could not to her be con¬ veyed in any ordinary way. This woman, who had studied for three years and graduated as a nurse, and had studied to become a physician, for at least a full year, had some knowledge of the human anatomy, for she said to me, “At one time my conscious self seemed to be crowded down into my medulla oblongata region ; and the involun¬ tary talking power seemed to occupy my whole upper brain region. Music seemed to ring through my bones and muscles, as well as my head. This independent passive portion of my ego, seemed to go through many experiences too numerous to DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 155 mention now. This strange power was attached to me. I could not escape it, and therefore must abide by its possession. To be, as you have asked me to be, perfectly candid, I viewed it about as you would view a useful, perfect third arm. I resolved to never wed, lest a husband would be my guardian, according to our laws; and in the case as I have mentioned to you, in every detail, he might consider, and succeed in proving me insane, and place me in an asylum. So I decided to treat this gift as a third arm, and keep it out of sight.” She has been looked upon as being an unsolved mental curiosity. As a psychic instrument, I have secured through her most wonderful results. She has given me her full consent to give my definition, of the name and functions of the instrument, which I now do this month of April, 1912. Miss Maud Venice Gates, of New York State, defined to be "The Human-Psychic-Telephone,” with automatic action, includ¬ ing movement, writing and speech; whose conscious and sub¬ conscious min^is, act independent of each other, without clashing or confusion; and with both carnate and discarnate psychic force and action. (Though this definition was made subsequent to many of my records, I did anticipate, and placed it here.) The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences, are shaped by the psychic instrument, but not the normal self, more like the mouldboard of the plow that shapes each furrow, no matter who the plowman be. As even-ness of furrows is harmonious to the eye, so rhythm by the instrument makes words sound euphonious to the ear. Through this peculiar automatic instrument there come expressions colored, shaded, tinted or modified by her own personality, but mysterious as a whole, on account of its harmony of sound, and its rhyming character when read aloud; likewise directly confirmatory, or circumstantial and evidential in character; and is certainly a problem worthy of the consideration of the most experienced psychologist. My experience with, and study of her extended, at long and short intervals, over a period of some seven or eight years. I give more or less disconnectedly a series of my own jottings 156 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of the operations of her mind, together with her replies to a portion of my interrogations herewith. She apparently is an open- minded person, not wedded to anything, and realizes she is dif¬ ferent, mentally and psychically, from all others she has met; admits she has never been anything but an involuntary psychic student, and has not deeply studied any but her own case. It is as easy she says for her to write letters as it is to talk, and she can do both at one and the same time, which is evident to me. Her consciousness remained with her through all of the peculiar, and often disagreeable and alarming processes of her develop¬ ment, or attunement of the conditions necessary to the power to be a sort of telephone instrument, as she alleges, between the living and their departed friends. But as her entire story would be too long to include here, I give it in brief, as gathered more or less consecutively, and combine it with my own observations. As she remembered, its early beginning was a strange sensation to her, when she found that if she let herself settle into a certain passive state, her lips would talk themselves, her hands would move, accompanying the words; and many other easily noticeable peculiarities would present; and to her own apprehension curious and interesting things happened to her. She experimented and learned that her body and speech would act independently of her volition. All she had to do was to request it to perform, and it would speak, or gesture, or sing, or dance for her own enter¬ tainment, for hours if she desired it to do so; and she would not feel tired as a consequence. Instead of being tired she was more likely to feel rested or revitalized, when she was ready to command it to stop. She claims that her father in spirit does not stay with her, but comes to her soon after she begins to write, with the idea that she wishes for his presence, and dictation. The automatic speaking came as an added form of the automatic action. She told me she never liked the name medium, as in her mind it was associated with control or dictation, which was not exactly true in her case. She had been called an “automatic message bearer,” but even that might indicate that the power to do was not under MISS MAUD VENICE GATES, “The Human-Psychic-Telephone.” DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 157 her own volition, which would be untrue. She thought that perhaps the name I gave her, “Human-Psychic-Telephone,” with automatic action would be the best, and after due consideration accepted it, as a comprehensive designation. She really never gave it a serious thought before, but will henceforth acknowledge it, as her exclusive right; and she will hereafter, therefore, be better known, and designated. She alleges she can hear clair- audiently, as if the message is written on a fine thread, and so comes down through her brain. This power is interchangeable with the automatic writing, but she never has them both at the same time. If she is writing, or is in a hurry, she will sometimes hear the rest or balance of the message. If she hears the message her hand does not write it, and if she then wishes it on the paper she must write it voluntarily. If she is making an automatic speech, and is disturbed, so that she herself talks about ordinary subjects, the speech waits, where she left it, like water in a tube; and she can hitch on her power, to let it rule her speech; and it will continue from where it left off, without any break or evident annoyance. The speeches she so makes, are far above her normal power of composition or expression ; and as a rule have a tendency to rhyme. Sometimes her hand writes poems, and she can talk while the hand is doing the writing, and not interfere in the slightest with its action. It will continue, easily, steadily, like a graphophone playing a tune, after it is set in motion, and will so continue to do until it is through. The first conscious knowl¬ edge she has, of what it has written, is when it stops and she reads it through. She has good health and to exert this power does not tire her. She alleges that she sometimes has the power to heal in this same automatic fashion. She can talk in several, to her unknown, languages. She tells me that these tongues seem to be ancient, and not modern languages. She cannot understand what she says unless she automatically translates it, which she appears to have the power to do. This she says in her own words, “These languages are not meaningless jargon, for I have experimented, and found that this power would, at my suggestion, converse 158 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND through my powers of speech, with intelligences speaking peculiar languages, either through entranced mediums, or through trumpets in seances.” All her different phases are to her now so habitual, that to have them seems to her to be normal, and she would be as astonished if she should attempt to talk automatically, and no talk came, as she might be if she attempted to move her arm and found it refused to act. She writes, she claims, for her father every morning and evening. She asserts with very candidly expressed words and sentiments that “the proceeding takes the place of former, or is now, our modernized family worship.” Regarding the question of conditions as applicable to her phenomena, she explained that she habitually and easily, as one would move their hands, con¬ centrates her conscious attention to about the condition of a slight reverie; but is at the time perfectly conscious, and can stop writing, or begin at any time; and if she stops in the middle of a message, when she returns to it (the message), it will con¬ tinue perfectly from where she left off before. All the automatic messages are written in her own handwriting, and do not appear to be impressed on her consciousness, until she reads them. If she hears any part of the message clair-audiently, her hand does not write it; and she must then write what she heard voluntarily. Her mind in the proper condition for the automatic writing is sufficiently preoccupied, so that when alone she spells the words written voluntarily aloud, so as to attract her conscious approval. She frequently writes whole pages purely automatically, receiving no mental impression, except from reading the words after they are written. The messages come in a continuous way without capitalization, and it is necessary for her to add those and also “notice when the individuals change.” I think I have already mentioned, that the messages, as a rule, are either spoken or written rhyme. I may add that though they rhyme, those I have seen are rarely, if at all, in regular meter, as .is usual in standard poetry. The rhyming sentences however sound euphonious. One point mentioned by her, that I find I have missed recording is, that when she was alone, she used to DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 159 experiment in many ways, and among other things learned that she could stand passively and her “feet would walk themselves.” While writing sometimes, the messages run into each other, and two come at once, one semi-clairaudiently, using part of the sentence, or rather the sentence being written by her hand as a part of the thought they are expressing. Sometimes they double on a phrase. So then she normally copies them to make them clear. Suffice it to say that most of the automatic written messages to me were written by the hand of Miss Gates while holding my own fountain pen — designated by Stead and some others of the writers as my psychic pen — and on pages of blank books, which I invariably took there for the purpose, and brought back with me when the writing was completed each time. Such writings as I selected for publication were reproduced for printer’s copy in the exact wording as received by me. To have eliminated the rhythm by substitution of words of mine — as has been suggested by a distinguished earth friend, as well as by a valued spirit teacher and aider — would surely have been, in my judgment, a tampering with the evidence. Hypatia, who has vouched for the genuineness of each writer who made use of my pen in the automatic writing seances, endorses my decision in this matter. The Author’s Conclusions, Concerning this Psychic Instrument. I would ask the reader before proceeding further, to dispossess himself of the error of supposing that the written message as it comes to view, is a facsimile of what the intelligence discarnate used to write, while incarnate as a mortal, for such is not the case; but takes the form which the instrument’s normal hand writes, so the intelligence uses what is already there, and suited to its purposes. The reader will then probably enquire in thought, “How then can I be assured that the thought which suggests the words so penned in a kind of medley, and of rhyming character, has not its origin in the mind of the instrument?” As a general rule, it is not even difficult to find corroborative, or even direct evidence in some cases, which not only disproves it, but which 160 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND easily establishes the view that the psychic could not have in her own mind the capacity and knowledge which through her is imparted to the writing hand, while her own objective mind is otherwise engaged in conversing with others who are present. Again messages are written by her hand, bearing the signatures of former mortals, from whom she had never heard, with facts, dates, names and relationships, regarding which she could not by any possibility have the slightest knowledge, -until after her own incarnate spirit secured it from the subjective mind of a mortal, or from a discarnate spirit, which already possessed it. The psychic was from the first, as she has intimated, an unwilling instrument, and was made to suffer mental punishment by her controls, who still compel her to transrnit spirit messages in a rhyming manner, which constitutes a veto to absolute or total independence of the subjective mind, and at the same time relieves the objective portion of the mind, and thereby protects the reasoning faculty. This faculty of writing in this peculiar way is not more wonderful than is that of her automatic speaking capacity, without apparent control of her objective mind; for many short messages or essays are promulgated by her vocal organs, in different languages, as noted by people of various nationalities, though she in normal state cannot speak in more than one language. In either case no matter how the thought may be expressed it is conveyed in a way to establish its identity. At first most spirits cannot write at all through her hand, except by aid of guides, but with added experience can do so, and write freely through any automatic hand; and also independently on slates, or with leaden pencil nib on paper. This I found true to such an extent, that the very first written message from my wife, and from Wm. T. Stead, certainly caused serious doubt in my own mind; and in that of others, but after continued experience these two writers’ reference thereto became amusing. An erudite critic, and former London friend of Stead, sought to cast ridicule upon it as being done by Stead — so too in the case of a certain medium of renown who claimed that “Stead would only come through my mediumship.” — While Stead informs me he will DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 161 come through any open door (and Julia confirms it)— and has come through at least fourteen different doors or mediums, to me thus far. Ask Stead himself when you have opportunity, and he will confirm what I have written here as true. The rhyming style of the written communications is not invari¬ ably employed, and I give one notable example in the later pages of these records, where an intelligence alleged itself to be the spirit of the late Clegg Wright, a former medium of wide repute who wrote to me through this psychic, in his natural way describ¬ ing the difference between trance state and when the spirit is in transition; and was followed by his guide, who gave me the reason, and explained how it was accomplished. (See Chapter XXXIV.) I will here offer some evidence which sustains the psychic’s credibility. Three distinct intelligences spoke to me through the trumpet at Mrs. Wriedt’s home in Detroit, Mich. (See Chapter XIV), and told me that they would materialize for me at Jonson’s home in Toledo, Ohio; and talk with me there, and did so. (See Chapter XVI.) After I reached the home of Miss Gates at Lily Dale, New York, some weeks later, these same three intelligences, viz.: my wife May, my guide Hypatia, Dr. Sharp, the guide of Mrs. Wriedt, also wrote through the hand of this psychic, as they have done very many times alone, and in company with others. Such evidence cannot be set aside by the critic, and must certainly be accounted for in some rational way. Again an intel¬ ligence spoke audibly through a trumpet with me, in New York State, one day; and then later wrote through the automatic writer, the “Human-Psychic-Telephone,” also in New York State, but at another place, that “I kept my promise to you by speaking through the trumpet this morning, and also gave you my name, did I not?” Another and somewhat similar proof was where an intelligence communicating through the writing psychic promised to meet me at the home of a trance medium, with whom I never sat before; and while there proved its identity, also by giving its name in full, through the vocal organs of that medium. 162 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND These examples fro'ni among many I submit, are to myself most convincing proofs that the writing psychic is not personating, and not guilty of fraud, for some of the mediums through whom I made these tests were hundreds of miles apart from her. The evidence above quoted is largely circumstantial and cor¬ roborative, and yet establishes the genuineness of the automatic psychic; but there is yet to consider the strongest and most con¬ vincing kind of evidence to be found, viz.: direct evidence which is voluntarily presented in many of the communications; while by cross-examination as question and answer direct, the intelli¬ gence establishes its identity, and often proves its human person¬ ality. I would here ask each scholastic reader, or even the off-hand and self-wise critic — who scorns to consider the matter seriously enough to investigate, and does not hesitate to pronounce it all as absurd, ridiculous and incredible, or simply to pronounce it fraud — to stop and think whether a student could open the third or fourth book of Euclid, and demonstrate any problem there correctly, without first being possessed of all the knowledge con¬ tained in the pages preceding it; and if not, will it not be quite as unreasonable for a critic to open up this book at a later page, and begin to criticize without knowledge of the contents of all previous pages, lest he build his opposition structure on a false premise ? Another thought I include for the reader’s consideration on this feature is, that no human being is so wise that they may perchance know everything, or possess at least all the knowledge, names, dates and circumstances that are contained in each and all of the written messages from first to last, of the many hundreds received through this psychic’s hand, as well as the personalities of all the writers of those messages, for the hypothesis of fraud presupposes that the medium must possess all the knowledge which she imparts through the various messages she writes; and this an unbiased reader will not admit, nor even believe, for such varied and prolific knowledge could never be encompassed by any one mind, from such diversified sources, and limited by years exceeding the span of the instrument’s mortal life. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 163 In conclusion I give it as my unbiased opinion that “The Human-Psychic-Telephone” is the most complicated psychical instrument I have ever met. She has been subjected by me to very many and exacting tests of her mental, as well as psychical capacity, and supplied, without a moment’s hesitation, automatic answers in writing, which I believe prove from their nature, and from the knowledge conveyed, that they could only have had their source in the intelligences which were credited with writing them^ many of which appear in different chapters. These intelli¬ gences who write have many of them appeared to me, at one or more seances held by each of four different materializing mediums; six trumpet mediums, either before or after their written messages, or their own part of the conversations held with me; and in this manner I have secured ample evidence of corroborative character, to establish their identity beyond a single doubt. This fact alone must establish the genuineness of her automatic faculty, as well as to account for the wonderful diversity of thought and knowledge imparted to m.e. The reader will find in the chapters to follow, much of what I promised, viz.: cobweb or connecting evidence, and of sufficient interest to compel the most careful investigation. In the writing of messages, which feature I am dealing with, Eberling, the guide or controlling spirit of “The Human-Psychic- Telephone,” is assisted by elementali spirits, with the result that rhyming is introduced for a purpose which I will not attempt to explain, though it may possibly be simple, and if rightly under¬ stood might be quite acceptable. A wise and prudent person will never deny the possibility of anything, unless prepared to dis¬ prove it. It may prove of interest to readers to learn the view of some of the intelligences who have made use of this rhyming psychic. From each communication I make extracts, for they write at greater length elsewhere. (See Chapter XXXI.) Hypatia: “It is not difficult to make this subject write, that is “if she is active in the automatic key; but as she of her conscious “self does neither hear nor see, unless she thinks of writing, the 164 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND “door is closed to me J and as her mind subconscious is our instru- “ment alone, her mind aids our suggestion. If she reads the “words your own it causes her to listen, and give proper time to “me, and then I write to answer as ’tis written thee.” Dr. Richard Hodgson, in detail (in Chapter XXXI) at greater length than others explains how very difficult he finds it to fully and properly convey in language appropriate the exact expression of his thoughts through this psychic to me. He writes clearly: “I wish I could come near to you, and talk without this rhyme.” He further states that his guardian is with him; and that Eberling, her guide, is with the psychic. They aid with changes seeming slight, but so it does not sound as if I do it. In another sentence he says: “Faults of complete control give to us silence here and “there, so our best efforts are but fair, and not to be compared “to thel efforts we made when here in life.” Frederick Myers in one of his written messages to me says: “I communicate this message. It is a peculiar thing to do. I “do not govern this hand. I speak to it and the hand writes my “words. It is governed by my words, as was Mrs. Piper’s hand “in long ago. You’ve heard — or else you may not know — that “we spoke to the discarnate spirits, by holding her hand to our “lips. Now in this case I stand by and talk what I wish to say, “the mortal senses me not, though she is in consciousness I am “told. She only sees as I see what the hand writes. I see it is “not my handwriting but her own.” From another message from Myers I quote what follows: “There are other mentalities who “assist us like to servants in a well regulated home. In fact the “tendency to rhyme is fault in some degree of one of these who “near her (the psychic) stand, and aid us in our least command. “Like to a megaphone they be to my completed thought to thee. “They confine and direct it to its best service, but suggest not.” Prof. Thompson J. Hudson says: “I like you have studied “this instrument from this side of life.She has double “mental action; or the action of the other portion of her mentality “is similar to the normal mental action.This one case is DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 165 “most peculiar of all, because the two minds are interchangable, “and neither disturbs the other.” May (the author’s wife). In one of her communications through this psychic she says: ‘She is not impressed by my “thoughts, but her hand is governed by a mind that is intelligent “enough to transcribe what I dictate by words. It seems to me, “or to my conscious mind, very much as if you could step to a “telephone and talk to a friend; and as you spoke the message, “see a hand writing it as if ruled by the spoken words.” On another occasion I asked May this question, viz.: Why do you rhyme like so many others, who write through Miss Gates? Her reply was: “I rhyme because it is easier so tO( do. If I let “it rhyme it sort of runs itself like to a pianola or piano-player; “but in the case of Mr. Wright, John Shaw and Rushton “(Wright’s guides) served instead of her, rhyming guides.” Clegg Wright. From this former well known medium I received a most interesting communication which will be found in Chapter XXXIV. I quote what he wrote through the rhyming psychic, so much as refers to his being an^' exceptional case, and the reason why. He says: “I am just as real, and just as much “in life, as when I was a visitor at Lily Dale before. I see you “too. I also see why I was shifted. I am nearer and beyond the “rhyming necessity. Eberling, the instrument’s guide, in accord- “ance with the expressed wish of my guides, permitted me to be “shifted beyond the rhyming zone.” With the foregoing information in mind regarding this unique psychic instrument, the reader will be prepared to further com¬ prehend her exceptional capacity for repeated and prolonged psychical activity, by critically noting the results secured through her while perusing Chapters XXII, XXIH, XXIV, XXIX, XXX, XXXI, XXXIV and XXXV. CHAPTER XXII H ypatia, the Neo^platonic philosopher — daughter OF Theon — Alleged Spirit Guide of the Author — Has proved to be a great teacher — This book her OVi^N SUGGESTION- She AIDED IN SECURING EVIDENCE FOR IT — She brought relatives, friends, strangers, seers, philoso¬ phers AND RESEACHERS TO COMMUNE WITH THE WRITER— ShE SPENT HOURS AT A TIME IN ANSWERING HIS QUESTIONS — FUL¬ FILLED HER PROMISE TO AID HIM TO SECURE HER SPIRIT PORTRAIT — She WROTE through “The Human-Psychic-Telephone” AND OTHER AUTOMATIC WRITERS — AlSO SPOKE THROUGH TRUM¬ PETS— Has held converse with the author and with other PEOPLE while present IN HER TRANSIENT BODY, [Hypatia’s spirit portrait, in natural colors, about three-quarters life size, made by spirit artists in the presence of the Bangs Sisters in the city of Chicago, on April 27, 1912, while under the author’s inspection, on a basis selected by him; and was completed in ten minutes, immediately after that of William T. Stead. It was sub¬ sequently photographed by a local photographer in Toronto, from which a photo-engraving plate was produced, which in turn was used by the printer to produce her picture here, costumed as she appeared at the Jonson seance the same night as William T. Stead in his first materialization, viz.; 10 P. M., April 18, 1912.] Hypatia has been designated the “most wise of womankind” in the age in which she lived. In the prime of earthly life she was universally admired for her great learning, talents, eloquence, beauty and modesty. She exercised marvelous influence over all who heard her public utterances. Her life was a distinguished one, yet had a tragic ending as a martyr. Of her Professor Draper writes: “Each day, before her academy, stood a long train of chariots; her lecture room was crowded with the wealth and fashion of Alexandria. They came to listen to her discourses on those great questions which man in all ages has asked, but 166 HYPATIA, THE NEAPLATONIC’ PHILOSOPHER (Born 370 A. D.; Murdered 415 A. D.i PcUnting Made by Spirit Artists f ir t!ie Autliir. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 167 which have never yet been answered : What am I ? Where am I ? What can I do ? One day as she repaired to her academy she was assaulted by Cyril’s mob — a mob of blood-thirsty monks. Stripped naked in the street, she was dragged into a church and there killed with a club. The corpse was cut in pieces, the flesh was scraped from the bones with shells, and the remnants cast into a fire. For this frightful crime Cyril (an Archbishop) was never called to account. It seemed to be admitted that the end sanctified the means.” A record of psychical phenomena from which has been elim¬ inated an important contributing element must prove valueless, if it is to form the basis or foundation upon which to formulate a permanent hypothesis; or to construct a declaration of an important truth; or to define a new, or not well understood natural law. In all the important research work with which I have the past few years been closely associated, I may say always, under every circumstance, in every location, and with every true psychic, there has been present a dominant or controlling intelligence and influence which impressed my mentality, invariably having its distinct individuality, making known by assertion its former human identity, establishing the verity of the same by accurate knowledge given when under examination as to life’s history and contemporaneous events, together with names, locations and dates and other confirmatory information. The various channels through which this intelligence has com¬ municated have been somewhat unlimited, that is, not confined to any one system or phase or psychic. It has manifested for years past by voice through trumpets in various places, in the presence of different psychics; also by independent voice in the air whether trumpet was present or not; through the vocal organs of entranced mediums; appeared to view in a semi-transparent or etherialized formation; and while materialized and gowned as a lady held refined converse with me, or sang songs of her own creation, by using the vocal organs of such transient, body; and many times by utilizing the hand and pen of an entranced psychic 168 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND communicated information and instruction—some of geneia) character, some of a specific personal and confidential nature; and lastly by utilizing the new instrument I have in the preceding chapter described as the “Human-Psychic-Telephone,” with auto¬ matic action, and of rhyming tendency. The language used by her, the mannerisms adopted, and alleged name announced or signed; as well as predictions or confirmations at one place and time harmonizing with those at another place and time, and with other appearances on sundry occasions, thus confirming the indi¬ viduality of the intelligence under separate, different or even opposite conditions; she has so fully and satisfactorily demon¬ strated her individuality, that she has secured my confidence, approval and support, on account of her many capabilities, promises, prophesies and fulfillment of them, and demonstrated to be of a quality and character which cannot but command my regard and that of those who also know them; and which not only have been but continue to be displayed; and added to this is her definite and complete demonstration of not only wonderful mind and correct judgment, but the wonderful power she com¬ mands ; and to me so absolutely consistent in promise and fulfill¬ ment as to win my entire confidence and trust, and establish her in truthfulness and reliability. This intelligence alleges herself to be Hypatia, the neoplatonic philosopher, the daughter of Theon. (See her own statements near the end of Chapter' XXIH.) Numbers of living intelligent citizens of Canada and of the United States have met Hypatia in her transient physical body at a Jonson seance when I was present; while a much smaller number have met and conversed with her there, in response to my request made to her, to materialize, meet and speak with certain specified friends, though I was absent. This request was several times complied with, while on three different occasions, in the case of three close personal friends of mine — unacquainted with each other ■— and visiting the seance alone, or at least not with each other, she dictated a message, intended for me, and requested on each occasion its deliverance to me in person. In each instance I received the message. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 169 With one instrument entranced, and with the automatic writers, as well as other types and phases of mediumship, by her aid I am enabled to show a connection of needed links forming a chain of strong evidence too convincing to be disconcerted or entangled by any hypothesis of either fraud, conjuring, mind-reading, telepathy, hallucination or hypnotic state, which may be con¬ structed and applied by any critic, who seeks for evidence which he does not want to find. Of this intelligence, alleged by herself to be Hypatia, I shall give as concisely as possible within the limits of this chapter, a few incidents chosen from the very many, of her association with me and my research efforts since 1905, inasmuch as she enacts a most important part in the various phenomena which seem to recur with frequency, increasing inter¬ est, and importance. It will only be necessary hereafter for the observant reader to note events connected with her; and the frequency of confirmatory or direct evidence, in almost every chapter. Hypatia, the angelic visitor, was the means, by materializing her transient body and using speech of convincing my late wife that she, Hypatia, is my spirit guide; and her persuasive manner and capabilities made a convert of her, and thereby a coworker instead of an opponent of my attitude on psychic matters. With reference to this circumstance I will here include part of a memo made at that time, viz.: “In the month of June, 1907, Hypatia, “speaking through an entranced medium, Mrs. Ripley, said that “‘May’ (my wife), who had never shown an inclination to the “belief in spirit return and communion—would be influenced by “her to desire to go with me to Lily Dale, and see and hear and “judge if it were true or no. Suffice it to say, I decided to not “ask her to go, nor even suggest that she accompany me on the “trip; but waited patiently for a time to see if she would be “influenced by the spirit power of suggestion. She soon began to “plan, which ended in the decision to go with me, which met my “wish and I expressed myself as pleased. We reached there on “Saturday, the fourth of August, 1907, and that very night "attended a Jonson materializing seance; and to her own astonish- .70 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND "merit, Hypatia, in a beautiful angelic embodiment, came and "made of ‘May’ a friend during our sojourn there.” These seances were conducted under test conditions which were intended to absolutely preclude aid to the medium from any quarter. Of the sixteen adults present, eight were members of our Research Society while the remaining eight were our selected friends (which included my wife). There were three seances in all, and ten to fifteen presentations at each. At one of these Otelleo, another alleged guide of mine — of Egyptian nativity, B. C. 8,000 years, and associated with Hypatia in a band of seven advanced spirits, assigned to act in unison — made a brief call, yet intimated who it was that he called especially to see, for the first time. At each seance Hypatia presented herself, and centered her interest chiefly on May. On the first occasion she entered in creamy white vesture, her head, neck, chest and arms bearing apparently diamond bedecked jewels and ornaments, a golden bracelet on her wrist, while on her feet were sandals; and she moved gracefully across the room to where my wife and I sat in the circle, and placing her hand on my shoulder spoke to me — she kept her promise that she would come; I arose and she led me to the centre of the room, where May was invited to join us; and while May was engaged by Hypatia in conversation, she at first was acutely critical in matter of detail, such as feeling of muscles and gauging her solidity, and that of her jewels and ornaments, and noting closely the color of her hair and eyes and the movements of the mouth while speaking, as well as appreciat¬ ing the reality of the hands and fingers as they were placed one on each cheek, and listened to the persuasive words she spoke: “I am glad you are here, dear May; I am your husband’s guide, and I will act as guide to you.” But May could not comprehend how Hypatia’s vestures had changed in texture and design while conversing, nor quite realize the gradual disappearance from near us by a dissolution of all we had been in contact with. Her curiosity became a compelling power, and May attended the second and third seances, at one of which Hypatia appeared, talked to May and again disappeared slowly by dissolution into DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 171 the floor. But in the end May began to comprehend and-finally acknowledge that she had seen and been talking with an angel visitor. During the remaining four years.of May’s earth life following her convincing experience with Hypatia at the Lily Dale seances, she freely joined me in psychical investigations, and became acquainted with Hypatia. She also willingly became a joint partner with me in the agreement which appears in Chapter XII, which since her transition has been put to the test (see Chapter XIII, and others following), and strongly sustains the truth of both continuity and communion between those in the two states of existence; or between those now in the spirit world, and those on earth. I will at this stage designate a few out of many tests of Hypatia’s capability, each of which she acquiesced in and success¬ fully accomplished. Two of these may be found in Chapter VIII, and each has been verified since — one as a trumpet speaking test, in the home of the late Wm. T. Stead; and the other by materializing her body and holding an interview in a specified seance at Jonson’s from or in compliance with the written request, as in the preceding case, which lay on my desk over night, and was read by Hypatia, to meet Col. N-, a Canadian friend of mine, who was then in Toledo, for the purpose of attending a materializing seance, and tell him why she introduced herself to him. A third and unusual test, with a special condition attached to it, I will designate “the rose test.’’ This was inaugurated by Hypatia giving her assent to it, as soon as I proposed it to her in a materializing seance had in the home of the Jonsons, by my wife and myself, with Mrs. Jonson, the medium’s wife, also present. The date was August 10, 1910. As other evidential matters had some association with this seance, I will briefly make mention of it as it will come under observation again. This test was successfully completed November 15, 1911. (See Chapter XVI, presentations 8, 9, 10 and 11.) Following is only a portion 172 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of the record of this seance as made at the time of inauguration of “the rose test.” “Three years, almost to the very day, had elapsed since “May’s first convincing evidence had made a convert of her to “this new truth; and she had since improved her opportunities, “in gathering further experiences and becoming better acquainted “with Hypatia. So when we were seated we felt satisfied that “the harmonious conditions would probably bring satisfactory “results; and as will be seen we were not in the least disappointed. “Our callers were limited in numbers, and the first was Hypatia, “who looked as natural in her thought-created vestures as any “lady in a well lighted room, on ‘calling day,’ her whole presence “bright and clear in detail of natural observation, so that we “could readily distinguish the features, and color of the hair, “and eyes, and observe every ornamentation. She gracefully and “in a dignified manner approached us and gave us loving wel- “come, which filled our souls with joy, and afforded us the com- “forting assurances of the after-lTTe, and the pleasures we would “realize when we would be met and welcomed by those who “preceded us. Turning to me she answered a mental question “I had in mind; and next turning to my wife said, ‘I am glad to “meet you again, dear May, and though I’m going now I will “return presently with a lovable spirit who will be an aider to “you.’ After a brief absence Hypatia returned, bringing with her “another spirit somewhat resembling herself in general figure, “features and garb. This spirit walked over to a vase containing “flowers and plucked one, and returned to the side of Hypatia, “who then spoke and said, ‘May, I bring to you one who will be “a guide and helper to you — this is Saphrona.’ Saphrona greeted “May, and handed her the flower she had plucked from out the “vase, and then spoke with my wife. After we were given an “opportunity for a close scrutiny of the vestures, forms and ^ “adornments of these two spirits who were with us at one and * “the same time, they were each presented with a fine white rose, “on one long, leafy stem. To Hypatia I presented mine. I said, “ ‘While presenting this rose as a token of my appreciation of DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 173 “you, I desire it to be at the same time a test; and will ask you “if you will protect it, and somewhere, and at some time in the “future return it to me, as you now receive it?’ Hypatia replied: “ ‘I will take care of it, and return it to you as you wish, as a “proof of my ability to fulfil my promise.’ The stem and rose “would be about twelve inches long, and the stem was covered “with leaves and thorns, and tied with a double bow of white “satin baby ribbon. I thanked Hypatia, who then placed it against “the centre point of the chest, withdrew her hand from it and “there it remained as if pinned fast; but there was no evidence “of fastening, for it was placed, and in a second the hand with- “drew. My wife also presented her guest, Saphrona, with a “like present; but in her case the stem was tied with blue satin “baby ribbon. Both of these angels dematerialized from before “our presence, at the entrance to the little room — which served “as a cabinet — bodies, roses and all. “Among the various callers at this most interesting seance “were two fraternal friends, who claimed to have lived in the “very long ago in the East, and who came, remained, and “departed together, after exchanging greetings with us. One “of these, Otelleo, will be remembered as associated with Hypatia “in a band of exalted spirits. The other spirit was introduced “to me in a significant way by Otelleo as Hiram AbiflF. “One of the remaining callers was Dr. Sharp, who has fre- “quently called on me before, and will be recognized by quite a “few interested people as the trumpet control and guide of Mrs. “Etta Wriedt, trumpet medium. This gray-haired and long- “bearded old spirit guide entertained both of us with some of “his reminiscences, for we both had knowledge of him before. “One fact especially, which he wished to impress upon our minds, “was that he claimed to have been the first to introduce physical “phenomena in Ontario.” May passed from earth life to spirit realms on September 29, 1911, and after she had gone from me, my thoughts constantly reverted to our ante-mortem agreement found in Chapter XH; and though hoping and believing it would be successfully carried 174 DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND out, yet these questions would continue to arise in my mind; When? where? and how? Oh that it may soon be really proved to be an accomplished fact, was my constant soul desire. I had not long to wait, for Hypatia so impressed me that I went to the same psychic lady (Mrs. Ripley) visited early in the month of May, in the case of my first test, when Hypatia agreed to convey my wish to Wm. T. Stead. If so be you will give your consent to allow the guides to utilize you, I told her, I feel satis¬ fied that some spirit prompts this request, and I shall await some new development. The psychic gave immediate and harmonious consent, and evidence was apparent that some spirit was taking control of her. It proved to be the same spirit — Mary Black¬ burn .— who took control of her when I sat with her before. The controlling spirit greeted me, though her words were few — “I now give place to your guide, who wishes to talk with you,” was all she said. The psychic immediately began to lapse into a deeper trance condition, and after perhaps two minutes’ wait¬ ing, Hypatia began to use her vocal organs, and told me she wished me to go on November 11th to Etta Wriedt, the trumpet medium, at Detroit, and that she, Hypatia, would during my presence there bring May to converse with me. This direction I complied with, and sure enough the prediction was fulfilled in a most gratifying manner. (See Chapter XHI.) The reader doubtless will in some measure realize that my interest in view of all the facts mentioned, was now profoundly increased, and my confidence in Hypatia becoming most firmly established. The reader will please note that “the rose test” began August 10, 1910. May being then in earth life, Hypatia and Saphrona both being present with her; and it was concluded November, 1911, May being then in spirit realms, but returned with Hypatia, and was present in the seance at the successful conclusion of the test. (See Chapter XVI, presentations 8, 9, 10 and 11.) Dr. Sharp was present on all these occasions. 'In this same November, as the foregoing incident, while in a trumpet seance held in Toronto, with over a score of its intelligent citizens present. Dr. Sharp availed himself of the opportunity, DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 175 and my presence, to say through the trumpet, “Dr. King, I wish to thank you for having recognized me when I appeared in my •materialized body at the Jonson s&nce in August last year.” (The seance alluded to, when the rose test had its origin.) Shortly after those words had been spoken, a voice addressed Rev. Canon William Walsh, who was present. It was soon recognized by him and others, as that of May, who had only passed over to the other life last 29th of September, and was met and cared for by Hypatia and Saphrona; and now was return¬ ing as spirit. She came on this occasion, especially to thank her personal friend Canon Walsh for his kind reference to her in the words he so recently gave utterance to while addressing those who were present before her earthly remains — then in view in the casket — were conveyed to their last resting-place. (See cor¬ roborative testimony at conclusion of Chapter XIX.) Hypatia’s exalted character and work are being now made manifest in bringing aid and evidence to establish the truth of continuity of life, and direct communion, beyond all doubt, between those still of earth, and other loved ones and friends in spirit realms. She brought about communing between myself and wife, also with our daughter, my brother, parents, and other relatives, as well as friends, strangers, seers, philosophers and former psychical researchers; and most of these through psychics of different phases, some through three or four phases. The evidence is presented in chapters of this book, which the writer believes will successfully sustain the claim against attack by any skeptic, scientist, priest or man. “The dawn has come for a grand awakening. Hypatia.” The foregoing was Hypatia’s first recognized written communica¬ tion to me, as made in red letter on a slate, and signed by her at 5 P. M., August 10, 1905. She wrote her second message in red letter the following day on another slate. The precautions taken, and results obtained, including their reproduction in this book, are to be found at the end of this chapter, and will give the reader a clearer under¬ standing of this psychic demonstration. 176 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND It would be impossible for me to prove in ordinary way her human, earthly personality; though I feel that I have that of her spirit identity, for this has been possible, as she has been my constant teacher, guide and helper since the above date. To spirit Hypatia I am indebted for much I have learned of spirit life; and also to loved ones, and former friends of earth, as well as some noted men of experience now in spirit spheres, whose minds are active still, and with added knowledge aid in furnish¬ ing from the spirit world much evidence to prove their continuity, and ability to return to the earth plane and commune with mortals. And now to show that Hypatia’s close association is not alone with me, but also continues with my spirit wife, “May,” I quote a few extracts from the records I have secured while in pursuit of further psychic knowledge. Before doing so, however, I will endeavor to make clear to the reader that which he does not comprehend, or questions in his mind, the fact of a spirit writing through a human psychic hand. I will here explain briefly, as I do so more fully elsewhere, how this is done. To illustrate: — A hypnotizer selects a likely stranger subject, and diverts his objective mind from concentration, or attracts it by anticipation, and at the psychological moment suggests to the subjective mind of the one he seeks to control that he (the subject) is going to write a letter to a friend, sing a song, deliver a short address, or as a nurse girl will take care of a crying baby; and in either case the subject complies with the general suggestion made to his subjective mind, which has become active without detailed direction, and the objective part of the mind immediately becomes passive or dormant. In the case of the writing psychic the spirit Hypatia or May or whosoever controls, by consent of the objective mind (and non-consent means locking the door) speaks into the telephone receiving ear of her subjective mind the dictated very words and sentences to be written, and at once her subjective self writes them, with her own physical hand, just as naturally as when the objective mind controls the hand. Walk¬ ing or talking in sleep are ordinary examples resulting from DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 177 suggestions, — without detailed direction, and without exercise of reason, — to the subjective mind by noises, voices, motion, physical contact, indigestion, and other causes. Such undirected suggestion to the subjective mind of the individual in question thereby causes action, mental or physical, or both, such as on the one hand dreams of impossibilities, or on the other, physical activities of no definite purpose, because of the absence of detailed direction in the suggestion which acts upon the subjective mind. I am instructed from spirit source, that when any spirit intel¬ ligence wishes to speak the words of a message to be written, such spirit obtains consent to speak them to the subjective mind of the psychic; and then Eberling, her guide, takes control of her, and is assisted by elemental spirits; and that he considers rhyming, in her case, a constant necessity for a definite purpose. With this explanation I will now follow here in this relation by quotations from May’s own spirit communication of March 13, 1912, as by the hand of the human-psychic-telephone recorded; as also in the case of Hypatia, viz.: May: “Saphrona is like to Hypatia; she is so capable that she takes very loving care of me.” I had asked her if Saphrona — whom Hypatia had brought to her as helper and protector when at Toledo in 1910 — was seen or met by her in spirit life, and the quotation was her answer, as through the psychic instrument. J. S. K.: “When and where and how did you awaken to con¬ scious spirit existence?” May: “I fell into a restless sleep, and floated out of life. *T realized it not until I was with the one who so cares for thee. “Hypatia was the first to say your spirit is set free dear May, “do not feel sad for it is fate of all mankind to die; and we are “all and all to you, and to your loving Johnnie too; and we will “blend you into one now that your living here is done. I also “weep.and wish I could be here to stay; but laws “of mind we do not know have brought me here and willed it so. “HI do each little thing I may till I have learned the very way "to come to you.Heaven is a state and not a place. 178 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND “or I might say more exact it is an attunement. If light of the “sun is confined it will let a man see even in a cave. So with “our heavenly necessity it may be confined or held near to us, “so that we are at ease even here on earth. If I were not in “artificial protection, I could not remain as I do with you often “by night and by day. My spirit body is of higher development “because of Hypatia and your band who are advanced, so I “receive vitality like to a shower of power; but in the lower “mental states the human minds disembodied of earth-bound “degree wish to return and hear and see and eat and drink “because they have not learned to think.” “J. S. K.: “Tell me, May, if you can, where you were.” May: “I did seem to be in my bed. I thought now I have “slept so long I will arise quite well. I felt a slight shock like “to a parting thread; and then I seemed to float away; and I “thought I’ve heard Jqhnnie say he did so (in astral flights) and “I wonder where I shall go; and later I came back to see it was “all done, and I was truly free, and so I wept as you did too. “I am now at ease and love to study also, and later I will often “be with you. Many were with me, dear, but as I said I was “not prepared for the truth. I was attended by Hypatia who was “the principal one. I saw my babe, at first she came like a vision “and I thought it was a vision or a dream; and then I thought “how real they seem, and how faint my earthly vision. It all “comes gradually to me, and seems most wisely done that way.” J. S. K.: “I thank you, ‘babe,’ for all you’ve said; and Hypatia, dear one, who so cares for May, I desire to know how you com¬ municate with her, and with others in spirit life.” Hypatia (replying through the same instrument) : “We com¬ municate according to our development and capacity to use advanced advantages. With May, thy darling of earthly life, I talk in language earth-like. It is the English speech I use. Her sense is exactly like to clairaudient power in humans — and a power to hear without an ear. With Electra, or des-Asia or Otelleo and others like to me I talk with a directed focussed thought as if I would by earth photography convey the picture. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 179 and the thought complete, without the need of words a5 used by men. Intuition in humans is this power in rudim.entary way, I it know, is all you can say.” On other occasions — both previous and subsequent to the foregoing questions to both May and the guide — I questioned, and still continue to question Hypatia from time to time to gain knowledge, and I receive it in generous measure. At most I give but a few examples in this chapter, while in the one that follows, the whole of it is devoted to Hypatia’s answers to my questions relating to mind and soul or spirit, and other matters of interest to me. J. S. K.: “Can you sense my wants or wishes; and do you read my thoughts?” Hypatia : “I first receive a call from thee like to a bell to you; and to my conscious self it would convey the thought to me — he calls or wishes me. Then I give to it attention, as you would open a window by a voluntary act, and if I do so, I then see you, and also see the thing that would result from what your thoughts express to me, that is if you should ask ‘is this wise?’ I would not only hear thy direct question, but I would see like pictures, as we say, from land of ‘sure to be,’ the way that it will be, and what is good or bad for thee, for I am finite too, in a comparison of increased degree; and I am taught and led and used, not as are the needs of men, but as I need, a growing child of Deity.” J. S. K.: “When I write on paper, and leave what I have written, on the desk for you, as in the case of my communications to Wm. T. Stead of London, and my Quebec friend (see Chapter VHI), do you read it from the writing, or from my mind?” Hypatia ; “If you write it I read it from the writing, and by a wireless repetition so convey it. If it is typewritten, it confuses me, and I but read thy thoughts then, and convey it in thought only, and not in exact English speech.” J. S. K.: “Do you think you can deliver to Mr. Stead, the single, or better still the compound message, as contained in my second communication to him before my book appears? If not the test after would not be so convincing.” 180 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Hypatia : “My intention is to do it. I have many aides with me, among them many masters, such as des-Asia, known to thee; and we hold a line together, and we thus the thoughts convey, and will try to do it better if we can, or the same way. Stead is himself a psychic, therefore we to him can say do it thus, or do it this way, and he will our wish obey. (The departure of Mrs. Wriedt, and the subsequent passing of Mr. Stead prevented its accomplishment). You are gifted with the heavenly gift my own beloved here; and you are growing steadily more than to you appear; and a little later, dear one, we will cleave the outer air, and you will see us face to face, and sense us everywhere.” Hypatia it was who first suggested the compilation of this book, and likewise wrote its closing sentences. She volunteered to help me, and became chief collaborator in securing the many new revelations regarding the next stage of existence; and gathered and introduced to me the many witnesses from spirit spheres to confirm the accumulating evidences. The records of various chapters will show her presence, intel¬ ligence, judgment, skill and labor, which will command apprecia¬ tion of her. She likewise expressed her desire that I should secure what Wm. T. Stead promised me in writing through the Human- Psychic-Telephone, viz.: his spirit picture for this book; and when I wrote the Bangs Sisters of Chicago to secure a sitting with them for a spirit picture, their immediate reply came back to me that my guide, naming Hypatia, had been there and secured it for me; and she herself corroborated it while materialized at Jonson’s in Toledo, and also named the day I was to go there for it; and when I did so, though no spirit’s name was mentioned in connection with the sitting by or to the sisters, when I sat I got Stead’s picture; and unexpectedly I got Hypatia’s picture also; and they each appeared as they were dressed when they both presented, the same evening (18th April) in the Jonson seance. I may here again affirm what is stated elsewhere, that when May speaks to me through any trumpet, I instantly recognize HYPATIA’S FIRST WRITTEN MESSAIIE TO THE AUTHOR. ■■ ' ^ I D-AWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 181 the voice as May’s, for it sounds in my ear quite as familiar as it did in earth life, whether she spoke in my immediate presence, or in an adjoining room, or from a distance, through a telephone. The same holds true in the case of Hypatia, to the extent of her psychical opportunities, and the comparison of her speaking efforts, for her familiar voice is at once recognizable, beyond any suggestion of doubt, as it comes from the trumpet, or through the vocal organs of her transient body, no matter where or when I hear it. Again when either of the two is materialized, or in the transient body and talking or moving about, such one appears quite as life-like, and real to me, and to my friends, as any person at the seance, and each voice is quite as familiar and natural as that of other friends of mine who may be present with me. I may also mention that May’s and Hypatia’s communications have quite as often been by spoken language as by the psychic writing. The manner of speaking is characteristic, though the delivery and tone are modified in some degree in the cases when using the vocal organs of different entranced psychics. At times I have utilized stenographers to make record of exact spoken language; but in the case of writing psychics such aid is not requisite as accuracy is found in such records, not only in the case of the two here mentioned, but also with others from the spheres, and hence no necessity exists for repeating. The rhyming tendency has already been accounted for. Not¬ withstanding rhyme and tone spirit writers claim their thoughts are( conveyed unchanged. I have spent hours at a time, on more than one occasion, in questioning Hypatia to gain knowledge, and her responses thereto were immediately given through the automatic writer. A few selections from the many are embodied in Chapter XXIII, next following, which I claim demonstrate her wonderful knowledge, and her great capacity for imparting it. But I need specify no more, for everywhere throughout this book — which she herself named — she has shown unlimited capacity in aiding me to secure strong evidence designed for the benefit of humanity. Through- 182 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND out all her association with me, she invariably courteously proffered wise suggestions; and avoided the semblance of effort to dethrone the majesty of individual will or choice. She has not only to me, but to others alleged that she is my spirit guide. (“The Voices” by Admiral Moore.) I will conclude this descrip¬ tion with my estimation in regard to her, viz.: Her power appears to be almost unlimited; her wisdom acknowledged also; and she will measure up to any mind which questions her ability. 1 accept her in full confidence as teacher, helper and guide to me; and have no doubt that she is the one she claims to be, the one who died a martyr to principle, at Alexandria, A. D. 415. Hypatia’s first written messages to me came as a surprise. Precautions were taken to guard against fraud or conjuring. They were reproduced for introduction with this chapter, by aid of isochromatic photography; and hence appear as ordinary grayish-white, like other slate writing. I first met a stranger psychic in New York State, and had my first experience with slate-writing intelligences. As a precaution I procured new slates, void of blemish. After I washed and dried them, I placed two of them of equal dimensions in apposi¬ tion, and securely bound them together. The psychic’s hand first touched them, and I next covered them with a dark velvet texture, as they lay directly in front af me on the table. Almost immediately I heard the sound of writing, which concluded with a tap, signifying finished. On removal of the cloth with which I had covered them, I next untied and separated, the two slates, and found that the surface of each which was hidden from view when they were bound together, was now covered with writing, which differed one portion from another. The first message on Slate No. 1 (see engraving No. 1) appeared in deep-red color, and was the first message signed by “Hypatia,” and previously referred to elsewhere. The second message appeared in soft-yellow color, and was signed “Judge Rose.” The judge, up to a recent date, had been an acquaintance and fellow-citizen of mine. HYPATIA’S SECOND WRITTEN MESSAGE TO THE AUTHOR. T DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 183 The third message, in color white, was signed by “Electra,” another alleged guide, and a member of the band of seven. This writing began at the lower lefthand corner of the slate, as well as covered in successive slightly curved lines all the balance of the surface of the slate, and, as will be seen, is in the inverted position in relation to the writing which precedes it. Next examining the other slate, I found a single message, in the ordinary grayish-white color of usual slate-writing, and signed “John King,” a name-sake, who has been seen and heard by other writers and investigators, and been particularized as the appari¬ tion with a heavy black beard. At the same hour on the following day, during my second sitting, Hypatia wrote another message in red color and signed it (see No. 2 photo-engraving). The writing begins at the upper right-hand corner, and continues to extend in very slightly curved lines in a diagonal direction in relation to the edges of the slate, and covering about three-fifths of the surface. The other writer, an alleged college-mate, utilized the remainder of the surface, beginning at the lower right-hand corner. I may here briefly state that when I last called on him, during his earth life, he was well and lived on York Street, Hamilton, Ontario. I did not know until I received the message on this occasion that he had moved from where I last spoke with him, to where the message says he was living, nor did I know until that moment that he had passed to the spirit world. On subsequent enquiry from a reliable source, I received corroboration of the truth embodied in these simple statements conveyed in the written message. The second slate bore on its inner surface but one message which was likewise the writer’s first one on a slate, and was signed “Egyptia,” who has always claimed to have been my guardian angel from the moment of my birth; and has very often materialized and conversed with me through the vocal organs of her transient body, at seances of at least three different materializing mediums during the period beginning with the year 1894 (refer to Chapter IV, presentation No. 6, and also latter part of Chapter VI). 184 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Egyptia, Hypatia and other guides of spirit band of seven have walked and talked with me, while in their transient bodies; and also sang songs of their own creation, as well as utilized trumpets when occasion presented for communicating with me; and these evidences have continued until the present. All the foregoing slate messages were written very rapidly, consuming but a fraction of the time it takes to read them. The writing subsequently became blurred in the natural way, by careless handling of the slates, during a period of years prior to the process of transferring them from slates to engravings. CHAPTER XXIII T he present chapter will be wholly devoted to Hypatia’s views regarding mind, thought and soul or spirit, and their relation to Deity, together with an outline of her philosophy, and tenets of her creed. She briefly gives her auto¬ biography, and simply refers to her martyrdom at Alexandria. My questions were prepared at my home in Toronto, and placed in my pocket; and no human eye saw them save my own, nor did a single mortal, other than myself, know their contents: and yet she gave her answers, and expositions in response to my desires, as contained in them, for further knowledge, as one who proved herself to have been unexcelled as a teacher, in the age in which she lived. This sitting with the psychic at Lily Dale, New York State, was indeed an important and memorable one, inasmuch as it was the occasion of a most exacting test of the genuineness of both the intelligence communicating, and the instrument or medium. I may premise for the reader’s information, that to Hypa,tia, more than to all else, am I indebted for the aid I have received in the compilation of this book, entitled “Dawn of the Awakened Mind,” which name, I now realize more than ever, best designates the true condition of the present day mind development, and presents to view a new established truth ; and while I recognize her partnership of effort, her wisdom as my guide and teacher, her power and influence as a leader in both spirit life and here, I wish to have her place on record what must stand as evidence plain and clear, of her ability to uphold my claim, that life is a continuity; that spirits do come back again to men; and beyond each and every doubt, they do commune with them; and lastly, that the work in which I have engaged, is endorsed by the angel world, and thus is affirmed to humanity as truth. As the time for our sitting had arrived, and Hypatia’s presence was made known, I thus addressed her: “Hypatia, you have 185 186 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND well established your identity in very many ways, such as by letter, or message writing; speaking with vocal organs of a medium in a trance; as well as talking through trumpets; and less frequently, your voice has been heard in song; while many scores of sitters, at materializing seances, have seen you time and again in more than one place, and heard your conversations when meeting me there; and most especially, when a large circle of interested researchers saw you bring for the first time my spirit wife and daughter to me, in a Jonson seance in Novem¬ ber, 1911.” “No pedantic critic need attempt to credit me with seeing a creature of imagination, nor a fraudulent presentation, for you have too often established your identity to me, beyond all question, as well as to others who saw you more than once, and who with me, could frequently have the opportunity to view and recognize your features and your form, your tangibility and motion, your mannerisms and your speech, and in many other ways; as any man could recognize his mother or his wife, and could swear that she was such, without a single doubt or question.” “Now that Miss Gates, the instrument, is ready and waiting, will you please utilize her services and answer these several questions for me, so that I may have them recorded, and take them home with me.” Almost instantly the psychic’s hand began to write, and “Hypatia” was the single word she wrote, as an indication that she at least was ready. To lead the way I first asked for direction. J. S. K. “Shall I read all the questions in the order I have them written here; or submit them one by one, and receive your answers ?” Answer by Hypatia. “I prefer to receive them the latter way, and then proceed to answer them.” The answer followed each question immediately, and continued so to come, until this chapter was concluded. Question 1, by J. S. K. When the spirit leaves the body, at the so-called time of death, of what does it, the spirit, consist? DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 187 Answer, by Hypatia. It is the same spirit that occupied the body, intangible to human normal sense, but tangible to us as spirit. In fact we don’t sense anatomy, at all. It is to us as is matter, a machine of static order, .that generates for the growing soul, proper health radiation. After the spirit is free, it is to us cognizant, whereas when it is in the body it is inexpressive or dumb. Body does not exist and spirit is all. Your body is made up of matter or moving particles of inert spirit, and God is spirit or that from which all things come. If you want me to describe it from your point of view, I will say it consists of mind, the thinking part of soul, the living or loving part, and of a body produced from habits of thought added to what it was at first, a spirit produced by process of birth. The words may be confus¬ ing or interchangeable. Your ideal is correct as to the duality of mind, the mind that thinks, and the mind that produces harmony for the thinking ego blended together make a whole or spirit. If you like the word soul better so use it. Name is limited to express what must be unknown quantity to a mortal or limited mind. Question 2, J. S. K. Is the mind immortal, does it exist for all time to come ? Answer by Hypatia. The mind is a portion of the Deity, or to describe it in a picture, it is a portion of the Deity at birth, but like a plate without markings. A human life-time engraves upon it certain errors of judgment that give to it an opalescent hue, and cause it to be most precious to all who see and serve it. It was everlasting at birth, and after a human life-time, it is not only everlasting but most precious to those who see its work of growth and attainment. What I specially wish to here convey is that the mind or ego, is not only preserved, but the personality is also retained, and continued. Question 3, J. S. K. Before we proceed further, I desire to know if I err? Or, am I doing what I should not do, irj asking these questions, which of necessity are in advance of the normal knowledge of humanity? Answer by Hypatia. It is not sinful to endeavor to find out 188 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND what is beyond your comprehension. If you ask of what the sun consists, you do no harm. Therefore, from my point of view, it is not sinful to ask about that which you do not know, regarding intangible things, but to you made real by experiences and observation. Question 4, J. S. K. Is the whole of mind a unit, and of what does it consist? Answer by Hypatia, The whole of mind is like to a ball of mercury. It is all of one substance but may easily be separated into smaller complete balls or portions of the first division, or in immature infancy these portions are not engraved and go back easily to high degree, but after life of human, they become individualized so that their life is put on record, like a book, and like a blossom beautiful or dwarfed it stays forever in the garden of its God. When it by more perfection of its growth becomes completed in its love and loses selfish greed of gain, it goes at last into a pool of power, which like to corpuscles of living blood, moves ever onward in a harmony of power to aid and power to grow, and each one helps the other so there is no clashing anywhere, but different power to do as with wise men in human life of you. Question 5, J. S. K. Is mind compound or has it parts objective and subjective? Answer by Hypatia. It is compound as you might see but to us perfect like a tree, the sub-conscious is the perfected mind of animal. Its instinct is perfect. It does not reason, and it does not err. The other portion in man developed is like the blossom of the fruit. It reasons and it errs, and yet is by us believed to be most perfect so, with an unending power to grow. Question 6, J. S. K. Has mind at death to be divided, and some part no longer used? Answer by Hypatia, It is sometimes cut off from memory of this past life. It, I mean the mind, as a whole is at times deprived of memory, and in that state is placed in circumstances like to a second human life, and so it grows in even state, till from its vicious tendency set free, then it is after shown, and DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 189 taught what circumstances caused it to be, for man is ruled by circumstance in large degree. Perhaps a fault in growth of brain, perhaps an evil moral tendency inherited from certain fault or error of his ancestry. Question 7, J. S. K. Does some new element of mind manifest when body dies? Answer by Hypatia. New senses open to the spirit view. It is as if you for your life-time through, were of your sight or smell bereft. You simply use what you had not the need of while your brain an organ frail was being used by you. Question 8, J. S. K. By what part of mind is reason exercised in spirit life? Answer by Hypatia. It is the reasoning portion of the com¬ pleted mind. The mind is dual as a tree above ground and beneath would be, but each dependent on the other for perfect harmony; but if either was bereft like in the tree the sub-conscious or the root is the most substantial part. The reasoning portion is the portion that develops as a whole and glorifies perfected soul. Question 9, J. S. K. What difference, if any, is there between spirits carnate and discarnate? Answer by Hypatia. I referred to that before. I might give your mind a picture of it by saying the living human spirit or incarnate one, is as a child compared to man. A child might have better eyes than the father, but he could not mentally use the objects impressed on his sight, so the incarnate spirit, even when awakened in spiritual power to sense, is not greatly bene¬ fited thereby, but when set free the need of spirit senses then exists, and they are appreciated indeed. Question 10, J. S. K. By what authority is discarnate mind controlled? Answer by Hypatia. Discarnate mind is controlled on a similar principle to the incarnate. It is guided into paths for its best good. If it proceeds with good and grace, it is allowed to stay and advance rapidly along the way. If it is slow or does not wish to go another takes its place, and it is left to be taught privately. Like to a school the after life, if all are in a class, and do their 190 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND best, they keep together in a forward way, just as a normal human life will grow in similar degree to its perfection or com¬ pletion ; but if it, the discarnate spirit, cannot be like to the aver¬ age ones, 'tis given private tutorage along the way, and will attain its growth at later day, like to a backward child at school, but all are forced to certain rule. As birth and death to man is certainty, so to the spirit certain laws must be. If I ask you what makes a comet return to a certain prophesied point, after a lapse of years, you will answer, law, which has been discovered by observation. So in spirit, laws of exactness exist, but God or Deity is all life, and all love, and all wisdom. As perfection cannot err, so it cannot change. It is modified to some degree by other spirits, but the good of each individual is the ultimate end. Question 11, J. S. K. How is mind of infant spirit developed to adult state? Answer by Hypatia. Inherited tendency, or the impressions made upon the minds of its ancestors are impressed upon its mind at birth, on principle like to photography after its start, its food and body growth, and also its social environment, have much to do with developing it toward good or evil tendencies. But good is best when it is understood, and wise and loving hearts are always good. Question 12, J. S. K. Is the ruling power in spirit, or is it found in mind? Answer by Hypatia. The ruling power is spirit, which is perfect, and perfects all things according to the best of perfect law. Spirit is more perfect than mind. Spirit is the power to produce all things, and maybe complete to the final etherialized state, finer than anything material. A mind is an expression of this spirit. Mind has limitations, spirit has none. The substance mind is a creation of the spirit. It is not easy for a finite being to comprehend absolute capacity to do, to think and reason are attributes of the mind. The spirit is not in this necessity, it knows without effort or need to attain. The Ruling Power of the Uni¬ verse, the Spirit, has made an absolutely perfect law. This law DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 191 or these laws are always for the good of the ones governed. These laws are the result of growth, and develop as necessities of development call for laws. Laws are a necessity to finite minds, but to Infinite Spirit there is no need for limitation or law. Law of itself suggests consequence. If you disobey a law, you must suffer in some way. So I think I best express it when I tell you that spirit is absolute, and pervades all matter and mind. Without God or Deity no life would be. So finite beings are but individual expressions of this general and all pervading spirit, necessary to life in all forms. Death is not possible to spirit. Death is a gateway of change only. The ruling power is, as far as our ability to comprehend, perfect law modified by loving united minds, who teach and aid all lesser ones. You know the heated stove will burn you, but if a child or idiot came near, you would withhold his hand by force, if ’twas necessity to save him. Pain you know would be, and yet the fire is a friend to men. So laws of force exist, and laws of consequence, but all are for the best growth of all concerned. Question 13, J. S. K. I desire fully to comprehend the true meaning of mind, and of the terms mind-reading, telepathy and thought-transference, and how thought is recognized by me 'in another’s mind, or how thought may be propelled, or attracted from one mind to another one. Is telepathy possible only between two minds in harmonious attunement by a process of vibration similar in principle to that necessary in transmitting Marconi- grams from one tower or station to another one, or on the other hand do you deny its real existence? In this same connection I would ask have you knowledge that a thought which originally belonged to the mind of one person may impinge upon or connect in some way, with the mind of another person in harmonious attunement with herself like to the note caused by the bow of a violin, drawn across the string, causing response in a wire which produces a similar note in the piano at the other end of the room? Answer by Hypatia. I may first say I believe and know it is true, if I had instrument like you, at this end, I could cause her 192 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND here to sense and know, but she, this one, (the Human-Psychic- Telephone) will not do so. She says cut off all of their power, and leave me silent free, and like a person in a room, her mental door is locked to me; but if I see her little maid, (an elemental spirit) I say call “Maudie” to our aid, and if it seems to Lala Lee (the maid) desirable she mention me, and then this one (the instrument) may listen if she wishes to, but she is opposite to you in every way, apd does not wish to know, or even care if it is so. It is somewhat difficult to describe to finite beings, things intangible to their senses, like Mind, Soul, Spirit, etc. Mind is substance real to myself, real to yourself, but your senses are associated with the knowledge and belief in gravity, and to human senses things not governed by gravity are not real. Mind is not governed by gravity of planets, or gravitation’s law. Centrifugal and centripetal forces affect it not, but it has length, breadth and thickness, and has necessity. It may have comfort or discomfort, it may be relaxed or in tension. It is of itself without necessary form and at birth would be void, or without engravings. The mind of each human are at birth alike as far as serious variations are concerned. If I would be most exact, I should say that God is mind, and each individual of whatsoever order, is a chunk of God in greater or less size capacity. I might describe the creation of the universal universes, as having been- made on the principles of the development of rudimentary animal life, on the plan of fission or automatic division of a cell, or an independent organism, that is to say each globule or filament after elongating divides into two segments, each of which increases in its turn, to again divide into parts and so on. The Universes are so produced by growth from the original oneness of Deity, these large or astro¬ nomical minds are in desire to produce and protect lives, and are taught how to proceed to their perfection by ability to com¬ municate directly to Deity. These original minds or individuals are governed by exact laws, and matter, which is all that is cognizant to humans, is the result of these laws. I from my point of view would call all matter mind in different degrees of DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 193 tension, or potential. Therefore under bonds a mind of advanced order for the purpose of enlightening or teaching investigating men, may in a small degree materialize or de-materialize objects to men familiar, on a similar principle to that used by a human scientist when he would cause heat waves to be changed into sound waves. I might perhaps make you understand the condi¬ tions of the universe, if I should say you are living in the com¬ pleted universe, or the growing one, but there are myriads of complete or ripe universes or individual large minds, like to the Coral Islands produced by the living small animals, on each of these is exactly recorded every thing of its experience. Or perhaps you would understand better if I’d say a spirit after birth com¬ pletes itself according to its best development, and then, becomes a perfected “I am” like to Deity in its desire to do good to all, and after further development it becomes an “I am not,” or a positively negative force, from which matter is made. This mind then becomes like to mother earth vibrant with life, but does not act except in a beneficent way, toward the myriad forms or individuals of life, upon its surface. The spirits of men, and the spirits of elementals are in truth the only truly irresponsible individuals of the mind order. These two orders belong as I might describe to you men, to the conscious or inventive portion of the God mind, and elementals to the active sub-conscious portion of the God mind. An elemental, if not suggested to by a man spirit, will never make a mistake or err in execution of a command. They are of the recording and imitating order, and whatever they do or wherever they go, they follow the suggestion of a mind either carnate or discarnate. They do not invent. The body of humans in life is a static machine, that generates through the life process, the radiation and vibrations necessary for a man’s best development. Question 14, J. S. K. Will you kindly explain to me what thought is, where it originates, how it is created, how directed and controlled. Answer by Hypatia. Thought is more than a vibration, it is an invention or mental succession of pictures, which as you ask 194 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND in previous question, may be conveyed to another mind in attune- ment to itself, either by natural or produced state. Telepathy has real existence, because it is thought-transference either by picture or word method. It may be caught by a disinterested piind, if that mind is in line of its conveyance, or is in harmonious attunement with itself. Elementals may be used to generate any vibration which I might describe to you as colors. Blue and yellow will produce green. Suppose a “blue” mind endeavored to communicate by telepathy with a “green” mind it could not do so till a guide caused the “yellow” to be added to the blue, till they were of the same shade. This could be done by additions from this side, but its success would depend upon its exactness. Rest and fatigue of body have much to do with the condition of a living mind, and these conditions are dependent on circum¬ stances, not wholly spiritual. Thought is a power of reason, a power to invent, to take things known or observed, and make new pictures from combining them in different kaleidoscopic ways. I know your happiness or unhappiness by intuition, if I come in tune with you. This is a soul power. The power to feel or know. This is done by intuition and power to me known, but with May she cannot of her own self unaided come into tune with you. She is a babe not properly clothed, and I by' additions clothe her for the occasions, as is best for her and you. Question 15, J. S. K. If my thoughts are now known to May and you, is it by sense of sight, or feeling or is it by spirit sense of intuition or prehension? Answer by Hypatia. You are to me a radiant being, and thus bodily radiation of you is to me as light. What you think or write is recorded, and under proper conditions I can read it as you could a book. I cannot always produce or cause to be pro¬ duced these conditions, therefore I cannot always read your thoughts or written words. These small necessities to me are like to the pen or pencil and paper to this writer if she would communicate with you. If you were developed in mediumship your body would be like a house equipped with a telephone. I DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 195 could use it, so could a stranger spirit as well, except a stranger would probably be withheld from entering your house. Question 16, J. S. K. Have thoughts once formed continuous existence? Answer by Hypatia. Thoughts once formed have continued existence because they are recorded. The Kingdom of life, both animal and vegetable, is on or over a “carbon sheet,” that exactly reproduces it. This is in the Kingdom called at the present time, or rather from which the spirits of Levitation and Elementals come. I can, by going through proper forms of vibration and waiting, knock on any door of record of any type or time and find what is therein, kept or treasured. Or I may, which I would do in ordinary way, employ an elemental to go to this point, receive the impression of what I wish to know, and then come to me and repeat it as a graphophone repeats a record. The elemental will go in a bee line, and the record will be exact, if it is not interfered with in transmission. Thought as a rule goes straight forward as in a tube and does not impinge upon a mind unless that mind enters its ray by accident or design. The thought is complete like to a picture created or painted. It may be retraced or copied or obtained again for the hall of record, but it does not continue to vibrate on the principle of waves on a lake after a stone is dropped therein. If it did so one set of pictures would impinge upon another set of pictures, and tend to efface each other. A beautiful thought like a beautiful song, may be retained in memories near, and repeated in a modified way, either with additions or subtractions. Question 17, J. S. K. If thoughts are definite in form are they not physical? Answer by Hypatia. In answer I would say that thoughts are physical from spirit point of view, but not from that of human. That is they have not weight, and are not governed by gravity. They cannot be disturbed or delayed by physical sub¬ stance. Other thoughts cannot modify or change their origin, continuance or end. Other thoughts cannot quicken or delay their execution. They may impress mind and cause new thoughts 196 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND to be invented, but each thought remains itself intact or unchanged. Question 18, J. S. K. Am I correct in assuming that I am in attunement with spirit realms, when while I am in a passive state I send forth my soul’s desire to receive a message from you or May or other loved one or friend, or whoever I may, and that same one goes to the Human-Psychic-Telephone and communi¬ cates their thoughts through that instrument to me in writing? Answer by Hypatia. All men are in attunement with spirit realms at all times, but when you send forth a true prayer or soul’s desire you call to your assistance many exalted spirits, who like to the “Jacob’s Ladder’’ picture make the way between you and your wish more smooth. The greatest good to the greatest number is always to be considered, and even though we wish earnestly, we often fail to win. But who can say we are not benefited by the wishing? Question 19, J. S. K. Hypatia, will you kindly explain to me, why some former acquaintances, some distant relatives, and most of the strangers who have sent the messages through the writing instrument, the Human-Psychic-Telephone, to me. have done so without my request, and some whom I had no thought of, was it a thought wave from me to someone that they sensed, (or by telepathy) or why was it so? Answer by Hypatia. Myriads of spirits wish to communicate with men. Sometimes they serve us in our work for you, and so earn the right to have their wish to communicate granted. Many observe all mediumistic experiments and are like onlookers at the moving of a building, at hand ready to assist, and afterwards deserving of reward in the way of having their wishes granted in regard to personal communications, etc. Question 20, J. S. K. If thought is a creation of the mind, and mind as a whole is a unit, though having parts as to qualities or functionings, and has for future advantage dormant spiritual senses, then am I to understand that what still remains is soul or spirit, the source from which emanates love, emotion, and other attributes? And does this combination form the completed DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 197 individual whole of each spirit personality, with its origin in, and future final destination, the Universal and Infinite Spirit, Deity or God? I have thought and I have reasoned that the various parts having spirit origin, by their union together con¬ stitute each individual carnate and discarnate personality, an immortal spirit. As an earnest, honest student, I want to learn along these lines what you can and will teach me. Does the spirit through its soul govern the operations of the mind, and if so, is not the spirit entity the ruler of all its parts, and a portion of the Infinite Spirit or Deity, but with a limitation and adapt¬ ability to the physical body in human life; but after death without an organized body only as one is assumed for some reason, such for example as recognition, though both physical and visible from spirit point of view? Answer by Hypatia. I will give answer to your question as well as make response to several others in your mind. The mind is a ball that may either centralize or does centralize, until a thought is invented, then it focuses and sends that thought forth, catapults it as it were. That thought must be in a way a com¬ pleted picture, expressed in words, or symbols. I would say thought is a creation of the mind. It, the mind, may be active or passive. When passive it is easily impressed by thoughts about it, and must come in touch with it, through some sense either physical or spiritual. The eye as an organ is an instrument like a camera that produces agreeable effects on the mind. There are spiritual senses, in the spiritual body, which continue with the mind and soul of man, after death. A man’s mind is like to God’s mind, on the same principle that the tree in the seed is just as perfect as the grown tree. Scientists contend that even the future blossom is in this its primal state. But in the primal state, it is perfect. In real tree life, or development, some blossoms will be blighted by frost and circumstance, and some will bear fruit. The God mind would be like to the mind of every individual at birth, but without personalities, which are attained by circumstance and growth. The key to each condition and sphere is in the body and soul of every man. 198 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Mind of God is a Kingdom or sphere of wholeness, like to white paper not engraved with personality. Soul of God is a Kingdom or sphere of wholeness. Love is the principle thereof. Body of God is the Universe as a whole, both spiritual and physical. This the “three in one’’ incomprehensible to many yet evident in all men, matter is an expression of this (the body) part thereof. Severity of Justice without mercy that does not deviate in body or matter, in exactness, of all natural laws, like those of fire, electricity and forces not yet known to men, is modified by soul, all the way to perfection, both in body and spirit. The mind of each individual is with that individual always. Its capacity to think and therefore develop and grow in human life depends upon its brain health, and development (circum¬ stance.) If it is an idiot the brain cells are disturbed and cannot be used, the mind remains in inability to think until death relieves it to the freedom of its spiritual state. In insanity, the brain disease sets the spirit into partial free¬ dom, from the body, so it floats, toy-balloon-like, between its body and its spiritual home. Not able to grow, or use its brain, it is acted on by discarnate minds, and also incorrect impulses or impressions caused by diseased brain. When it is free spirit, it is cut off from the memory of this experience, and begins at its well, or child state, and grows again complete. Soul is a portion of man. It has the power to feel, to love, to be attuned to the best in ourselves, and in the Infinite. It is the blossom or the fruit of the whole completed life of man. Two men may be alike in mental power, but one may be almost wholly without moral sense. Morality is an attribute also of the soul, as mentality is of the mind, both aided by the body instrument become the completed man. Morality is the distinguish¬ ing trait of man. It may reverse and become immorality. These attributes are of the soul, which is not in animals. A moral or immoral beast would be incomprehensible. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 199 All spirits are a part of Deity, just as blood corpuscles are a part of a human body, red ones I might describe as thinkers, or active forces, and white ones as the passive, or elemental part, yet all circulate forward to perfected degree. Each individual is placed in his proper environment, for best growth and development. I have a body, or a combination of soul, mind and attributes in complete harmony, to produce a spirit which is an individual differing from all others. I am advanced according to my capacity to do, and this advancement is a part of myself, and radiates from me, just as intelligence radiates from a wise man, and shows abroad to distinguish him from a fool; just as kindness shows abroad.in a man to distinguish him from one who is vicious. I have things I like to do. I have things I wish to do. I have limitations, I am taught, and in turn I teach others. I am not cut off from individuals of any other order, but I have my interests and they have theirs, like to men of equal intelligence passing on a city street. I carry with me the engrav¬ ings of my attainment. I go to what I admire, and am attracted to those who are interested along the same line. Spirit life is not so different from human life, except that as we advance we drop off limitations. We become more intangible as it were. A spirit of the first sphere or order of human existence, after death is intangible to a living human one. A spirit of the second sphere is intangible to those of the first order, except it assume the first sphere conditions or limitations, and so on to the final perfection of exalted degree, where though they retain their individuality, they are dissolved into the body of the spirit of God, as it has been said, or become so God-like, that his wishes are their wishes in every degree. They have not limitations of actfon, but they have not wish to act, except in accordance with law, which is and must be perfect. They assist less capable spirits to attain, they assist such as I am, to aid living mortals, and discamate spirits, to their own harmony, etc. The wonders of God’s great Universe are indeed beyond finding out. We have a means of being taught, which I might describe as projected pictures, from the land of the sure to be. 200 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND I ask any question, and see the answer at once thrown on to the screen of my consciousness, in Symbology. This is a universal language. Our power to prophesy or know the future depends on our ability to read these symbols correctly. Clairvoyant humans have power at times, to sense these symbols. In some of your past letters of enquiry, you have asked me in regard to evil spirits, etc. The deceptive spirits are as a rule misplaced spiritual powers, as fire, which is a blessing indeed to man in artificial environments, of northern climate, but destruc¬ tive without our responsibility if set free. It is governed by exact laws, that must be followed or obeyed with care. Your lamp and your stove are devils indeed, but waiting an opportunity to destroy your home and you, one might say; but if properly managed they are blessings indeed to all men. In mediumistic experiments these forces are not always balanced properly, if so they would revitalize the medium, as they do in the case of this instrument. (The Human-Psychic-Telephone.) In the case of J. B. Jonson they are exhausting his vital forces; and if he continues to give seances he will die. Perhaps a pro¬ tracted rest might enable his guides to learn how to provide for his better protection, I do not know. I do not know so much more than I did, when living, but I have added capacity to sense, and at my request in any line, I am kindly and carefully taught how to proceed. Sometimes I proceed along as a child would play a tune that it had been taught. At other times I proceed by repeating a record given to me, as one would play a pianola. In either case it is my act, but governed by my capacity to do. There are bands of spirits, like to the bands about mediums. Sometimes these bands of discarnate spirits, aided by elementals, invade weak-minded people, and produce peculiar or evil acts. Thus in suicidal mania, certain astronomy, or large spirits believe it is sad that a human soul or spirit must be kept in the limita¬ tions of life. They believe it desirable to set them free, that they may enjoy the broader life, and knowledge granted to discarnate spirits. If by accident or design, one of these becomes attuned to a weak or diseased mentality, it may suggest suicide, but the DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 201 spirit that so does it is not a devil, instead it is a spirit that loves living men too much, etc. Sometimes elementals and men become fraternal, and change work as it were. A severe power of levita¬ tion’s kingdom, accustomed to the exact execution of an elemental servant, is displeased, when a man is substituted in service, and fails in exactness of execution from his wish to know what the result of so doing would be, etc. In these cases the elementals in their efforts to protect their friend, the reasoner, place him in an ill man’s body, and in trying to teach him, or divert the attention of the severe power from him, sometimes cause obsces- sion, and other injury to humans; but this is not the result of an evil inteation, but of a good intention wrongly placed. A child sent for a wire might remove a wire from a piano and so do great harm or damage, but it would not be to blame, if its judgment could not comprehend the harm done. So guardian¬ ship is extended all along the line. If a heavy vibration spirit, by artificial aid, is placed and left in wrong environment, we produce its comfort and return it to its element. Like to a fish on land, it could be kept in comfort in a small amount of water till it could be conveyed to the sea, its home. A man could be conveyed through the air, but could not of himself fly like a bird, etc. Elementals and men combined, produce evil effects, at times. The law of the elemental is that it shall obey the commands of men. It is glad to serve men, in their bodies, and after they are freed by death. Its reward is in the service, and in being allowed to imitate the thoughts and acts of its chosen charge. Attraction and repulsion are not law's of all life, and all matter is life in a positively negative degree, or in a proper state or attunement, for growth and development of individuals, of animal, and vegetable forms, that perfect the geography of each sphere. As you believe or think, I might say that the elementals belong to the sub-conscious portion of the God mind, and have in them¬ selves only the sub-conscious power to think and act. Attempt 202 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND to teac.i a child of three the principles of Geometry, and you will realize in some degree the limitations I feel in trying to give to yourself, a but slightly developed medium, an idea of that which is really outside of your comprehension. Suppose I should describe the first three spheres like to ocean, earth and air. A fish to live on the earth must have water about it artificially for its comfort. A man might go down to the fish, but he must have air about him for his comfort. A bird might come to the earth to stay with the man, but to fly in the air is possible, while to the man it is not, etc. An imaginary large bird could carry a man from one point to another, but it must be sure and deposit the man on the ground, or in his native element, or the man would be, if left on a high tree, helpless and in trouble. In Jonsoh’s case of mediumship, he is not revitalized by his guides, and his spirit cannot of itself go to or gain this vital force. I may become like to your wife. May, as like to yourself, but neither of you can become like to me. The power to do so is in each of you, but it is not yet developed, or grown to your power to use. God is good. All of the wonders of nature and spirit are good, and wonderful to the last degree, in utility and economy. We are all parts of the whole of God, as plants are parts of the landscape, but we each retain our own individuality, and we are protected and aided in our growths, and development. To die is not calamity, but to be cut off by death’s law from loved faces, and soul communion, is a calamity indeed; but you who feel the withering of this great woe, are in a way assisted along the barren way, of these your after years, by belief and hope in continuity of life beyond the grave. I believe that this trouble is to you as the furnace in making the steel. It has shaped you into a proper instrument, to fulfill God’s great purpose, and aid many to see even in slight degree, the smile of hope through the blackness of their woe. I like the name, “Dawn of the Awakened Mind,’’ and am told that good will follow in the wake that this your book will make. I love you and your work, and everywhere DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 203 I can I will aid you to aid your fellow-man. I think the name Human-Psychic-Telephone is good. She is in truth an instrument of that kind. She is peculiar to herself in her line of power to do. I use her power to write, and so communicate with you. She is to me an instrument, just as the pen is to her an instrument. I cannot do without her aid, if I could I truly would, for I knew you were aware of this her power to write. I have at different times, and in different places, used such instruments as were at hand. I will continue so to do. I will also be with you, your life-time through, and after death has set you free, I still your guardian will be, to aid you to your harmony and to your future power to do, in after-life, allotted you. Question 21, J. S. K. I appreciate most fully this opportunity which you have granted me, and thank you heartily for all that you, as spirit guide and aider, have done for me during the many years of your relationship to me, but now and more especially I thank you as a teacher, for the knowledge you have imparted regarding mind and thought and soul, and spirit and their attributes, as well as your special promises yet to be fulfilled; and for your permission to reproduce your views, as here and now expressed, as well as others of deep interest which are to follow to complete this special chapter. I therefore accept the privilege you afford me of further questioning, and will ask you to enlighten me regarding some psychical phenomena. Is it a transient body that is seen when you appear at a seance; and is it made up for that occasion for purpose of recognition only? Answer by Hypatia. It is so done by spirit aids that come at wish of me. They come from the levitation Kingdom, or from the hall of record here. They see the picture we wish to show, and aid us so to do. At Jonson’s they draw strength from you, but with this one (the automatic instrument) vitality is brought directly from below, and in the end she’s rested usually, instead of feeling tiredness and woe. Much there is indeed, my beloved one, that you do not yet know, and when I try to teach you, I feel at loss indeed, for I must see the view of you, and limited my answer true must be. 204 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Question 22, J. S. K. Do you and the other guides, as well as May, May Donna, and each of the loved ones who materialize and speak with me, have any part in producing individual transient forms ? Answer by Hypatia. We have a part in large degree. It is as if a ball of living clay was there, and it could sense us as free spirits, and instantly shape itself like living car which we propel with ease as w'e would use a medium. It has not expressed personality. It simply makes itself to us a useful part, and we need to do nothing with the art of body-making or retaining. We simply enter it, as easily as you would enter an elevator, or moving car, and instantly we see and touch, and are ourselves again, but when we disappear, another spirit comes the same clay to serve its purpose in its way. Question 23, J. S. K. From what material is the transient body formed? Answer by Hypatia. It is produced from several substances at hand, which I cannot describe, or make you understand. Like to radium, it is co-existent in common substances, and yet when free is powerful in a large degree. So in all matter is balanced force in silent state, this is unbalanced in a proper way to make an image that will stay upon the consciousness of any human present. It is your radiation that we take, and like an artesian well, you are in ordinary life, but we with pump exhaust your pond of power, which later is developed for your use. It does no especial harm to you, but aids us greatly in the work we do. Question 24, J. S. K. I presume to think the atoms of the transient body are all physical, but separate and invisible. If that be right how are they summoned into regularity, and apportioned each its appropriate place? Answer by Hypatia. In the case of atoms you err, for atoms are not physical, but are instead spirit or mind, that from its choice is negative or moves not in the least degree, just as you in a small degree would say, I will not move at all, but let another rule me all. This negative force is not negative, instead it is positive beyond all positive degree, by that I mean it is a posi- DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 205 lively negative force, that has for its beginning, minds completed by perfected growth. If they are ruled, they must be ruled by living men, not by discarnate spirits. So in case of materialization and de-materialization. These individuals of levitations land obedient are to some one individual in life like Jonson, by some decision or decree they say we will this individual obey, and will allow a slight digression of a natural law to be, so they record it and agree, and then if so is best, you know the rest and out of matter, matter comes like to the smoke upon a winter’s day. It is not as you seem to think. This negative power to serve is capable of changing itself to a tube or wall so that vibrations cannot go at all, or may proceed in peace along the way. The minds I refer to, are astronomy powers, or developed mentalities perfected by ages of teaching and experience, they serve man’s best development but they think slowly. If a medium is entranced it is one of these that requires it. It is a complicated study, but ultimate good for the whole, and for each individual as well, is their view and intention. If the stove, chairs and piano would persist in dematerializing or moving from your touch chaotic state would be resultant in a.large degree, but law transgressed alone permits such things to be, and when it is allowed, a bonds¬ man strong is with such action everywhere, to observe it in small detail, and keep all harm away if possible to stay. Now in the case of Jonson to be able to cause forms to show is his power, but he is exhausted and depleted there by it so the balance of power advises and suggests that he cease to use this peculiar, but not to his best development necessary gift. What he will later do I cannot tell, but he must for the present cease if he would after live in peace. Question 25, J. S. K. I have other questions which relate to various matters of interest to me, which I may at a future time ask you, but at present date I will only ask a few, to which I would like response by you. What was it that you taught or said, that created enmity and incensed the mob to take your life at Alexandria? Answer by Hypatia. As I look back at life of me, lighted by 206 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND knowledge here attained, I wonder at the zeal I felt, in teaching those about me to believe in things that men, now Christians say are true, but then were altogether new, to those not looking from my view. But one must judge each mortal from his education, and environments, as well as from his own mortal view of right. I was born and bred in Alexandria, in the atmosphere of Art and Culture, of the highest kind attainable in my time. In the museum or university presided over by my father Theon, I was taught to believe in the wonders and beauties of nature, as revealed to men through astronomy, aided by mathematics. After, when I went to Athens, I became proficient in the plotonic philosophy, or rather the philosophy as taught by Plotinus and others. Plotonic teachings were to me acceptable in some degree only, so I became of the New Platonics, or Neoplatonic teachers, like the beliefs of modern men. Each great teacher, inculcating in his or her work new, or personal thoughts, became a practically new teacher, of a new thought. I believed that spirits could return. I was not afraid to boldly affirm, that the spirits could supply themselves with bodies, and even commix with frail mortality. This was my belief and came from my being gifted in large degree with mediumistic power to see and hear, and therefore know, that this philosophy was so. I read the works of all the thinkers of that early Christian day. I wished to discourage the belief of a personal God, and other forms as then taught by the early Archbishops. Cyril, an Archbishop of the Christian Church in Alexandria, in his zeal to carry out the work begun by his uncle Theophilus, who because of his cruelties was said to be in a compact with the devil, left no stone unturned in his efforts to remove all teachers or leaders of other creeds. My popularity among the students and people aroused his jealousy, and so he persecuted and murdered me. It was a severe and cruel age, but it was the same spirit that has caused more modern people to persecute, and execute the witches, or those gifted with peculiar or psychic powers. To be severe and cruel was the custom of the age in which I lived. Question 26, J. S. K. Did you teach a new creed ? DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 207 Answer by Hypatia. I did not teach a new creed, but rather a modification or blending of those teachings that had been given forth by the thinkers who preceded me. Question 27, J. S. K. Did you secure disciples from among the people who had been opposed to you? Answer by Hypatia. I had great influence over the students of the Museum or University of Alexandria, where my father Theon was teacher of mathematics, and later I was teacher of sciences, and philosophy. Many new ideas I had gained while at Athens. Question 28, J. S. K. Did you know the contents of Kingsley’s book named after you? Answer by Hypatia. I know of the work of fiction you refer to, as Kingsley’s book. I do not know its exact contents, but have been told it is good, and has done good for the human race. Question 29, J. S. K. Will you please define for me the foundation stones of your philosophy? Answer by Hypatia. The foundation stones of my philosophy were that God was unknowable, and unapproachable, and that from him proceeded by emanations or growth subordinate indi¬ viduals or personalities. Question 30, J. S. K . Is the special work in which I am engaged designed by you, and is it endorsed by the spirit world as a good to be, to all humanity, and why am I selected to be your medium? Answer by Hypatia. The special work in which you are engaged is to my taste, I alone did not design it, but since my earth life, I have sent out a continuous soul or spirit prayer for means to be given to me, of being useful to the living humans. You are the one I have selected in this age, because old credal prejudices, to many advanced thinkers are inadequate to their soul needs; and to you I have now reached from my advanced spirit plane, and am endeavoring to use you as an instrument to aid me in supplying this earth soul need. I have planned to use you, as an instrument, to aid me and others like to me, in our present attempt to supply this soul hunger, or thirst after 208 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND knowledge, that may in truth be demonstrated to their personal cognizance. Your work is endorsed by me, and by the spirit world about me, as a stepping stone on the way to more advanced thought, and knowledge. It is, I believe, needed in this age. You were selected because you are capable, or adapted to the work of compiling and collecting, and presenting the truth, as gained by you along the way of your experiences. You have proper personal education, and position to command the respect of those who may differ from your judgments, and conclusions. Even the thorns of criticism will blossom beautiful indeed in this life you are in, and in your after-life, and like a crown they will uplift, not bear you down. CHAPTER XXIV [Note: — I wish here to make an explanation, which may prevent misapprehension by the reader, in the interpretation of certain statements found in the pages of the present chapter, viz.: The chapter was not included here until much of what fallows it was completed; as it was my intention to assign it to another publication; while the reason for the change is, that I desired my interview with the philosophers to immediately follow my inter¬ view with Hypatia — herself a philosopher of that age—upon the same subjects; and because it was due to her intercession, in response to my wish, that I was fortunate enough to secure so valued an opportunity. J. S. K.] T O this psychological session I brought with me several previously written questions, sufficient to secure from the alleged philosophers their present view on the mind and soul questions, should Hypatia succeed in securing their presence. With the questions in my pocket, and with grave doubts in my mind as to whether I could or would have so great a privilege, as to secure their views, expressed as of their present knowledge; and as the first two days of my sojourn were to be occupied as I had already arranged, I asked Hypatia if my wish could be gratified on the third day, by devoting it chiefly to the purpose mentioned. Hypatia in that gracious manner characteristic of her every effort to meet my wish, wrote in reply to my question, through the automatic hand, “I hope to have them here, and will do my best to accomplish it.” When the day and hour selected had arrived, with the psychic seated at the table, I asked the question which I had then in mind. J. S. K. Hypatia, do the philosophers know anything regarding what is contained in my writings as to mind, soul and spirit; or the other features of the book I am compiling? 209 210 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Hypatia. Aristotle is in interest near to me, and well informed regarding the nature of your work; and he doubtless communi¬ cated with the others, since I requested them to be present here. J. S. K. Hypatia, if Socrates, Plato and Aristotle are all here, I am indeed most grateful to them; and hope they will forgive me, if I questions ask each one of them, during this extended session, for I have strong mental hunger, or “wish to know.” The questions I will read aloud. Hypatia. All three are here. ’Tis best to so proceed as you suggest, and we will write for you. Before I had further time for remark or for question, the psychic began to automatically write rapidly without stop, the following response from Plato, viz.: Plato. We see as you now do, and in regard to soul, we too believe it is the whole, and body but machinery, which is result of soul degree. One may be tall or short, or thin or stout to some degree, no matter what his thoughts may be. I, Plato, was a man of power, and named as broad in shoulders so, but I was narrow in my thoughts as now I see and know; and as you ask me I will do. I do not think that I am cognizant of all your book; but we are present here today to hear and see, and also say an answer back to you, if you request us so to do. I idealized the human life, and made the soul of man to be superior, or of lasting quality; but what it was, and where it went, I could not tell as well as you; and so I listen here today, and much approve of what to you is plain. The working of the lower brain was to me not apparent, so I could not teach what I had not the power to know. We did not know the power of one living mind over another in my day (hypnotic). That study is as modern new, and is there well described by you. I had in mind a wish to know, and followed with my teacher Socrates, along each line of knowledge or surmise; and what we gained thereby was aided by the souls exalted near, but this I did not know was so. When Socrates was lifted from his clay, I looked and wept beside his bier; and prayed as you, that he might be allowed to follow through my life with me. I sometimes saw him in a DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 211 dream like sleep; but he was gone, and I alone to weep. It has been so for years — two thousand now — and you are one to make it plain by arguments, not faith and hope alone. I thought and wished it true, but could not prove as you. If I could have proved even one step, I should have been proud indeed. I had a pupil Aristotle, he was teacher of a king called great. I taught the King of Syracuse, but he rewarded me by slavery; and yet I led the thought of men, so they by ransom set me free to found a University. So you may arouse arguments, and if ’tis so, ’twill lead to glory, and not to future woe. All that you do is‘brought to me by those \vho love me honestly; and I approve of all you do to prove what I now know is true. I did not come direct to you, but learned from Aristotle, what one visited by hinx had done for men, to prove that spirits come again. If I have failed before, I will not do so any more; but will stand ever ready here to aid you, till you’re in the bier. I’ll answer the questions you ask. J. S. K. What would be your present definition of soul? Of what composed? Have you knowledge of Reincarnation? Plato. My present definition of soul is, that which occupies the body as a whole in life, and at death departs a whole to be, of what the mortal is and was, and is to be, a living “himself” in capacity to use what God’s laws bring to hand, for his best powers to command. In earth life, or physical body life, five senses seem to be sufficient for his need; and out of matter living cells are taken, to replace the wear and tear of the anatomy, which like to a machinery generates forces needed to bring harmony of soul till he by death is from the body free; then added senses come to wakened state, and what he needs in forces wait for his command; and higher thinkers teach him how to rightly understand, or use what is his own, as in earth life ’tis also true, as was the work of me, or you. Hunger of soul exists, this is twofold as I might say, hunger for love or com¬ panionship ; and hunger for entertainment and knowledge. Appetites, normal ones, are voice of God, or spirit which is part 212 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of God, but Ego made complete in individuality, after a mortal birth as I now see. To undergo reincarnation is not true from literal or mortal view; but minds deprived of proper growth in mortal state, will be allowed, or forced to undergo a second living like to human life, so they in soul to proper state may grow. We all assist in work of love for minds of mortal plan, just as you work sad and alone, to aid your fellow-men, who feel your woe, but do not consolation know. Ideas are expressed and proved in this new work called “Dawn of the Awakened Mind,” and it will be of use to men, where simply ideality is useless quite entirely. [The psychic’s mother here intimated that “lunch will be ready, when it suits your convenience.”] Plato here interjected, through the psychic’s hand, this remark, “I will be here, if you must g'o, you will not thus disturb me.” [To the psychic — at the moment objectively normal — the author suggested a few minutes more, and then it would be 1 P. M., which might be followed by a recess for our spirit friends and ourselves, of one hour, which was adopted.] J. S. K. Have you present belief in immortality, or have you knowledge that a human ego has immortal life? Pl.a,to. We have not knowledge of tlie Deity. As individual I have been allowed to meet men of exalted state, who tell me they are children j’et, and never need to wait for something new, so I believe in immortality as part of God or Deity begun. I will be so, no matter where or how I go; and injury but sets me back, as lightning jars the trunk of tree, but makes the root more strong to be, for future growth. So I observe and believe that when a being does his best, a spirit beautiful and good, will plan and guide the rest. J. S. K. Can }*ou define or demonstrate your human personality, to a critical psychologist of the present day? Pl.\to. I would describe it as a thing which has the power to hold past knowledge; and has power to gain and grow by added knowing gained from sources new, no matter what forms it passes through. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 213 [The writing stopped at 1 P. M., we went and had lunch, and were back in our seats at 2 P. M., when the psychic’s hand again began to write. J. S. K.] Plato continuing. I will add further that it is of form or characteristics, uniform or typical of its own individuality, through all these its powers to do; and all the changes it passes through tend to, and do cause it to grow, and improve, and become God-like, or more to its ideality of what perfected man should be. Beneath a rod of beauty, of comparison, we spirits free are here allowed to grow and be, and as we improve, we become radiant; and as we retrograde we become darkened in degree. J. S. K. Are my views as recorded in my book such as you can endorse as true ? Plato. I can endorse them all as true, and wonder at your power to do so well, regarding what is hard to tell; or what is to the language of all men, hard to encompass true, so reader shall think as you do. J. S. K. Had you in human life knowledge of, or the power to control the mind of a fellow human by suggestion to the subjective mind, which is now known as hypnotic power of suggestion; by which means you now convey your thoughts to me through the subjective mind of the psychic, who conforms to your dictation to her subjective mind, to transcribe in writing, what do you wish me to know? Plato. I had knowledge of it in a superficial way; but did not know its source, or limitations; or whether it was natural, or morbid. No one of my time that I knew, had thought of it as false or true. J. S. K. Will you kindly explain for the benefit of readers who may wish to know, how it is possible for me to have attune- ment with yourself, or with others in spirit life, such as the example I gave elsewhere regarding my corresponding friend Wm. T. Stead, then in spirit life, calling my attention to the interesting fact that he sensed my thoughts toward him at a particular time, which was mentioned? 214 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Plato. An attunement is a track unseen, over which thoughts and answerings may flow, like to communication to and fro; and if no spirit sense in you awakened be, we use your intuition key; or that which leads a horse to drink, a wiser power than ’tis to think. Wise in this sense means more perfect or exact; or less to be questioned than is judgment born of reason, which starts from the limited premises of human power to sense. [A break or interruption here occurs to the writing of Plato, and its place is taken by the following in explanation. “It is the wish of the discarnate spirits mentioned on your tablet page, especially to do the very things you ask them to; and so when you requested it to be, he, Wm. T. Stead, brought to bear his wish to do; and other guides assisted him to be able to thus present to you the fact he sensed you; and he knew your wish to be able to thus express to him, this truth”—.The attunement, between author and Wm. T. Stead.] J. S. K. Does the evidence presented in my book in your judg¬ ment sustain the claim I make regarding , 1st, Continuity of Life; 2nd, Spirit Return; and 3rd, Spirit Communion ? Plato. It is my opinion that the evidence compiled for your book, “Dawn of the Awakened Mind,” is very conclusive, because it takes up normal mentality from your developed student view; and distinctly tells where its powers end; and so produces the necessity of belief, that added suggestion must be given to produce the effects observed by you, and nearly always others present with you. In your belief you are candid and honest, and men like to you, will follow your reasonings with interest in every step; and the how you come to your conclusions is so well explained, that they will wish to be able to do, as you in printing say, that you have had the power to do. Doubting Thomases will ever be, or those who do not wish to know; but honest think¬ ers lost in mist of facts, mixed in with theory, will be assisted by the steps you make; and what you teach will aid them to go forward, and proceed with care, and learn much of the “Over There.” J. S. K. Were not the various dogmas, theories and plans of all the philosophers speculative and idealistic? DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 215 Plato. In our time we had superstitions of peculiar types to combat, and idealism was the basis of most of my philosophy. Gods, heroes and men with mythological powers, were to the generality of men like to realities at then. J. S. K. Is not the soul the nucleus of the origin of each human activity of whatsoever sort? Plato. Oh yes, a soul or ego, like to a cell of a human body, selects its food from what comes within its reach; and morbid or unwholesome food may be taken, when it is deprived of what is wholesome to its state of best development. J. S. K. If you know what my views and thoughts are regard¬ ing mind, soul, and spirit, have you also knowledge of the other consecutive contents of the book as it is prepared for general readers ? Plato. I have been informed of the contents of your book by Aristotle, as I before have said. Hypatia’s interest in my teachings, and in the teachings of my pupil Aristotle, have caused us all to be in touch to her capacity to come and go, and let us know. J. S. K. I try to make clear to reader that the dual mind functions for both soul and body in the incarnate state in the human; and at the parting called death, the mind still functions for the soul ego; and new senses, attributes and powers are manifest. Can you, friend Plato, confirm this from your own experiences, as a solution of this special psychic problem? Plato. It is difficult to define and picture intangible things, but the functions of each portion of mind observable by man, are in your book well defined, it seems to me. The mind~and soul are like to the growing tree, the body more like the pot in which it grows, but that does not of necessity combat or change your definition. It is the same in appearance, as what the body would be if perfect. Scars, illness and evil fate to body do not change appearance of the soul. The soul is copied by matter in the growth of body. J. S. K. Have you knowledge and experience regarding the flight of the incarnate Ego. My Ego has visited relatives and 216 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND friends at varying distances, and in various directions, and has been seen and heard by them; but I do not wish it so unless by my own desire, except it be for some wise or important purpose, and conducted by exalted spirits connected with my band. Plato. Your body is pervaded by a thing etherial, and of certain habit, and of certain size, call it what you will, it is the habitation of the man, when death of body comes. This body may go forth, as you so did, by other ego in attunement — like to you — being in space it occupied in your anatomy. This thing I speak of is not divisible, it cannot be abbreviated or changed in its appearance, or capacity, but it may be limited in its freedom. You yourself, with the body were, and spoke to friend as you now speak to her (the psychic), and while Marconi-like conditions existed between yourself and your anatomy you were at ease even though free, and loving spirit hands like bands produced this power to do in you, and aided the friend to be able to hear, and able to see. It pleases me, whatever you have wish to do, I, Plato, am with other two, and all of us wish to serve you. (See Hypatia’s explanation elsewhere.) [Note: —^The communications from Aristotle follow those from Plato. They are the first of extended length which I have received from him.] Several years ago a control speaking through the vocal organs of a psychic while entranced claimed to be Aristotle; but only a sentence or two were spoken at the time, and really no con¬ versation was entered into to confirm an opinion, and hence no evidence to my mind was presented which would establish any view. Again through another trance psychic, a year or two later, in Hamilton, Canada, while entranced, some intelligence utilized the vocal organs to give expression to thoughts which were philosophic in character and claimed to be Aristotle, and spoke a sentence or two, as in the former instance. A third time, a call was made upon me in the trumpet seance held in New York State, only a short time ago. The medium who held the seance to which I refer was under the control of Gray Feather, the strong Indian DAJVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 217 guide and control of J. B. Jonson, of Ohio, who took the place on two occasions of the psychic’s own guide. Then for the first time, Aristotle, as he alleged himself to be, conversed with me by the aid of a trumpet, the date being the fourth of August, 1912, and his speech conveyed the impression that his words were those of a wise man; and one of much experience; and were of a character that made them seem similar to those which found expression through two other psychics, who were in the trance state. As I felt deeply interested in this personality, I in¬ vited him to meet me at the home of the Human-Psychic-Telephone that same afternoon, which he did; and there did write for me beginning at the hour of 4.15 P. M. and what next follows is what he wrote through the automatic hand, viz.: Aristotle. I, a philosopher of long ago, worked on the problem of the power of thought, and how the mind divine, and mind of man, could be so placed in unison by certain laws of behavior and speech, and so your “Dawn of the Awakened Mind” appeals to me. I had to shape each dart of thought, as from my heart it flew, and I am interested in this careful work you do. This carving out of stepping stones up cliffs of known degree, that lead to flights above the stars, it much appeals to me; and so as a philosopher, I came and spoke to you in trumpet seance (a con¬ firmation) ; and I will aid you all I can in this work that you do. The present interview will do more than confirm what had preceded it, and goes far to establish the reputation, and the identity of this famous philosopher. I may add to the foregoing, that my questions all were read aloud by myself, while responses came immediately, and were there and then recorded, in my note-book, by the hand of my psychic, using my fountain pen; and when written and finished, were handed to me without copy, change or additions while under my sight from first to last. Though the questions were prepared by me, they were offered viva voce or read from the page on which they were written, and the answers came without hesitation or delay, and were as written by my own fountain pen, in the 218 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND psychic’s hand; which pen has come to be almost a psychic pen, for it has had its guidance by hundreds of different forces, or separate intelligences. But to return to the communications. After the assurance that Aristotle was present and ready to write, I proceeded with my questioning. J. S. K. Aristotle, I desire to know your views upon the subjects I embraced in the chapters on mind and the soul, in its present and future state. As you have evinced an interest in my researches, and my proposed publications, as shown by your communications, audibly and also through this writing psychic, I feel a strong desire to attune myself to you at this time, and request from you your present view, regarding these selfsame subjects. With many of your former views no doubt changed, as have my own, I desire to learn from you if what my book presents to mortal view regarding mind and soul or spirit is the truth, as you now know it. Aristotle, I agree with you that what you are at birth you are at every future state, with modified degree of fate. A violet in nature never becomes a lily or a rose; and men are varied like to flowers, but each a one alone, or white, or pink or blue, as he was from the seed, but strong or frail, by circumstance of fate. Set out a rose, and rose ’twill stay, and when a man’s soul blossoms in the light of God, his spirit beautified by added priv¬ ileges, is still his spirit only and alone. J, S. K. Do you agree with what I claim that the discarnate spirit or soul of each human presents the same personality, that formerly existed in the incarnate state? Aristotle. My present view is like to you. The garment body as a man is cast aside at death; and like to butterfly, the soul set free, but uses what it had in body crysalistic state, but for its growth it had no wait. J. S. K. What would be your present definition of soul? Aristotle. My definition of soul, if well expressed, would mean the whole. The body, if one could speak true, is but its tenement of clay, in which imprisoned for a day, it holds itself DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 219 alone complete, till called or wafted to God’s throne it comes into its very own, or comes into its power to be complete in powers men cannot see or sense no matter how they try. Yourself is taken to the sky, and what remains is nought to you. As to the body of yourself, at three, it is now gone entirely, and nothing but your memory retains its form, or semblance. So ’tis with life here through which you go. Your acts are all recorded where they may be found by you; but you have entered into state that's altogether new, and body has no part with you. J. S. K. Kindly make clear to my perception, what, in your view, discarnate spirit or soul is composed of. Aristotle. It is composed of substances to spirits only tangible, to man material ’tis nothingness. If you were able to communicate with me, by your latent spirit faculty, I should not have so done, or needed to; but as it was material I had to be, to come to earth and talk to thee; and so to do. I take a transient body like to you, made from substances of small degree, that for the purpose moving rapidly, they impress man as a reality. Matter does not exist, by the way; but is as scientists believe and know, made up of Eons plus and minus so they seem to be to man as a reality. J. S. K. Have you present belief in or actual knowledge of Immortality? Aristotle. I have present knowledge that it is true, that I am part of God complete, and may use matter as a means to be able to so communicate with you, and aid you in the work you do, which is to teach the present age to realize that it has reached a stage of flood tide of experience; and you show this flood or current where it is to go, to reach its wish to sense or know that it may find its living dead, after their powers of earth have fled. J. S. K. Is re-incamation of spirit a fact recognized by you, or is the word misapplied, or misunderstood? Aristotle. Reincarnation is a fact recognized by me from my standpoint. Undeveloped discarnate spirits are replaced in earth life experiences of health and good, until they grow to learn and 220 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND know. But into babes born on the earth they never go, and it was not intended it should be so understood; but literal minds so believed from teaching true given by ancient psychics to the men who listened near.- Reincarnation is not allowable in fact, but souls discarnate are allowed to act as aids or helps to men, who may not ever be informed that this is true, that spirits may return to you. J. S. K. How can you demonstrate or define your human personality to me, or to any critical psychologist of the present day? Aristotle. My personality is made up of my inherited traits, added to by the results of impressions made upon my power to sense, by my senses five, while in body, and added ones here, for instance, as a babe I discovered light, and learned to know it through my organ eye, but what I saw in color or degree, would not be just what any other eye would see. Each picturing of my imagining is my very own, for it is made of what I saw or heard, or sensed; and as this premise was a different one from every other one in life, each picture so created would be mine alone. These are retained in record, and to me they are my worn geography, in which I trace the way I learned to know my Master’s face. J. S. K. I understand, through Hypatia, that you are cognizant of much, if not all that I have written for the book I am now compiling. Are my views as there recorded such as you can endorse as true? Aristotle. I can endorse as true, that spirits may return to you, for I am one of those who do. I also endorse your way of seemingly agreeing with a possible argument, and then show¬ ing its weakness later in what you say or prove. “Dawn of the Awakened Mind’’ is good from many points of view. It is imper¬ sonal. It treats of facts you have experienced; of disappointments you have been through; and of consequent joy in revelations new, and by added observers certified to as true. J. S. K. Does the evidence in my book, in your judgment, sustain the claim I make regarding 1st, Continuity, 2nd, Spirit Return, and 3rd, Spirit Communion? DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 221 Aristotle. The evidence of Indian girl (spirit of Pansy), who, as you say, described location of pictures in your home of which you were not aware, but later comprehended and confirmed as true. Your symbology is good, starting proof, afterwards ful¬ fillment of promises through different psychics having no acquain¬ tance or possible collusion is to me a very positive proof. The disappointment of the man Stead in not being able to use the ones you hoped he would, and yet used others strange to you. The change of heart or mind in girl after messages were cor¬ roborated. The rose experience, interesting and convincing, because of success after long lapse of time. Your wife’s fulfill¬ ment of ante-mortem agreement is also strikingly convincing. J. S. K. Were not the various dogmas, theories and plans of all the philosophers speculative? Aristotle. All of the dogmas were speculative, but many had origin in some form of supposed revelation either real or imag¬ ery. Myths were means of picturing desirable results from good acts to a primitive savage people. J. S. K. In my human life I have experienced great change in view from youth to advanced adult life; and so I presume that your centuries of experience in spirit spheres enables you to discern changes in character and number quite a few in your belief of then, your human life, and what now you know. Aristotle. We do not cast aside the rudiments of our arith¬ metic; so with my teachings, I but attained the rudiments of what to you in wholeness or completeness have proved true. I grew with added knowledge to see the errors or incomplete¬ ness of my human theory; and yet to men in my time, it was new and grand, and difficult for them to understand. J. S. K. Is not mind a necessity for the functioning of soul, and like to a highly skilled workman, qualified to solve difficult problems of construction or performance; whether on the one hand it be reasoning out or developing human attributes; or on the other classifying the memory records, and the culture and development of the Divine attributes, or those attuned to the “Over-soul?” 222 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Aristotle. Mind and reason are necessities to the soul, but mind is like an organ, and reason what it does. Reason is a function of the mind, or mentality. Instinct and moral impulse are from the soul. I entertained theories founded upon very limited knowledge. As my knowledge increased my belief was changed, so that I now believe as you, that what is man is God, and so is indestructible; but it may as it advances become above or without the necessity of fixed apparent form. A body is a means of holding and withholding and as spirit becomes God¬ like, it loses the need of restraint and protection. It is true to this extent, I remain myself and on record in my memory, and recorded in fact are the feature and form I had in human life, and in after spirit state. If I materialize in any sphere. I’ll be as I was when I was native there; but when the need of doing ends, I leave my body and proceed to be, as to her now a soul set free. [Note: — At 5 P. M. the interview with Aristotle ended; and in view of all the subjects dealt with, and the time consumed, I feel it to be wise to leave to Socrates the field, to speak upon such matters as his wisdom and my requirements would suggest to him as of most advantage, in the object sought by this special session. J. S. K.] Next following is the deliverance of Socrates. Socrates. As you wish to do so do I. Socrates I am, and also here, and if when you’re away a new thought comes to you to ask a question regarding it, write it, and we will answer automatically. We all shall linger with your band, to-aid you in the work you’ve planned, and hemlock tea will not be given to thee as reward of what you do in sacrifice to men. I also know that spirits come again, and Plato is to me disciple dear, and what he wrote to you, and what you read to him I heard, for I was near to him, and also near to you. I’ll try to aid your wish to be a speaker eloquent, for to me it was like a necessity. I walked upon the shore with pebbles in my mouth, to be a means of teaching my delinquent tongue to understand it must obey my least command. Yet when I won the hemlock tea was all that fate awarded me. Yes, I still live. DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 223 and here today I have my influence; and the words I say show thought and power. ’Twas not to me a known fact that a soul could come and like to brother help me through; but I had faith and hope, and love of all humanity, and I was helped to bear the load, and aid humanity out of the rut of fixed belief in idolatry and superstition’s fear, into a way to see more clear; and later pupils taught it so, and like to river in its flow it washed away in large degree the followers or beliefs in the idolatry of period then; and made a way for souls of men to grow, though what I taught I did not know. Otelleo (an Egyptian of the long ago and member of my spirit band). Sift out the gold some men would do, but it is not the case with you. You sift the dross away from what you wrote, and all is gold, that you allow to stay. Like to a crown of gold buried for ages in the halls of'time, dust gathered clings to it, and you have made its wonders beautiful and true, and it will prove a crown to you. Precious indeed it is, and we have led you forward carefully to this its nearly completed state; and when sufficient time is passed, no longer wait but put it through, for we in thoughts are guiding you, and lighting up your veil of care, till you can see the one is there. You have selected well and true, and good will be the completion of the task for thee. I am Otelleo as you believe. CHAPTER XXV O NLY five short months have gone, since the November series of 1911; and I return wdth increased earnestness and zeal to prosecute the study of the wonderful occult problems, at a Jonson seance in Toledo. Truly impressive and important are the demonstrations of such a seance. They mark the possibilities, and develop the certainties of actual meeting of representatives of two realms of existence — the earthly and the spiritual. When I remember that over twenty years ago, a female babe was born to my then living wife and me, but passed away at birth to spirit realms, to be from care and trouble free — and few there be but would agree, that it had gone to heaven. I did not then know, that we should meet again on earth, but I do know now. The mother. May, was always of the desire and strong belief, that she would some day, when she had passed to spirit life, find her angej daughter. For the past few years she had joined me in this important work and earnest study, and with me visited during passing years, this wonderful medium Jonson, time after time; and often hoped as years rolled on to see her angel baby. On September 29, 1911, May passed out of earth life into spirit realms. In forty-five days after this change, she returned in form, and brought along with her our angel daughter, on the 13th, 15th and 16th of November, 1911; and it was in this same home, where she and I had before investigated, as will be found recorded in previous chapters. The first seance of this present April series, 1912, which I was privileged to attend, opened as a public one, on Thursday night, the 11th of April. I have quite often there, and for a long time pursued the avocation of a critical psychical researcher; and not alone but 224 DAIVN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 225 aided by my then mortal wife, and by an officer of my Society, and also by other members, have tried and tried in vain, to account by every known hypothesis, for human-like forms and features, dress, voice and conversation; and with many other natural conditions, thus coming into close communion as relatives and friends; and in full hearing and presence of all sitters for a brief time, then bidding all goodnight, disappeared as physical through their anatomical dissolution at the floor, some time to reappear. The only satisfactory hypothesis that can account for all the demonstrations here, is the one which I have, after twenty years of earnest, honesf, critical examination and careful study, fully adopted, viz.: the Spiritual Hypothesis. I found when I first came to this psychic Jonson, I was not a lone investigator; but that scores of others from far and near, not only on the American continent, but individuals from other countries too, had also sought him out, and have labored incessantly to solve the problem; and had professed belief that they could, each in his own way, and according to his ideal hypothesis. So each as he arrived proceeded to unlock the mystery, with his own magic key. Some very zealous ones would proceed to seal the window, and lock and seal the door; and be prepared for all designs of trap doors and panels, and armed with mosquito netting; and ready were for all confederates. The cabinet was in an upstair room, within it naught but a single chair; and to the critic’s surprise, the medium was not there, but sitting with the sitters in the room outside the cabinet, in full view during the seance; or while a part thereof was held. The whole most nearly resembled a friendly family circle, ready to receive the callers from spirit land; and thus time was allowed the critics to examine to their heart’s content the cabinet or room, and all else. When they were through and seated, some forms came by the way of the floor, just in front of their feet, while some came by way of the cabinet; and others from the air and room; which was so well lighted one could pick their own friends out. 226 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Just here I wish to make my statement plain, that of the expert gentlemen above alluded to was one, a National Government official of credit and renown, possessed of well known skill and high integrity. He had been deputed by those in authority to make discovery of a supposed fraud; but was soon convinced of the realty of existence, from the most critical observation and investigation, of a fact and truth that would not down, by this among many of his plans, viz.: taking a flashlight picture of an apparition standing near, he found it was a spirit relative, who there and then conversed with him, and proved he was his spirit brother; and had a transient body clothed, and conversed and answered questions, and proved his personality to his living brother; and gave testimony quite in conformity with what I have also given in previous chapters; and hence hereafter there will be no necessity for further reference in any sense to pre¬ cautions taken l)y expert researchers of different classes in the work of investigation of J. B. Jonson; and of the phenomena of physical character, whenever present at the seance. This much and more is commended to such authorities as have in past years expressed their conviction that Jonson’s phenomena were not of psychic origin, and who in an official capacity, and with authori¬ tative tone, invited him to depart. After many years of close observation and repeated investiga¬ tions, I have secured much evidence — only a portion of which I give in the psychic series of my publications — which will, I am confident, sustain the hypothesis I have adopted; and which I believe to be quite strong enough to baffle and successfully resist the ablest criticism that can be brought to bear against it, by the best qualified detective, conjurer, scientist, psychical researcher, priest or man. A Public Jonson, Seance April 11th, 1912. The medium sat on a chair in semi-circle or horse-shoe form, along with all the sitters, for a major portion of the seance. After the Lord’s prayer had been offered in unison, and the instrumental music began the harmonizing, Jonson was seen to DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 227 be in a trance state sitting. Nearly every sitter had one or two callers, and there were two apparently advanced spirit guides, one of whom was Hypatia. When advanced spirit guides appear, the room is usually lightened up by, or during their presence. There were twelve sitters in the room besides the medium Jonson, and without actual count I would estimate there were some twenty forms presented. The personality that has frequently communicated with me in broken English, through trumpets and through the Human- Psychic-Telephone in New York State, as will appear in chap¬ ters of the book elsewhere, proved then, and in that way, to have an interest in my spirit wife, as well as in myself, and showed by the language used, that he was the selfsame Indian personality, so well and widely known as chief control of J. B. Jonson, and held him thus throughout the entire seance, in a trance condition; and did not respond to the suggestion of Mrs. Jonson, “Had you not better go inside. Gray Feather?” to which he quickly replied, “No,” and waited till after he brought my wife May, who had with her, her angel daughter, two forms at once; while Jonson was still, sitting outside of the cabinet as a part of the circle. After I held my conversation with the two, they dissolved into invisible state (which is reported by the stenog¬ rapher), and as I returned to my chair in the circle, he. Gray Feather, said, “Me now go; I stay till I bring ’em two together for you. Big Chief.” One circumstance out of the ordinary that I noticed, and in which I also participated, was this. I sat at the toe of the horse¬ shoe circle, or form of sitting before the curtains of the room called cabinet, and at a point fully ten feet from them, and I as well as all the others, had some candy placed in my mouth, by the deft fingers of what had the appearance of a beautiful angel form; but without wings. (Wings are symbolical, but are not attached to bodies, nor made use of in any other way, so my spirit guide Hypatia informs me.) This angel form resorted to a humorous tantalizing manner with one or two, who sought to have her place the candy in their hand, so as to take her hand 228 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND as well. This visit was near the close; but she first appeared when the seance opened and was addressed by many sitters familiar with her appearance as being “Viola,” the control of Mrs. Jonson, who is a trumpet medium. The Stenographer's Report. Toledo, 11th April (evening), 1912. (A report of conversations had, or of words spoken, in indicated cases, at Jonson’s Seance.) Gray Feather: (Who is alleged to speak through the vocal organs of Mr. J. B. Jonson) .... “Good evening.” Members of the Circle All: “Good evening, Gray Feather.” Gray Feather: “Me glad to see big medicine man here. Me come to help you all me can. Me not say anything just right. Me only beginning.” Dr. John S. King: “It is all right. Gray Feather, and I thank you.” The form that now appears is that of the alleged spirit guide of Dr. King. She was pretty and was clothed in white flowing garments, with bright bands about the head, and sparkling jewels around her arms and neck. She came to Dr. King. Dr. King: “Hypatia, have you May with you tonight?” Hypatia: “Yes, she is here.” Dr. King: “Will you bring her to speak to me?” Hypatia: “Yes.” .... “I want you to press on and finish your book while you have your strength. There are many other writings yet to come.” (She then disappeared from view.) Dr. King: “Come again, Hypatia.” (Two other forms do now appear who are announced as Mrs. King, the Doctor’s wife, and his daughter May Donna.) Mrs. King (patting the Doctor on his left shoulder): “Johnnie dear, I love you; I love you so.” Dr. King: “Yes, yes, I know you do, and I am so glad we get a chance to talk again.” Mrs. King : “Though I am gone from earth life, yet I am with you all the time, and will be as long as you live.” DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 229 Dr. King: “Yes, yes, loved one.” Mrs. King : “I want you to finish your book, and I will give you all the information that you want. I do want you to finish your book.” (May Donna Not in Sight.) Dr. King: “Is May Donna with you now?” Mrs. King: “Yes.” (And then May Donna appears.) May Donna: “Yes, I come with mamma. We stay with you all we can.” Dr. King: “Will you sing for us tonight. May Donna?” May Donna: “I don’t know whether I can or not, but will sing for you before you leave Toledo.” Mrs. King : “I love you, my dear one. I will come again. May Donna will sing for you before you leave Toledo.” Dr. King: “Do you ever see Mabel, and your sister, is she with you?” Mrs. King: “Yes, I see Mabel often. They are both with me.” Dr. King : “Will you try and get a message for me from Mabel for her father, or send it to him?” Mrs. King (again patting the Doctor on the shoulder) says, “I love you, dear one.” Dr. King: “Yes, I know you do.” Mrs. King: “Good-bye.” Doctor: “Good-bye, dear.” [Note: — May Donna was rather below medium height—had golden hair and curls — gold bands about head and neck, and arms bare, and flowing draperies were worn.] (A form now appears of an elderly man with a long, heavy white beard, who appeared to be familiar to all the sitters, and was greeted by them as Dr. Sharp, who is the alleged control of Mrs. Wriedt.) Dr. King: “Good evening. Dr. Sharp, I’m pleased to meet you again.” Dr. Sharp: “I’m glad to see you here.” Dr. King: “I’m always glad to see and meet you.” Dr. Sharp : “I am the control of Mrs. Wriedt, who will shortly 230 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND cross the ocean for a time, and I will not soon have the oppor¬ tunity of meeting you again. I wanted to call and say that the ones who have passed away are all in sympathy with your work; and they will aid you all the time.” Dr. King: “I thank you very much.” Dr. Sharp: “Mrs. King is a member of my band, and we all work for you.” Dr. King: “I understand.” Dr. Sharp : “There are many others who wish to appear so I must go now,” and he then disappeared from view. Gray Feather: “I do as I said: I bring them as I said I would.” Dr. King: “Yes, Gray Feather, and I thank you.” (Sgd.) Minnie Noble, Stenographer. State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. (Sgd.) A, H. Peiter, Notary Public. [Note: —The foregoing appearance of Dr. Sharp is one of several referred to in the attached article, which appeared in “Light,” of London, England, over three years later. J. S. K.] “THE DIRECT VOICE. A Correlation. By Vice-Admiral Usborne Moore.” (From “Light,” of July 10, 1915.) “The best evidence that can be put forward of the existence and identity of a spirit is afforded by correlations, i. e., when a spirit is able to manifest in one place and then tell someone in another place, through another medium, where he has been and what he has said or who was present. When this takes place in two different countries with different sitters it is more satis¬ factory than when it occurs only in two cities of the same country or to the same sitter. I have experienced these correlations very DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 231 often in the United States and three or four times between the United States and England. I cannot, however, remember ever having such a clean-cut or convincing example as that which I am now going to relate. In December, 1914, the Editor of Light received a letter from Dr. John S. King, the well-known physician and psychic investi¬ gator in Toronto, Canada, telling him that “Dr. Sharp,” the spirit guide, or “control,” of Mrs. Wriedt, had spoken to him and others at certain meetings in Toronto in November. No one knows better than Dr. King the rules of the game. He does not give away details; he only mentions one item of “Sharp’s” talk — that he had first visited him on a night when he (Dr. King) had delivered an address, when he “came over from Dover.” Enclosed in the letter was some corroborative evidence of one of those present at the Toronto seances and a narrative, also testified to, a sitting with J. B. Jonson at Toledo, Ohio, on which occasion “Dr. Sharp” had materialized and spoken to him. The ladies of the society at Toronto (not named) were much inter¬ ested and had asked Dr. King to write to England and ascertain if “Dr. Sharp” would corroborate the fact of his having visited their circle; it was known by some that Mrs. Wriedt was in England. The Editor waited a few weeks for an opportunity of seeing Mrs. Wriedt. None having occurred he wrote to me on February 13th, asking if I would investigate the matter. I received this note, enclosing Dr. King’s letter, at breakfast on Sunday, Febru¬ ary 14th, at my club, skimmed over it, put it in my pocket, and immediately after breakfast went to Mrs. Wriedt, with whom I had an appointment at 10.15. I did not mention the letters to Mrs. Wriedt. In a few minutes we went into the seance room. “Dr. Sharp” soon made his presence known and the following colloquy took place: — Question : “Have you been over to Canada within the last three months?” Answer ; “Do you mean to ‘Paul’?” (“Paul” is the pseudonym of a Canadian gentleman who has contributed under that name to Light and who is known to me and “Dr. Sharp.”) Q.: “No, somebody else.” A.: “I went to Dr. John King at a seance where there was a man-medium for the voice. I wish you to write to Dr. King and tell him from me that medium is quite genuine. A number of people were there; among them Mrs. Calvert and Mrs. Sales —(spelling) CALVERT.” 232 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Q.: “How do you spell ‘Sales’?” A.: “I forget. We went over a bridge to get to the seance- room. It was Toronto, Canada. The people asked after Mrs. Wriedt and they asked after you. They were anxious to know if it was me speaking and wanted this to be confirmed in Eng¬ land. Tell Dr. King his wife spoke to him, and his little girl was sitting on his knee.” Q.: “Can you give the date ?” A.: “No; I can’t remember dates.” Q.: “Have you manifested to Dr. King through J. B. Jonson at Toledo?” A.: “I most certainly have, and through other mediums. I am very pleased to meet Dr. King, as he has done so much for the cause. I wish you to tell Dr. King that I was the first person to introduce phenomenal mediumship into Canada.” (“Dr. Sharp” did not volunteer anything about a lecture or an address.) On the following morning I had an opportunity to speak to “Dr. Sharp” again. I said, “The paper from Toronto said that you told the people you had come from Dover. What is the meaning of this? Is it a mistake?” “No mistake at all,” he replied, emphatically. “I was at Dover, or near Dover, in a hospital ship, looking after the wounded. I was hovering about between Southampton, Folkestone and Dover in the hospital ships, and I was nearest to Dover at the time when I left to visit Canada.” All this was sent to Dr. King at Toronto, and in course of time he sent me an account of his seances. One of them was on November 18th when “Dr. Sharp” informed him that he had come over for the first time from Dover on the night of Dr. King’s address, November 14th. Dr. King goes on to say: On November 19, 1914, a seance was held at the house of Mr. and Mrs. Julian Sales in Rosedale, a residential part of the city, by the same medium, and twenty-six sitters were present, including Mrs. Calvert. In order to go to this seance we had to cross a ravine, with a roadway below at the distance of 120 ft. / inquired after Mrs. Wriedt, and you were inquired after by Mrs. Calvert and, I think, by one other. (The italics are mine.) Want of space prevents me from quoting the whole of Dr. King’s interesting letter to me, but he mentions that his deceased wife did speak to him at this and all his other seances; that his daughter’s presence was felt by him, and that the medium was a man-medium for the direct voice, a Mr. Burroughs, who was placed under the strictest test conditions. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 233 I have never been to Toronto. Though I have heard of him from W. T. Stead and others, I have not yet had the pleasure of meeting Dr. King and I do not recollect ever hearing or seeing the name of Calvert, in connection with Canadian atfairs, before this incident. Mrs. Wriedt is acquainted with Toronto and knows Dr. King and Mrs. Calvert, but she did not hear of the November seances till my talk with “Dr. Sharp” on February 14th; and, even if she had, it would not account for “Dr. Sharp’s” loud and clear utterance on that day in a London flat. Nothing is more certain than that “Dr. Sharp,” though working with and assisting Mrs. Wriedt, is an independent personality.” CHAPTER XXVI T O me this seance was more realistic than the previous one, as I seemed to see and hear much more distinctly, than in the first or public seance, though not so well as in the November series. When my spirit wife stood at the open¬ ing of the curtains, in the doorway of the room, called cabinet, I took my stand on her left hand, and she close to my right shoulder; and I saw her bring our spirit daughter close to her right side. I standing thus, and my stenographer opposite to me, enabled her to write by the light on the opposite wall, and still, not prevent its slightly shaded or diminished rays from falling directly on presenting forms. 'As our conversation proceeded, and seemed so true to life, my thoughts reverted to the falling clods of earth upon the coffin in the tomb, containing the corrupt¬ ible body; while I stood in the living presence of my loved one, who had put on the transient body and exhibited her living duplicate, with mirrored likeness of features and familiar voice, for this occasion; and then conversed with me, as in the home, to prove her human personality. Her form all could see, and her voice all could hear; and having lived the mortal life, she had entered upon the spiritual one and yet was present here with me. And thus I find that life’s experience, as matured by age, but verifies the early intuitions of my boyhood days. (See Chap¬ ter I.) The thought does now present most strongly, that mortal life is short, and but a time for preparation for the perfecting one, known as the immortal. As I have so recently dealt with her presentment to my normal senses, as found in Chapter XX, I will conclude this introduction to the Stenographer’s report, by directing special attention to a very strong evidential matter of more than passing moment. While I stood listening to her language, and viewing her placid smile of satisfaction, and also speaking with my daughter, I felt May’s fingers pulling at my 234 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 235 scarf-pin; and her eyes directed towards it. It seemed as if she were trying to test it, whether securely retained or not, for last 12th of November, at the first seance with Mrs. Wriedt, the trumpet medium, she asked me most decidedly to have her single diamond ring made over into a scarf pin; but to be sure and use a “safety” pin so as not to lose it. Again at the fourth seance of the series, held at Jonson’s on the 15th of November, 1911 the stenographer reported what here follows, viz.; “The diamond I want you, as soon as you go home, to have set as a scarf pin. Be carefid and zuatch where you take it, do you understand? and zvhen you wear it, it will make it easier for me to come near to you.” (See Chapter XVI, No. 11.) These facts she had retained in memory {she and none other) and now sought to satisfy herself by reason, and by examination, of the security or safety of the pin’s attachment. When she found it all secure, and worn as she had requested, she looked me in the eyes and said, “You used to be so proud of me, when I was wearing it, and so I am most glad to know you wear it now.” The Stenographer's Report. Toledo, 15th April, 1912. (A report of conversations held, or of words spoken in indicated cases at Jonson Seance.) Gray Feather (who is alleged to speak through the vocal organs of Mr. Jonson), after greeting other members of the circle, says; “Me glad to see big Medicine Man here.” Dr. King ; “Thank you. Gray Feather, I’m glad to be here, too.” Two forms now appear which are claimed to be the author’s spirit wife and daughter. Mrs. King; “I am so glad to see you tonight, Johnnie dear.” Dr. King ; “My, you do look so well; and May Donna, you’re here, too!” May Donna; “Yes, papa.” Mrs. King; “It seems as though-” Dr. King; “Yes.” Mrs. King: “It seems as though my love grows fonder ever 236 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND since we have parted, my dear Johnnie. How happy we will be when the time comes, when you come with me.” Dr. King : “I have missed you.” Mrs. King : “And, my dear Johnnie, I want you to have every¬ thing ready, so that you will be prepared when I come for you.” Dr. King: “Yes, but I have more work to do yet?” Mrs. King: “Yes, that is what I want you to do. I love you so much. You were so good to me through my sickness.” Dr. King: “No more than I ought to have been.” Mrs. King : “If it had not been for you hanging to me, I never would have lived so long as I did.” Dr. King: “I know, my dear.” Mrs. King : “Never mind, my dear Johnnie, there will be one time when we will meet, never more to part.” Dr. King: “Yes.” Mrs. King : “I am so glad you have come. Doctor.” Dr. King : “My dear one! I am so delighted that you are able to come so soon and do so well.” Mrs. King: “Yes, I want you to give me strength.” Dr. King : “Draw all the strength that you can from me. Tell me how I can help you.” (Here she noticed pin worn by Dr. King made from Mrs. King’s ring.) “You used to be so proud of me when I wore it.” Dr. King: “That’s right, I did. You will come again before I leave Toledo, won’t you?” Mrs. King (turning to stenographer) : “And I want to thank you, and I want you (looking at the Doctor) to be good to her. Do all you can for everybody. You will get a star in your crown for it, my dear Johnnie.” [Note: — Before leaving the Doctor she showed her warm affection by patting him gently on his shoulder, and smoothing his hair with her fingers, and kissing him audibly, twice on his right cheek, bade him good-bye, and disappeared from sight.] The next form appearing for the Doctor claimed to be that of his father. Dr. King: “I am so glad to see you, father.” DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 237 Stephen King: “I have tried so hard to talk to you,” Dr. King: “You are doing fine for the first time.” (First time with Jonson.) Stephen King : “This is not the first time I have tried; this is the first time I have succeeded, in Jonson’s seance.” Dr. King : “I am so proud of that.” Stephen King : “It gives me more confidence.” Dr. King : “You will come again.” Stephen King: “I will try,” Dr. King: “Good-bye, good-bye.” (Sgd.) Minnie Noble, Stenographer. State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo this 20th day of April, 1912. (Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, Notary Public. CHAPTER XXVII J WAS again honored as in November last, with an invitation from the “Sunflower Class,” and hence the third seance of the April series was held with excellent conditions. The reason for this courtesy, as last time explained, was due to the fact of my being an officer of the Canadian Society for Psychical Research; and conditions certainly specially favored me at this time, as in addition to my own guide Hypatia, my spirit wife May, and my daughter, there were also my spirit mother Margaret P.; who came in company with my father Stephen King, who formerly lived with me in Toronto. Besides these were other three, a Mr. Hill, the silent boy, and a third one called himself Mac¬ Donald, and two unrecognized. The lighted room was changed more frequently, in the degree of light, than previously, and especially was it observed when advanced spirits came, the more advanced the brighter was the light, while some required the darker stage to form their body and to move about. All seemed to realize a fine condition of harmony; and it was perhaps singular, that forms did appear for a longer time. The more important evidential matters that are here noted have reference to the promises which have been made by Hypatia and my wife on various occasions regarding their appearance with me, and with other spirit forms upon the photographic plates which are promised in the not distant future. This was again alluded to at this appearance, and a strong desire expressed, to make it all a grand success for evidential purposes. The Stenographer’s Report. Toledo, 16th April, 1912. (A report of conversations held or of words spoken in indicated cases at Jonson’s Seance.) Gray Feather: Greets Gathering. Sitters: “How do you do. Gray Feather?” 238 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 239 Gray Feather: “Me do all right. Me talk to big Medicine Man. Me feel bad canoe (Titanic) went down. Me talk to him (Stead) many times. Me often been at his wigwam.” (Refers to Titanic disaster, and loss of Stead; and to speaking through trumpet in Stead’s home.) Dr. King: “Yes, Gray Feather, that’s right.” Gray Feather: “He comes over where I am. That not sad. There is much work to do. He not finish work. That is what is sad. It’s bad when you no finish what you do.” The next form to appear announces herself as Mrs. King, the Doctor’s wife. She strokes the Doctor’s hair, and kisses him. He gives her a rose and asks her if she would like some perfume which he had previously bought for her, but which she had never received owing to her having passed away at that time. Mrs. King: “Like you used to give me?” Dr. King: “Yes. Shall I bring it with me? I have it here at the hotel.” Mrs. King: “Yes.I want you to have picture of me as I am, at Chicago.” Dr. King: “Yes.” Mrs. King: “I will try and come with some of the guides.” Dr. King here asks Mrs. King if he will send a rose to May Donna, and she replies: “Let her come and get it. It teaches her to larger grow. Every time that you come it seems to give new force.” Two forms now appear who claim to be the father and mother of Dr. King. The Doctor does not at first recognize his father, who keeps plucking at his coat-sleeve to attract his attention. Not much conversation is carried on, but the form claiming to be the Doctor’s father intimates that he approves of the work upon which the Doctor is now engaged, and the Doctor thanks him. After Mrs. King (Doctor’s mother) had received a pink rose from the Doctor they disappear from view. Here a form appears claiming to be May Donna, the Doctor’s daughter. She greets the Doctor as “Papa.” Dr. King : “And you came without your mother tonight ?” May Donna: “Yes.” 240 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Dr. King presented her with a rose, which after receiving she holds out for the stenographer to smell. Dr. King: “Will you sing for us tonight?” May Donna: “I don’t think I can tonight, papa. I will try some time, but not tonight. I am so happy. . . . And this little girl is helping you so much” (turning to stenographer). Dr. King : “I was going to ask your mamma to send a message to Minnie, the housekeeper who looks after me.” May Donna: “Yes.Your guide Hypatia is here. Good-bye,” and she disappears. She also kissed Dr. King. Form claiming to be Dr. King’s guide now appears. She is dressed in white garments, low neck and short sleeves (Grecian costume). She walks out to the middle of the room, courtesys to all; and retires behind the curtains, where she holds conversa¬ tion with the Doctor. She is accompanied by a somewhat similar form, who also claims to be a guide. Hypatia : “I want you to give your dear wife all the strength you can.” Dr. King presents Hypatia with rose which she takes away with her. Hypatia: “With your pictures you will have success.” Dr. King: “Yes, yes.” Hypatia: “And we will appear.” She then disappears from view. Form now appears who claims to be MacDonald by name. MacDonald: “The good book that you are writing, I am interested in. I take a great interest in all that is good. I will help you all that I can. I think we can be of great assistance.” A form now comes who, when asked by the Doctor if he is Hill, a person known to the Doctor in a business way, says he is. Dr. King: “Well, then I have a message for you. Can you take it and read it and let me have your answer before I leave Toledo?” (Hands him paper.) Mr. Hill: “I will try if possible.” In all there were eight forms who appeared for the Doctor, DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 241 one of whom was a little boy who was not recognized by him. (See Chapters XII, XIV and XXXL) (Sgd.) Minnie Noble, Stenographer. State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. (Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, Notary Public. CHAPTER XXVIII C ONDITIONS at this, the fourth and last seance of the April series, were most harmonious, and more interesting and important than any which preceded it among the series. There were several guides of sitters present, and features quite a few; and all of the dozen sitters seemed to have evidence to them satisfactory. Singing by my daughter was predicted on 20th February, 1912, by her mother, May, in a written message through the automatic writing psychic, “Our daughter has the power of song; and I am told that she will later come to you .... and her voice to you will be apparent.” May Donna herself likewise promised at the first seance of the present series, held on the evening of 11th of April, as did her mother, May, that she would sing for me before I would leave Toledo. During the present seance, stenographically reported, I had joy and satisfac¬ tion in the fulfillment of May’s prediction, and May Donna’s promise, when the latter walked out alone into the circle from the cabinet, and sang most sweetly the well-known selection which is as reported by the stenographer. My brother, David Williams King, also wrote through the New York psychic on the 10th of April, 1912, to say: “When you are there at Jonsons, please look for me, and father Stephen too;’’ and when I complied with the suggestion, I again found fulfillment of prediction, and this zvas what my brother, standing in his transient body, said to me: “It is with great pleasure that I return to you. Death does not end all.’’ Though father was present with my brother — as the latter previously predicted he would be — he consumed no time in speak¬ ing, evidently due, as after realized, to the power being required for the singing by my daughter, the first attempt of William T. Stead to materialize, and other features for other sitters. As to May, she is all the time in evidence, as anyone who follows her throughout the various recent records, can satisfy their curiosity by tracing. 242 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 243 Again I assert, and I fear no successful contradiction, all the foregoing is more evidence, presented to sustain my contention, that continuity is a fact, and Spirit return can no longer be disputed; and that those who can see and hear, can do as I have done, and for themselves be as well convinced, as I have been. As usual I have only retained for publication my own cases, of satisfactory and continued evidential matter, all ending in a most wonderful demonstration of spirit power, which, though belonging to this chapter, will be made a continuance of the seance, though incorporated in Chapter XXX, in connection with the associate communications, alleged to be signed and sent from W. T. Stead. (See Chapter XXX, which is wholly devoted to him. See also Chapter XXXI, and the remaining ones.) This seance, held on 18th April, 1912, closed with this sudden mani¬ festation, and its dissolution. The Stenographer’s Report. Toledo, April 18, 1912. (A report of conversations held or of words spoken in indicated cases at Jonson’s Seance.) Gray Feather (who is alleged to speak through Jonson’s vocal organs), greets gathering. Circle: “How do you do. Gray Feather!’’ Form reappears claiming to be that of Dr. King’s wife. He asks her if she will send a message to Minnie, the housekeeper at his home in Toronto. She responds: “Give her my love and tell her how I have come, and how I have talked, dear Johnnie. Tell her not to worry about me, that I am happy, and it only keeps me back for them to worry about me.” Here Dr. King asks the form presenting if she can take his ring and return it to him in the near future, to which she replies: “I will try.” Dr. King: “This is for ‘Babe’,” and puts ring on finger. Mrs. King: “Yes, dear Johnnie.” Dr. King: “I didn’t bring the perfume. It was so awkward, I thought I would let you take my ring. Take it and give it to me another time.” 244 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Dr. King: “Is May Donna going to sing for us tonight?” Mrs. King: “Yes. (Turning to stenographer) Now I want you to get every word of it. She sings beautifully.” Mrs. King (to Dr. King): “I don’t want you to stay away so long. I want you to come, so that we can talk. When you get your book finished, I want you to come so as to give me a chance to develop. I want you to come to mediums anywhere so that I can talk to you.” (Here says she will come again and with “Good-bye” dis¬ appears.) Here form appears who claims to be Hypatia, the Doctor’s guide. She walks out into the circle, courtesys and retires partially behind the curtain, where she holds the following conversation: “We have got a certain portion of strength that is necessary for the pictures, and I think now that the vibration is as it is, this would be the best time for you to go for the pictures — I think about Saturday, for the strength is very strong at present, and I am afraid if you sat in many more circles, you would not be able to get the results you would just now.” Dr. King : “I see, I want to ask you one question. Will Mr. Stead be able to come tonight, and talk?” Hypatia intimates that she cannot tell for certain. Dr. King now asks if he shall make public messages which he has received from Mr. Stead and she replies: “Say nothing until it all appears in the book.” Dr. King: “That is all right.” Hypatia: “And I want you to give your wife all the strength you can, for you know how she and you loved to be together.” Dr. King: “Well, how can I?” Hypatia : “I want you to give her every opportunity to return, for you know that is all she cares for.” Dr. King : “And shall I leave on Saturday and go to Chicago ?” Hypatia: “Yes, yes, and all others will be there. Everything will be satisfactory for you when you reach there.” Dr. King : “That is good.” Hypatia: “For I have things so arranged. ... I will not DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 245 be able to do and explain things as I will when I reach Chicago with you. I will have everything shown plainly there for you, so that you will be able to understand it and have it all on paper at once.” Dr. King: “Yes, will you show yourself to the others once more ?” Hypatia : “I will talk to you or write to you, and I do not want you to stay away from some medium of whom you will hear; I think that she (Mrs. King) will return again tonight, seeing that you will not be here again. Good-night.” Here form appears claiming to be May Donna, the Doctor’s daughter, and greets the Doctor as “Papa,” advancing out into the circle. May Donna : “Mamma is here tonight.” Dr. King; “Mother and daughter.” May Donna, having advanced just inside of the circle, now sings: “Holy, Holy, Holy, Lord God Almighty, All Thy works shall praise Thy name In earth and sky and sea,” etc. (All of the Anthem.) May Donna: “Is this not grand tonight?” Dr, King here introduces Mrs. King to an acquaintance, who says: “I am glad to meet you.” May Donna and Mrs. King both kiss Doctor King. May Donna : “Mamma and I will be right with you, when you go away,” and the two forms disappear. Form now appears claiming to be David (David Williams King), brother of Dr. King. Dr. King greets him and says: “I will tell Sam that you were here, and that we talked.” Brother: “Yes, I am your dear brother.” Dr. King: “Will you go on the picture?” Brother; “I will try.” Dr. King; “Yes.” Brother ; “It is with great pleasure that I return to you. Death does not end all.” (Here form disappears from view.) Just before the closing of the seance a form appeared who advanced to the middle of the room with arms extended. Several 246 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND of the sitters alleged that it was the form of Mr. W. T. Stead, who was drowned recently. After coming to the centre of the room in the direction of Dr. King, he slowly backed toward the curtains and disappeared. (During seance one form appeared who was not recognized by the Doctor, it being that of a man.) See Chapter XXXI, 19th June, 1912. (Sgd.) Minnie Noble, Stenographer. State of Ohio, Lucas County, U. S. Subscribed and sworn to before me, a notary public in and for Lucas County, Ohio, at Toledo, this 20th day of April, 1912. (Sgd.) A. H. Peiter, Notary Public. Corroborating Testimony Regarding Author’s Mother as Received from a Friend. “Toronto, 24th July, 1912. “Dear Doctor King: What I am writing I have given to you before, and referred to many times, and spoken of with others, but as you have asked me for my written statement of facts, I give it as it impressed me deeply years ago, and was remembered. Hoping you will excuse my composition, and as it is the facts you want. I’ll give you them correctly. While spending two weeks’ vacation, in the month of August, 1901, at the spiritual camp meeting, held in Lily Dale, New York State, one evening I attended one of Mrs. Effie Moss’ materializa¬ tion seances. After several materialized forms had appeared, and were recognized by their friends, I was called up to the cabinet and I went, wondering who it could be who wanted me. I waited perhaps a minute when the curtains parted, and there stood a stately lady whom I did not recognize. She stood looking at me, for several seconds, first stroking one hand, and then the other, as any person would do when putting on kid gloves. I watched her movements, and wondered why she did not speak. I thought DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 247 perhaps she could not speak until I spoke to her. I then said, is there anything the matter with your hands? as I could only see the tips of her fingers, as she had white lace mitts on. She said no, and extended her hand to shake hands with me, and said, “How do you do. Miss Donaldson, I am Mother King, mother of Dr. John S. King, of Toronto, Canada.” I then said, “Oh, indeed, I am very pleased to meet and welcome you here.” She again spoke and said: “Yes, I am very pleased to meet you, and I want you to take a good look at me, so you can tell my boy, and he will know it was me.” She stroked one side of her head several times, which I took notice of, and saw a dark spot on the side of the forehead, near the temple. She next asked me this question: “Will you carry a message to my boy, for he is hungry for this knowledge concerning me.” I told her that I would be very pleased to carry any message to him, she would give me. She said, “Tell him that yesterday, after hearing that you were in Lily Dale, he went in his office, sat down in his chair, and said, “Mother, if you are here now, will you please go to Lily Dale, and find Miss Donaldson and send me a message by her?” Tell my boy when you go home, that I was there, by his side when he spoke, and tell him, I started right away for Lily Dale, and had quite a time to find you; but as I heard you were going to attend this circle tonight, I came and here I am.” She gave me other messages to convey to you on arriving home. When I got home I sent word to you to call and see me, which you did as you doubtless remember. This is what you said to me when you called: “You have been to Lily Dale. I wonder if you have brought a message to me?” I told you I had some messages for you from your mother. I first asked you the ques¬ tion : “Did you on a certain day send out a thought, or ask your mother to go to Lily Dale, and find me, and send a message by me?” You said, “I did.” I then told you how your mother had materialized, and gave me a message for you, and that she had asked me to give it to you. 248 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND I asked you if you knew why your mother wore those lace mitts on her hands. You then exclaimed, “That was Mother sure, for she had rheumatism in her hands, the joints were swollen, she always wore mitts or gloves on her hands when receiving callers, because of unsightly joints.” Then I further asked you, what did it mean about stroking the side of her head, and the dark bruise on it, and you told me she had fallen down the cellar steps, striking her head against the stone wall, which was the cause of her death, before next morning, all of which was news to me, for I had never heard the cause of her passing out. Yours in truth, (Sgd.) M. A. Donaldson.” Evidential Matter Relating to Family History, and All Names and Relationships Correctly Stated. In The Progressive Thinker, published on the 20th July, 1912, at Chicago, and for which I am a subscriber, I found the follow¬ ing message intended for me, in the columns devoted to messages, which come through the psychic Maggie Waite, and are published weekly, viz.: “For Dr. John S. King, of Toronto, Canada.—am Grand¬ father Hess, and I am bringing his Grandmother Alice Taylor King and her husband, James, with me. He says that she is with Stephen and Margaret many times — that is his father and mother. We visit you all on earth as we go to see each other in earth life. I am glad that John is engaged in the good work he is doing. He knew the truth for many a day, but he had to hide his light for a long time under a bushel, but every¬ thing is harmonious now, and I often go into your home with the rest of the friends that are here. I just thought I would drop into this place and send a little word to you all. Don’t think I am idle in this life. I am busier than I was in earth life, and Daddy Hess was always thought an active and busy person. Well, Toronto has got woke up the last fifteen years. The truth will crawl in everywhere without asking anyone’s DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 249 permission. The rest of the folks are here with me, but I am the spokesman on this occasion and the rest can come some other time and do their own talking. Good-bye for this time, but keep on working for the truth.” [Note: — I have acknowledged to The Progressive Thinker, and now do so to the readers of my book, the correctness of the names and the relationships of all who are mentioned in the message. My work to which he alludes is evidently the prepara¬ tion for publication of this book. He also speaks truly when he says, I knew the truth for many a day, but had to hide my light, for a long time, under the bushel. It is also true that he was called Daddy Hess by everybody over sixty years ago. He and his family connections were widely known as U. E. Loyalists. It must be nearly sixty years since he passed to spirit realms, after a mortal life of 97 years. What hypothesis can best account for all the facts as given? Methinks it is the spiritual one, for I don’t see how one can adjust another to fit the facts in this case. J. S. K.] CHAPTER XXIX [Note: — The reader, to appreciate their full import, should halt, and read Chapters XII and XXIX consecutively. The former is by the author ; and the latter, the response, is by his spirit wife. The rhyming, grammar, words and sentences are shaped by the instrument (the medium), but not by her normal self. It matters not what personality makes use of her, it rhymes when read, and is euphonious.] M y beloved ‘Johnnie.’ — It is to me a delight, to be able to write my answer as the Key that has unlocked the mystery. As to the Ante-mortem Agreement Conditions that favored psychic results, I have this to say, I remember it all, as I do our wedding day; and all the bliss of human harmony that you, my loving husband, gave to me. One cannot change himself into a tone of thought, until he thinks it out, in his own way; and I was born with prejudices strong, that were as part of me; and like a bending in a tree, I had to change these in a gradual way. I thought of you as changed, in love for me, and following a myth, and bringing to the ground, the garments beautiful of scholarly attainment, and good repute, that you through many years in your town had gained. It was to me a woe, a dreadful woe, that you were thus inclined to go where deceivers were, in every key, as it was talked by others, and told to me. I wished to snatch you from the burning, so I thought it best to wish you not to go, for I believed the love you had for me, would keep you from your downfall permanently. And when you ceased to go, I felt at rest; and still I wondered if I did the right; or was I doing ill, and was it all the best; and was it right if it was true, to thus withhold that which you loved, from you. I asked about the subject everywhere, and seeds that you had planted, grew in me, till I with my own wish began to wish tO' know if after death we live, was so. I thought if it is true, my Johnnie boy and I could both this truth 250 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 251 enjoy; and that is why I bade you go to centre of the spiritualistic thought; and be able with me to hear and see, and in all of it feel quite free to say, it is so, or is not; or I cannot it so see, or this thing thus appears to me. I had a wish to know, if from the sky my sister Gertie and our daughter dear could really come, and to ourselves appear. I gleaned with you along this open plain, and hoped with you that I might also gain, the very knowledge that would be able to bind us two eternally. As ill health came, I clung more strong to planks of truth, that came along, into my power to touch ; and so I gathered knowl¬ edge here and there; and thinking earnestly and honestly, I said if ever I am taken I will do the things that I have promised you — come back and write, and speak, and be as much as possible in touch with thee. My death was like a restful sleep, I lay upon my bed and hardly did I realize that fate had cut the thread that severed me my one love free, from thy kind presence ever dear, faithful and sweet, and ever to me near. I felt alone, bereft upon a mountain bare. I could not find contentment anywhere. I love my ‘Johnnie’ only, I would say. I do not love the beauties of this way of living here. Thy guardian Electra, stays with me, Saphrona and another also here Hypatia, your mother aided by many who are known to you, pass from me, dear one, now, to you, so I have from this knowledge comforts not a few, and I have gained in spirit growth, from seeds planted by you. If I had not this ‘blessed power,’ I don’t know what I’d do, to be on this side alone and not go back to you. But as it is I’m happy, and patiently I wait till your time comes to join me in this second living state. Light is my path, the way is bright, and many beauties throng my sight, and I have much I wish to do, but greatest pleasure is to go to you. When I had learned that I was really dead, that body dear to me lay silent ever more, that locked to me was every mortal door, and spirit ever more I was to be. how grateful was I, my beloved, then to know that you so "honest in your love and true, were a believer in this truth now bright. What had appeared a stigma 252 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND in my sight, was now the door ajar to me; and angel songs afar might be if I could go again to thee. He is prepared I told the angels near, and he will joyful be to hear and see. Please therefore tell the how to me. The guardians listened to my prayer, and told me you were praying too; and shortly I was then allowed to go dear heart to you. I grow, I lean upon this staff of truth, to me it grows more stable and strong as time goes on; and every time I may do so, I do as far as possible the thing that I have promised you. I call you ‘Jobnnie Boy,’ I reach with loving hand for every blossom of this truth you gain; and I will be one to rejoice with every living mortal brain, that walks through critic’s thorny path, and prejudices’ bitter hate, until at last they gain this height, that God has granted me; and learn to know that this is true, their friends may grow to be able to come to them again, and make their personality and loved forms of expression true, with them to be. When this the truth is to them known, and its laws properly obeyed, — tho we cannot come without a human aid — we sweep the heavens’ golden shore of every sand of hope, and treasure it to brighten those who still remain in this. My husband is to me as dear as he was in earth life. I lived in pain and woe. All that I do is to him dear, and I use instruments whene’er I can, and try to bring him cheer. / try to ope his spirit eye and ear, so he shall he though still in life a spirit free, able to sense me, as I living be, across the gulf of death unfathomed and unknown, to many men a terror like a mighty sea, that takes their friends from them to he, hidden forever in its mystery. Lost in the tomb in final sleep, in silence ever more, how many living loving dead would touch the portal closed of those who weep; 'and lift the pall a curtain to the heaven shore, and prove they may come back once more, if friends would learn to ope the door. But when the bands of angel hands, aid the enlightened mind to see that we are but transplanted flowers which grow in more perfect degree; when thoughts as things completed be, and we come back our friends to see. When men believe that this is true, how great the benefit, how new the good DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 253 to all. How shallow then will seem the pall, that of the body, covers all. I lift the curtain of the dreaded grave, and glancing back across the life of me, see that it all zvas planned as best, and / am happy here, and am in harmony and joy, because I may communicate zvith my dear ‘Johnnie boy.’ One may endeavor every way, and gain but smallest crumb of hope; but climb as I in life did do, till angels point the way to you. I kneel and pray to Highest Deity, to aid me in my powers to do, till I may come to our own home, and show ‘Johnnie Boy,’ to you; whatever is the best for me, I take it as a remedy. I realize that I am here, that I am loved by faces sweet, that I am aided everywhere, to make my wishes here complete; and though I feel it when I cannot do, I grateful am that I was taught, before I fell asleep, that life continues ever more; and I may make your last years sweet, and aid you in your efforts to bless other men, as this truth blesses you and myself too. Like to photography each demonstration be, and if a little error, or a little change, is made in light or chemical upon the plate, nothing will come into the human view. Whatever is is fight, and right in end shall win, and after it has won, the truth triumphant is to stand, with wands of peace on every hand; and you shall echo forth from every land, because of this true history, men have unlocked the greatest mystery. May E. King." The foregoing was written May 4th, 1912. To her this was my acknowledgement. “To ‘Babe’ : — My loved one now in spirit realm. While thanking you for many words of cheer, in many messages, through trumpet and through automatic hand, as well as while in your transient body, many times and dates at Jonson’s, I truly now relieve you, for you’ve kept your promise, and thus redeemed your Bond. ‘The Gem of Truth’ for zvhich zve searched together, has nozv been found; and zve can surely claim in fact, as zvell as name, 254 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND to have demonstrated to mankind, that there is continuity of life, as well as terrestrial and celestial intercommunication. John S. King.” [Note: — Read November, 1911, and April, 1912, series and Chapter XX.] CHAPTER XXX [Stead’s picture, made by spirit artists in natural life coloring, about three-quarters life size, immediately before that of Hypatia, on the 27th of April, 1912, in the presence of the Bangs sisters, in the city of Chicago; also in the author’s presence, on a base selected by him, was completed in a trifle less than fifteen minutes. The figure was dressed as he first appeared at the Jonson seance, soon after that of Hypatia, on the 18th April, 1912. The selection of the base, and the subsequent developments, were similar to those in the case of Hypatia. J. S. K.] I T may be mentioned here, that in the early messages received by me after the Titanic disaster — selections from which will be found recorded in this chapter — that Hypatia, an advanced intelligence, made known to me, that she along with Julia Ames and Stead’s son, Otelleo and other guides, escorted Stead’s spirit from the sea to the psychic instrument, in New York State, where he was enabled to communicate with me, and he (Stead) also so states to me. To the reader’s mind the thought will readily occur, when Julia Ames, the guide of Stead, would naturally be there on the scene, why was Hypatia there as well? Be it remembered from reading Chapter VIII that Hypatia had previously in Stead’s own home, communicated with him, in response to my request. Be it also remembered that Hypatia con¬ stantly communed with me through the “Human-Psychic-Tele¬ phone” (the New York psychic) ; and what more natural then, than for Hypatia to aid Stead, to a satisfying state of continued existence, and an opportunity to prove the same; and demonstrate his ability to communicate with the writer, his corresponding pen friend, for he had in life promised me to aid to prove these very conditions ? Whatsoe’er the view that anyone may take, I hope to prove it clear, by his own evidence, which I have been enabled to accumulate, that Stead himself, in my judgment, well estab¬ lished continuity, return and communion. 255 256 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND I never met William T. Stead in life, nor did I ever see him, or hear him speak. However some years ago I became interested in his attitude towards the spiritual philosophy; and he having learned of psychical research-work, wrote requesting me to endeavor to secure the consent of a famous American psychic (Jonson) to visit England, to afford himself and others similar opportunity to that which I had enjoyed, of studying the wonder¬ ful phenomena of a physical and psychical character. In my effort I failed, but it led to a cordial corresponding friendship, which existed up to the time of the Titanic disaster. Much of the evidence is too voluminous to find place in this chapter; but I may briefly refer to it, and can produce it as received by me when in writing. I will indicate briefly the evidence of various kinds. I have in all received over seventy written messages signed by Stead. These came from different sources, and are modified in expression, by the psychic through whom they are produced. As the mould-board of a plow shapes each furrow, no matter what man guides the plow; so no matter who the writer may be that uses a particular psychic, a certain characteristic is made manifest. This, however, does not nullify the thoughts conveyed. We know but little of conditions, either here or there required to accom¬ plish physical demonstrations. We however know men use differ¬ ent words at different times, to express the same thought. The church bells ring out the National Anthem, and all who hear it know it is the prayer “God save the King.” So too the same anthem may be rendered through an organ, trumpet, piano, cornet, flute, accordeon or violin, even by the same musical interpreter; still the sounds or tone in each and every case are different, though each may be harmonious, and convey the true thought to the listening ear. The listener not only recognizes the anthem, but can readily distinguish it, and name the instrument by which produced. Rhyming messages through the writing psychic create doubt of the true origin from its strangeness; but the National Anthem rendered through the bagpipes is quite as unfamiliar to many men, though they do not impair the thought ^they render for the ear that is accustomed to them. Marconigrams between WILLIAM T. STEAD. (From Painting: by Spirit Artists for the Author.) k DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 257 sections of the Allies in the war zone, are full of information and both origin and destination are well understood. On the other hand, if one of these same Marconigrams reach the enemy its origin and its thought conveyed is not understood, and to such enemy such a Marconigram is simply meaningless jargon. Because a spirit has acquired a new mode of speaking, due to his new necessity; or because no two instruments or psychics used are alike, through which he speaks, by aid of trumpet, or writes by aid of the psychic’s hand, is not sufficient reason for denying the source of the voice, or the thought conveyed as being that of a particular individual spirit. It is a well-known fact, that no spirit intelligence can write the same through one writing psychic, as through another; nor speak with the same intonation through each trumpet; and further presents a different aspect through different materializing mediums in slight degree; nor does any photograph of a human by one photographer resemble exactly that of every, or any other. It will be further conceded' that the spirit cannot write at all times the same through any one psychic; cannot always speak the same through the one trumpet; cannot always materialize the same in the presence of the same materializing medium, every¬ thing being so absolutely dependent upon the present existing conditions. Again it is true that specified spirits, speaking through different trance mediums, whose vocal organs differ, do not each time speak in the same key or tone; nor does a vocalist or pianist always sing or play a selected song, in the same tone or key; nor do public speakers on the platform always use the same words or language, in expressing their thoughts, which alone are truly convincing to the hearers for whom intended. When a prediction or promise is made through one psychic or medium, and fulfilled through another of different phase, at wide distance apart, and at very different dates; and this repeated in various ways, or through several different phases of psychic instruments, who know not each other, and at unfixed dates, it surely cannot be classed as fraudulent; and would in ordinary human events be accepted as a corroboration. 258 DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND Two days after its date, I received the following message from the “Human-Psychic-Telephone” in New York State, while at Toledo; but will again remind the reader, that whether I am present, as in the interviews with Hypatia, and with the philosophers, and others as recorded in preceding chapters — as well as those to follow — or absent from her presence, all messages which I have received through her, are more or less of a rhyming character. Particulars regarding this psychic instru¬ ment are given in a separate chapter devoted entirely to her (Chapter XXI), and her peculiar and wonderful gifts. 445 p.m. 16th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No.l.) “All of us try, but when we fail, as one in health I tried to sail to you my friend for ever dear, I did not land, I now am here.” From what I gathered from the press at the time, the great ship “Titanic” made its dive below, at 2.20 a. m. of April 15th, and Stead with spirit aid wrote his first message from spirit sphere to me 38 hours and 25 minutes after that event. Following are extracts from other messages. 5 p.m. 16th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No 2.) “Stead I am, and it is true, that I am now cut off from you my friend of the past” (a fact). “My hand-writing is known to you, (a truth) and I will see what I can do to make it proved beyond a doubt, that I a spirit, come again from this side” ( prediction). 8.15 a. m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead. (No. 3.) “I am of those who are in the higher life. I hope to be able to write for you, and for Hypatia, your guide, who is with me in this my wish to have this hand write it for you” (prediction). “I started on a pleasant way, and storm came not, a sudden jar, and then the grinding, and the crushing of the iceberg and the sea. It all was done suddenly.” 4.35 p. m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead. “I did not realize that death was the cause of my sudden harmony. DAWN OF THE AWAKENED MIND 259 . . . . I hope to be able to prove identity (prediction) in several ways, not known to the hand that I use to write to you.” 9.45 p. m. 17th April 1912. From William T. Stead. “My name is world-wide in its fame .... and yet with all my faith, and psychic power, I did not once foresee my fate . It was ocean grave to me, and my